File No.

SME16000600
R160521P3200-TTEC
Ver00 F_2016-07
Trademarks
• The official name of Windows® Vista is Microsoft Windows Vista Operating System.
• The official name of Windows® 7 is Microsoft Windows 7 Operating System.
• The official name of Windows® 8.1 is Microsoft Windows 8.1 Operating System.
• The official name of Windows® 10 is Microsoft Windows 10 Operating System.
• The official name of Windows Server® 2008 is Microsoft Windows Server 2008 Operating System.
• The official name of Windows Server® 2012 is Microsoft Windows Server 2012 Operating System.
• Microsoft, Windows, Windows NT, and the brand names and product names of other Microsoft
products are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the US and other countries.
• Apple, AppleTalk, Macintosh, Mac, Mac OS, Safari, iPhone, iPod touch, TrueType, AirPrint, AirPrint
logo, and iPad are trademarks of Apple Inc.
• IOS is a trademark or registered trademark of Cisco in the U.S. and other countries and is used
under license.
• Adobe, Acrobat, Reader, and PostScript are trademarks or Adobe Systems Incorporated.
• Mozilla®, Firefox® and the Firefox logo® are trademarks or registered trademarks of Mozilla
Foundation in the U.S. and other countries.
• IBM, AT and AIX are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation.
• NOVELL®, NetWare® and NDS® are trademarks of Novell, Inc.
• FLOIL® is a registered trademark of Kanto Kasei CO., Ltd.
• MOLYKOTE® is a registered trademark of Dow Corning Corporation.
• KAPTON® is a registered trademark of E. I. du Pont de Nemours and Company.
• Sankol® is a registered trademark of SANKEIKAGAKU CO.,Ltd.
• e-STUDIO, e-BRIDGE, and TopAccess are trademarks of Toshiba Tec Corporation.
• Other company names and product names in this manual are the trademarks of their respective
companies.

© 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

Under the copyright laws, this manual cannot be reproduced in any form without prior written
permission of TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION.
 GENERAL PRECAUTIONS REGARDING THE SERVICE
The installation and service shall be done by a qualified service
technician.

1. Transportation/Installation
- When transporting/installing the equipment, employ two or more persons and be sure to hold the
positions as shown in the figure.
The equipment is quite heavy and weighs approximately 75.5 kg (166.4 lb.), therefore pay full
attention when handling it.

- Be sure not to hold the movable parts or units (e.g. the control panel, ADU or RADF) when
transporting the equipment.
- Be sure to use a dedicated outlet with AC 110V/15A, 120V/12A, 220-240V/8A for its power source.
- The equipment must be grounded for safety.
- Select a suitable place for installation. Avoid excessive heat, high humidity, dust, vibration and direct
sunlight.
- Provide proper ventilation since the equipment emits a slight amount of ozone.
- To insure adequate working space for the copying operation, keep a minimum clearance of 30 cm
(11.8”) on the left, 80 cm (32”) on the right and 20 cm (7.9”) on the rear.
- The equipment shall be installed near the socket outlet and shall be easily accessible.
- Be sure to fix and plug in the power cable securely after the installation so that no one trips over it.
- If the unpacking place and where the equipment is to be installed differ, perform image quality
adjustment (automatic gamma adjustment) according to the temperature and humidity of the place of
installation and the paper to be used.
- When the equipment is used after the option is removed, be sure to install the parts or the covers
which have been taken off so that the inside of the equipment is not exposed.
- Do not lift the machine by the areas in the figure that are shaded when lifting it.
2. General Precautions at Service
- Be sure to turn the power OFF and unplug the power cable during service (except for the service
should be done with the power turned ON).
- Unplug the power cable and clean the area around the prongs of the plug and socket outlet once
a year or more. A fire may occur when dust lies on this area.
- When the parts are disassembled, reassembly is the reverse of disassembly unless otherwise
noted in this manual or other related documents. Be careful not to install small parts such as
screws, washers, pins, E-rings, star washers, harnesses in the wrong places.
- Basically, the equipment should not be operated with any parts removed or disassembled.
- The PC board must be stored in an anti-electrostatic bag and handled carefully using a antistatic
wrist strap since the ICs on it may be damaged due to static electricity.

Caution: Before using the antistatic wrist strap, unplug the power cable of the equipment and
make sure that there are no charged objects which are not insulated in the vicinity.

- e-STUDIO2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC uses a laser diode. Avoid expose to laser

beam during service. Be sure not to expose your eyes to the laser beam. Do not insert reflecting
parts or tools such as a screwdriver on the laser beam path. Remove all reflecting metals such as
watches, rings, etc. before starting service.
- Be sure not to touch high-temperature sections such as the fuser unit, damp heater and areas
around them.
- Be sure not to touch high-voltage sections such as the chargers, transfer belt, 2nd transfer roller,
developer, high-voltage transformer, and power supply unit. Especially, the board of these
components should not be touched since the electric charge may remain in the capacitors, etc. on
them even after the power is turned OFF.
- Make sure that the equipment will not operate before touching potentially dangerous places (e.g.
rotating/operating sections such as gears, belts pulleys, and fans).
- Be careful when removing the covers since there might be the parts with very sharp edges
underneath. Avoid exposing your eyes to laser beam in e-STUDIO2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC
/5005AC.
- When servicing the equipment with the power turned ON, be sure not to touch live sections and
rotating/operating sections.
- Use designated jigs and tools.
- Use recommended measuring instruments or equivalents.
- Return the equipment to the original state and check the operation when the service is finished.
- Be very careful to treat the touch panel gently and never hit it. Breaking the surface could cause
malfunctions.
- Do not leave plastic bags where children can get at them. This may cause an accident such as
suffocation if a child puts his/her head into a bag. Plastic bags of options or service parts must be
brought back.
- There is a risk of an electric shock or fire resulting from the damage to the harness covering or
conduction blockage. To avoid this, be sure to wire the harness in the same way as that before
disassembling when the equipment is assembled / disassembled.

3. General operations
- Check the procedures and perform them as described in the Service Manual.
- Make sure you do not lose your balance.
- Avoid exposure to your skin and wear protective gloves as needed.

4. Important Service Parts for Safety

- The breaker, door switch, fuse, thermostat, thermofuse, thermistor, batteries, IC-RAMs including
lithium batteries, etc. are particularly important for safety. Be sure to handle/install them properly. If
these parts are short-circuited and their functions become ineffective, they may result in fatal
accidents such as burnout. Do not allow a short-circuit and do not use the parts not recommended by
Toshiba TEC Corporation.

5. Cautionary Labels
- During servicing, be sure to check the rating plate and cautionary labels to see if there is any dirt on
their surface and if they are properly stuck to the equipment.

6. Disposal of the Equipment, Supplies, Packing Materials, Used Batteries and IC-RAMs
- Regarding the recovery and disposal of the equipment, supplies, packing materials, used batteries
and IC-RAMs including lithium batteries, follow the relevant local regulations or rules.

Caution:
Dispose of used batteries and IC-RAMs including lithium batteries according to this manual.
Attention:
Se débarrasser de batteries et IC-RAMs usés y compris les batteries en lithium selon ce manuel.
Vorsicht:
Entsorgung der gebrauchten Batterien und IC-RAMs (inclusive der Lithium-Batterie) nach diesem
Handbuch.
 Revision Record
File No. SME16000600
Ver00 <2016.07.29>
Page Contents
All Initial release
Purpose of the Imaging Manual

The Imaging Manual is intended for customers using the Toshiba e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/
4505AC/5005AC with a variety of specific needs and inquiries for high image quality, such as:
 How to obtain a clearer copy image
 How to maintain the current image quality
 How to make the text look sharper on the copy

The Toshiba MFPs are factory-configured to provide image quality settings that satisfy the majority of customers.
However, these settings may not be necessarily optimal for the specific needs of all customers. Proper image
quality adjustments can satisfy such needs. Most of the adjustments described in this manual must be performed
by a service technician, but a few of them can also be performed by the customer.

It is strongly recommended that this manual be fully utilized by not only the service technician, but also the sales
representative, who also has opportunities of obtaining customer feedback on the image quality. This manual
helps the sales representative to study and comprehend what kind of customer requirements for image quality
can be satisfied, to make proposals to customers to improve image quality, and to communicate the customers’
specific requirements with ease to the service technician. In addition, this manual is expected to facilitate the
marketing of Toshiba MFPs to prospective customers that have a specific demand for image quality and the
expansion of sales.

The adjustments described in this manual are all based on the requests of actual customers. Meeting their
specific wishes will only add to their satisfaction.

Please remember to read "Caution after the adjustment," to which you must pay close attention, after finishing
the adjustment.

Precautions in Servicing
• For adjustments to be performed by the service technician, the precautions given in the Service Manual must be
stringently followed. The adjustments must be performed by a qualified service technician who has completed
the service training course.

• The default listed mentioned in this manual may be different from the actual ones, due to the timing of shipping
(firmware version). But note that the recommended values and acceptable value range stated in this manual
remain the same.
Purpose of the Imaging Manual

Icons
The following icons used in this manual denote the following:

: • Copy ——— An adjustment having an effect on copying in the Black mode (excluding
the Image smoothing mode)
• Printer ——– An adjustment having an effect on Black and White mode printing
* The adjustment will be effective, if "Black and White" is selected from
among the "Color" options on the Windows printer driver or if "Mono"
is selected from among the "Color Type" options on the Macintosh print
dialog.
• Scan ——— An adjustment having an effect on scanning in the Black mode

: • Copy ——–– An adjustment having an effect on copying in the Image smoothing mode
in the Black mode
• Scan ——— An adjustment having an effect on scanning in the Gray scale mode

: • Copy ——— An adjustment having an effect on copying in the Full color mode
• Printer ——– An adjustment having an effect on full-color printing
* The adjustment will be effective, if "Auto" or "Color" is selected from
among the "Color" options on the Windows printer driver or if "Auto" or
"Color" is selected from among the "Color Type" options on the
Macintosh print dialog.
• Scan ——— An adjustment having an effect on scanning in the Full color mode

: • Copy ——— An adjustment having an effect on copying in the Auto color mode
• Scan ——— An adjustment having an effect on scanning in the Auto color mode

PCL6 : An adjustment having an effect on printing with the Windows PCL6 emulation printer
driver

PS3 : An adjustment having an effect on printing with the Windows PS3 emulation printer driver

: An adjustment having an effect on printing with the Windows PSX emulation printer
XPS driver

: An adjustment having effect on printing with the Macintosh printer driver

Mac
: An adjustment having an effect on an image stored in the e-Filing box by the scanning
Scan to Box functions (including Scan to Box, Scan to File and Scan to E-mail)

: An adjustment having an effect on an image stored in the e-Filing box by the copying
Copy to Box functions (Copy to Box)

: An adjustment having an effect on an image stored in the e-Filing box by the printing
Print to Box functions (Print to Box)

: An adjustment having an effect on an image stored in the e-Filing box by the Fax and
Fax to Box Internet Fax functions (including Received Fax to Box and Received Internet Fax to Box)
 Table of Contents

1. General Adjustments – Copying, Printing and e-Filing (Output from Box)

0H

1.1 To Obtain a Darker Image............................................................................. 1-1

1.2 To Adjust the Density on a Solid Colored Image........................................... 1-6
1.3 To Achieve the Image Quality Most Suitable for the Paper Used (To eliminate
blur and graininess from an image)............................................................. 1-11
1.4 To Minimize Variations in the Image Quality under the Operating Conditions
(To optimally program image quality control) .............................................. 1-16
1.5 To Correct Out-of-Registration Colors ........................................................ 1-25
1.6 To Adjust Printing Positions on Front and Back Sides in the duplex mode . 1-29

2. Copier-specific Adjustments
2.1 To Copy Text Clearly (To eliminate faint, smudged or blurred text) .............. 2-1
2.1.1 To Adjust the Copy Image Quality in the Black Mode ..................................... 2-2
2.1.2 To Adjust the Copy Image Quality in the Full Color Mode ............................... 2-7
2.2 To Closely Match the Color Balance of the Original.................................... 2-13
2.3 To Improve the Reproducibility of Gray ....................................................... 2-18
2.4 To Copy in Vivid Colors .............................................................................. 2-21
2.5 To Make the Pale Area of the Original Look Darker and Sharper (To improve the
highlight reproducibility) .............................................................................. 2-26
2.6 To Eliminate the Background Color ............................................................ 2-30
2.6.1 To Adjust the Copy Image Quality in the Black Mode ................................... 2-31
2.6.2 To Adjust the Copy Image Quality in the Full Color Mode ............................. 2-33
2.7 To Avoid Copying the Image Seen through the Back of a Page Printed on Thin
Paper .......................................................................................................... 2-36
2.7.1 To Adjust the Copy Image Quality in the Black Mode ................................... 2-37
2.7.2 To Adjust the Copy Image Quality in the Full Color Mode ............................. 2-40
2.8 To Eliminate Moiré ...................................................................................... 2-42
2.9 To Copy Sharply (To enhance sharpness) ................................................. 2-46
2.10 To Make Photo Edges Look Softer ............................................................. 2-49
2.11 To Make Solid Filled Bold Text (Logo) Highly Colored ................................ 2-54
2.11.1 To Adjust the Copy Image Quality of a Black Logo ..................................... 2-55
2.11.2 To Adjust the Copy Image Quality of a Colored Logo ................................. 2-57
2.12 To Sharply Contrast the Hues of Highlighters on the Copy ......................... 2-59
2.13 To Obtain a Good Color Balance on Thick Paper ....................................... 2-63
2.14 To Obtain Smooth Gray-Scale Photo Images ............................................. 2-67
2.15 To Change the Threshold in Auto Color Mode (To change the threshold
between the Full Color mode and the Black mode to meet the user‘s needs). 2-68
2.16 To Adjust the Twin-Color Copy Image Quality ............................................ 2-71
2.16.1 To Adjust the Tint of Colors other than Black .............................................. 2-72
2.16.2 To Adjust the Boundary between Black and Colors other than Black ......... 2-73
2.16.3 To Adjust the Tint of Specified Colors for Twin-Color or Single-Color Copying
................................................................................................................................. 2-74
2.17 To Adjust the Image Quality Scanned from the DF ..................................... 2-76
2.18 To Program Frequently Used Copy Settings (To Use Custom Mode) ....... 2-79
2.18.1 To Adjust Custom Mode Settings in Black Mode......................................... 2-79
2.18.2 To Adjust Custom Mode Settings in Full Color Mode .................................. 2-80
2.19 To Copy While Erasing Shadow Outside of Image ..................................... 2-81
2.20 To Avoid Copying Blank Page of Original Scanned with DF ....................... 2-82
2.21 To Obtain Image in Even Density Level ...................................................... 2-84
2.22 To Improve Reproducibility of Red Seal Color ............................................ 2-86
e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
i
Table of Contents

2.23 To Reduce Streaks at Scanning with DF .................................................... 2-87

2.23.1 When adjusting the image quality of the Black mode .................................. 2-87
2.23.2 When adjusting the image quality of the Full color mode ............................ 2-88
2.24 To Change Gray Tone ................................................................................ 2-89
2.25 The Color Reproduction of the Back Side Differs from that for the Front Side at
DSDF Scanning .......................................................................................... 2-90
2.26 To Improve the Gradation Reproduction of Dark Portions in Photos .......... 2-91

3. Printer-specific Adjustments
Restrictions on Use of Printer Functions.................................................................. 3-1
3.1 To Maintain a Steady Color Balance ............................................................. 3-2
3.2 To Maintain a Steady Color Balance on Thick Paper or Special Paper .............. 3-4
3.3 To Obtain the Desired Color Balance ........................................................... 3-7
3.4 To Closely Match the Color Balance on the Monitor ................................... 3-15
3.5 To Maintain a Uniform Gray Hue (To maintain Consistency in Gray among
Text, Photos and Graphics) ........................................................................ 3-18
3.6 To Use Only the Black Toner to Reproduce Gray Areas (To use only the black
toner to reproduce black-and-white photos or gradational images) ............ 3-21
3.7 To Easily Adjust the Overall Brightness ...................................................... 3-25
3.8 To Adjust the Overall Saturation ................................................................. 3-28
3.9 To Easily Adjust the Overall Contrast ......................................................... 3-32
3.10 To Obtain a Sharper Print Image ................................................................ 3-35
3.11 To Obtain a Softer Image ............................................................................ 3-39
3.12 To Make Low-resolution Data Look Finer (To soften an image) ................. 3-43
3.13 To Eliminate Smudges from Highly Colored Text and Lines (To prevent toner
scattering around text and lines where a large amount of toner is used) .... 3-47
3.14 To Clearly Print Light-Colored Thin Lines or Text ....................................... 3-54
3.14.1 To Adjust the Print Image Quality in the Color Mode................................... 3-55
3.14.2 To Adjust the Print Image Quality in the Black and White Mode ................. 3-64
3.15 To Make the Light-Colored Area Darker on the Printout ............................. 3-71
3.16 To Clearly Print Thin Lines/Double Lines .................................................... 3-78
3.17 To Decrease the Image Density and Save Toner (To Print in the Toner Save
Mode) .......................................................................................................... 3-83
3.18 To Adjust the Image Density in the Toner Save Mode ................................ 3-86
3.19 To Print Illegible Gray or Colored Text in Black .......................................... 3-89
3.20 To Ignore Blank Pages for Printing ............................................................. 3-91
3.21 To Sharply Print Black Text......................................................................... 3-94
3.22 To Prevent Dark Toner from Coming Off .................................................. 3-104
3.23 To Register the Image Quality Adjusted Corresponding to a Preference (To
use the Custom Color Settings) ................................................................ 3-106
3.24 To Print a Full-Color Original in Two Colors .............................................. 3-109
3.24.1 To Adjust Colors ........................................................................................ 3-110
3.24.2 To Adjust the Sharpness ........................................................................... 3-115
3.24.3 To Print a Full-Color Original in Two Colors .............................................. 3-118
3.25 To Use ICC Profile .................................................................................... 3-119
3.25.1 To Create ICC Profiles for Printing on the Paper to be Used .................... 3-120
3.25.2 To Print Precise Colors Using Existing RGB Source ICC Profiles ............. 3-125
3.25.3 To Perform Simulated Printing with CMYK Inks of Each Ink Manufacturer .........
....................................................................................................................... 3-129
3.25.4 To Print Using Custom RGB Profiles ......................................................... 3-133

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

ii
 Table of Contents

3.25.5 To Convert Colors with Specified Source ICC Profiles (Not Using Embedded
ICC Profiles)............................................................................................... 3-137
3.25.6 To Perform Further Adjustment After Using ICC Profiles .......................... 3-142
3.26 To Improve the Reproducibility of Red Seal Color .................................... 3-145
3.27 To Suppress the Unevenness on Images ................................................. 3-147
3.28 To Suppress Color Misalignment .............................................................. 3-148
3.29 To Adjust Smudged Black Text and Black Thin Lines ............................... 3-149

4. e-Filing-specific Adjustments
4.1 To Clearly Store a B/W Image in the Auto Color Mode ................................. 4-1
4.2 To Store an Original while Reducing the File Size ........................................ 4-3
4.3 To Match the Color Balance on the Original (To adjust the color balance in
Print to Box) .................................................................................................. 4-5
4.4 To Scan and Print, while Minimizing Moiré ................................................... 4-7
4.5 To Finely Print the Image Stored in the e-Filing box (To print images stored
through Copy to Box or Print to Box) ............................................................ 4-9
4.6 To Store an Image Suitable for Displaying on the Monitor or Image Editing 4-11
4.7 To Finely Print Color Images Scanned and Stored (To print images stored
through Scan to Box) .................................................................................. 4-13
4.8 Appendix ..................................................................................................... 4-15

5. Scanning-specific Adjustments
5.1 To Clearly Scan Text (To reduce noise around text)..................................... 5-1
5.2 To Scan an Original, while Eliminating the Background Color (To eliminate the
background density) ...................................................................................... 5-3
5.3 To Clearly Scan and Print an Original in Black and White (To improve
gradation and reduce graininess) .................................................................. 5-5
5.4 To Scan the Original, while Reducing the File Size ...................................... 5-6
5.4.1 To Reduce the File Size by Changing the Options when Scanning the Original
............................................................................................................................... 5-7
5.4.2 To Reduce the File Size in Slim PDF ............................................................ 5-10
5.5 To Sharply Scan the Original (To increase the sharpness intensity)........... 5-12
5.6 To Scan an Original, while Enhancing Black............................................... 5-14
5.7 To Scan an Original with the Desired Gradation ......................................... 5-16
5.8 To Register the Original Mode Optimal for a Particular Type of Original (To
have "Custom" selected) ............................................................................. 5-18
5.9 To Eliminate Shading around Scanned Images .......................................... 5-21
5.10 To Scan Yellow Clearly ............................................................................... 5-22
5.11 To Reduce Streaks in Scanning with DF .................................................... 5-24

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

iii
1. General Adjustments – Copying, Printing and e-Filing (Output from Box)

1.1 To Obtain a Darker Image

Before adjustment After adjustment

The output image looks light and blurred. The output image looks darker and sharper.

 Explanation
When an original containing photo images or gradational images is printed, the output image sometimes looks
light and blurred. Perform image quality control or automatic calibration, and adjust the transfer roller bias
output, in order to obtain a darker and sharper image.

 Procedures
* Perform the adjustment in accordance with the procedures below.
* Both the service technician and the user can use procedure (1).
* Only the service technician must use procedures (2) and (3).

(1) Perform automatic calibration to correct variations in image density.

* "ADMIN" is selected from among the "CALIBRATION DISPLAY LEVEL" options by default. In other
words, an administrator is authorized to operate automatic calibration. But "USER" can also be selected to
allow the user to operate it. Refer to the MFP Management Guide for further information regarding how to
select the "CALIBRATION DISPLAY LEVEL" option.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

1-1
1. General Adjustments – Copying, Printing and e-Filing (Output from Box)

To adjust the copy image quality

Use steps (a) through (i) to perform automatic calibration.
(a) Press [USER FUNCTIONS] on the Control Panel to enter the "User Functions" menu.
(b) Press [ADMIN].
(c) Enter the 6 to 64 digit administrator password. Press [ENTER].
(d) Press [GENERAL].
(e) Press [CALIBRATION].
(f) Press [COPY].
(g) Press [CALIBRATION] to print out the test chart.
(h) Place the printed test chart on the original glass.
(i) Press the [START] button to perform calibration. When the calibration comes to an end, the message
"Scanning and calibrating" will disappear.
* As a result of the above steps, the copy image quality will be corrected in the Full Color mode and
Black and White mode simultaneously.

* To correct variations in image density by performing automatic calibration for each paper type, refer
to " (1) Perform automatic calibration for each paper type to correct variations in image density" in
"2.13 To Obtain a Good Color Balance on Thick Paper".

After performing automatic calibration, print and check the image quality.
If further image quality adjustments are necessary, go to step (2) to adjust the transfer (2nd transfer) roller
bias output.

To adjust the print image quality

• Image quality adjustment for 600-dpi full-color printing
Use steps (a) through (j) to perform automatic calibration.
(a) Press [USER FUNCTIONS] on the Control Panel to enter the "User Functions" menu.
(b) Press [ADMIN].
(c) Enter the 6 to 64 digit administrator password. Press [ENTER].
(d) Press [GENERAL].
(e) Press [CALIBRATION].
(f) Press [600dpi PRINT].
(g) Press [CALIBRATION] to print out the test chart.
(h) Place the printed test chart on the original glass.
(i) Press the [START] button to perform calibration. When the calibration comes to an end, the message
"Scanning and calibrating" will disappear.
(j) The message "Is a result made to reflect?" will appear. Press [YES].

* To correct variations in image density by performing automatic calibration for each paper type, refer
to "3.2 To Maintain a Steady Color Balance on Thick Paper or Special Paper".

After performing automatic calibration, print and check the image quality.
If further image quality adjustments are necessary, go to step (2) to adjust the transfer (2nd transfer) roller
bias output.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

1-2
 1. General Adjustments – Copying, Printing and e-Filing (Output from Box)

•Image quality adjustment for 1200-dpi high-resolution printing

Press [1200dpi PRINT] in step (f), in the same way as image adjustment for 600-dpi full-color printing noted
above.

After performing automatic calibration, print and check the image quality.
If further image quality adjustments are necessary, go to step (2) to adjust the transfer (2nd transfer) roller
bias output.

•Image quality adjustment with simple calibration

Use steps (a) through (d) to perform simple calibration.
(a) Press [USER FUNCTIONS] on the control panel to enter the “User Functions” menu.
(b) Press [GENERAL].
(c) Press [AUTO CALIBRATION].
(d) The message “Set Auto Calibration Yes or No.” appears. Press [Yes].

After performing simple calibration, print the image and check its quality.
If further image quality adjustments are necessary, carry out the next procedure.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

1-3
1. General Adjustments – Copying, Printing and e-Filing (Output from Box)

(2) Select [05 ADJUSTMENT MODE]. Change the values for codes [2934 to 2937] to adjust the transfer (2nd
transfer) roller bias output.
(Adjust the offset voltage of transfer roller bias so as to increase the density of the image.)
• The code to use varies depending on the paper type. Adjust the value for [05] code corresponding to the
paper type for which you would like to improve the image quality. Set the value within a range of "2" to
"8" to obtain the highest density of the image.

Recommended Acceptable
Paper type [05] code Subcode Default
value value range
Plain/Thick 0
Thick 1 1
Thick 2 2
Thick 3* 3
OHP 4
Special 1 5
Front 05-2934 2 to 8 0 to 10 5
Special 2 6
Recycled paper 7
Thick 4* 8
Thin* 9
Envelope 10
Full color Special 3* 11
Plain/Thick 0
Thick 1 1
Thick 2 2
Thick 3* 3
Special 1 5
Back Special 2 05-2935 6 2 to 8 0 to 10 5
Recycled paper 7
Thick 4* 8
Thin* 9
Envelope 10
Special 3* 11
Plain/Thick 0
Thick 1 1
Thick 2 2
Thick 3* 3
OHP 4
Special 1 5
Front 05-2936 2 to 8 0 to 10 5
Special 2 6
Recycled paper 7
Thick 4* 8
Thin* 9
Envelope 10
Black Special 3* 11
Plain/Thick 0
Thick 1 1
Thick 2 2
Thick 3* 3
Special 1 5
Back Special 2 05-2937 6 2 to 8 0 to 10 5
Recycled paper 7
Thick 4* 8
Thin* 9
Envelope 10
Special 3* 11
e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
1-4
 1. General Adjustments – Copying, Printing and e-Filing (Output from Box)

* "Front" refers to the printed side in the simplex mode or the side that is delivered facing upwards in the duplex mode.
"Back" refers to the printed side that is delivered facing downwards in the duplex mode.

* The table below shows you the acceptable paper weight for the paper type.
Paper type Acceptable paper weight
Plain paper 60 to 80 g/m² 16 to 21 lb. Bond
Thick 81 to 105 g/m² 22 to 28 lb. Bond
Thick 1 106 to 163 g/m² Max. 60 lb. Cover
Thick 2 164 to 209 g/m² Max. 110 lb. Index
Thick 3* 210 to 256 g/m² Max. 140 lb. Index
Thick 4* 257 to 280 g/m² Max. 100 lb. Cover
Thin* 52 to 59 g/m² 14 to 16 lb. Bond
*e-STUDIO2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC only

• After adjusting the transfer roller bias output, perform automatic calibration in the same manner as in
procedure (1).

<Hint> The transfer voltage increases as the set value is increased. It is usually recommended that the
set value be increased, when you print on thick paper or paper with asperities on its surface. On
the other hand, the set value should be decreased, when you print on thin paper.

After adjusting the density, print and check the image quality.
If further image quality adjustments are still necessary, use the next procedure.

(3) Check the life of the consumables (particularly the drum and fuser unit) and replace them, if necessary.
• When replacing any consumable, use steps (a) to (c).
(a) Enter the PM support mode. Reset the counter corresponding to the replaced consumable to "0."
* For further information regarding the PM support mode, refer to the Service Manual.
(b) Select [05 ADJUSTMENT MODE], select code [2742], and then press the [START] button.
• Image quality control will be performed and the image quality control value will be initialized.
(c) Perform automatic calibration in the same manner as in procedure (1).

* After replacing any consumable, remember to reset the counter corresponding to it to "0." Otherwise, it
may cause a loss in MFP performance, including degradation in the image quality and a reduction in the
life of the consumables.

 Caution after the adjustment

Nothing in particular.

 Remarks
• Enter the value mentioned in the procedures or one within the recommended value range for the adjustment.
Otherwise, it may cause a loss in MFP performance, including degradation in the image quality and a reduction
in the life of the consumables.

• If printing on another type of paper causes a problem with the image quality after the adjustment, return the set
values (for codes 05-2934 to 2937) to the default (set value: 5) and then perform the adjustment again.

• When replacing any consumable, refer to the relevant information in the Service Manual.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

1-5
1. General Adjustments – Copying, Printing and e-Filing (Output from Box)

1.2 To Adjust the Density on a Solid Colored Image

If the density is decreased If the density is increased

The solid colored area becomes lighter. The solid colored area becomes darker.

 Explanation
The density of a certain color can be made darker or lighter in accordance with the type of paper or the content of
an original.
When the toner amount on solid areas must be adjusted as requested by a user, an image quality target value or
developer bias must be adjusted.
The correction amount needed varies depending on the status of use of the consumables such as the developer
material or the drums, or the status of the installation site.
Since a constant value will be applied regardless of the influences of the above status in the developer bias
adjustment, perform image quality adjustment while changing the target value as much as possible.

 Procedures
* The service technician must perform the adjustment in accordance with the procedures below.

(1) Select [05 ADJUSTMENT MODE]. Adjust the density of the copied or printed solid image.
• Use steps (a) to (b) to perform the adjustment.
(a)Select [05 ADJUSTMENT MODE] and change the value for code [2662] to correct the image quality target value.

Color to Default
[05] Code Subcode
adjust e-STUDIO2000AC e-STUDIO2505/3505/4505/5005
Y (Yellow) 0 322 333
M (Magenta) 1 312 303
05-2662
C (Cyan) 2 327 337
K (Black) 3 333 328
*When the value becomes larger than the present one, and the solid image becomes darker. When it
becomes smaller, the image becomes lighter.
The value must fall within a range of -50 and +50 from the default.
e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
1-6
 1. General Adjustments – Copying, Printing and e-Filing (Output from Box)

It is recommended that the changing amount for one time falls within ± 20 bits.

(b) Select [05 ADJUSTMENT MODE], select code [2742] and then press the [START] button.
After performing image quality control, print the image and check its quality on the solid areas.

(2) Select [08 SETTING MODE]. Change the value to adjust the density of a solid area during the
copying/printing operation.

• Use steps (a) to (b) to perform the adjustment.

(a) Select [08 SETTING MODE]. Change the values for codes [2513/2514] to adjust the developer
bias output value.

* The value to use varies depending on the paper type and color to adjust. Check the code to use in
accordance with the following "Code" list, and refer to the "Value" list to select a proper value.

Paper type Color to adjust [08] code Subcode

Y (yellow) 0
Plain / Recycled / M (magenta) 1
08-2513
Thick / Thin* C (cyan) 2
Except
K (black) 3
extra long
Y (yellow) 0
size paper
M (magenta) 1
Other 08-2514
C (cyan) 2
K (black) 3
Y (yellow) 0
M (magenta) 1
Extra long size paper* 08-2514
C (cyan) 2
K (black) 3

* The table below shows you the acceptable paper weight for the paper type.
Paper type Acceptable paper weight
Plain/Recycled 60 to 80 g/m² Max. 60 lb. Cover
Thick 81 to 105 g/m² Max. 110 lb. Index
Thin* 52 to 59 g/m² 14 to 16 lb. Bond
* e-STUDIO2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC only

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

1-7
1. General Adjustments – Copying, Printing and e-Filing (Output from Box)

Code setting values

Correction value for developer bias Density of the solid colored
Value
output area
0 Value automatically set −100 Light
1 Value automatically set −80 ↑
2 Value automatically set −60 ↑
3 Value automatically set −40 ↑
4 Value automatically set −20 ↑
5 Value automatically set ↑
6 Value automatically set +20 Default
7 Value automatically set +40 ↓
8 Value automatically set +60 ↓
9 Value automatically set +80 ↓
10 Value automatically set +100 Dark
* Decreasing the value will make the solid colored area become lighter (decrease the amount of toner
on the solid colored area). On the other hand, increasing the value will make the solid colored area
become darker (increase the amount of toner on the area).

(b) Select [05 ADJUSTMENT MODE], select code [2742], and then press the [START] button.
After the image quality control is finished, perform printing to check the image quality of the solid
colored area.

* The changed setting values for 08-2513/2514 will be effective for the image printed immediately
after the change. When these values are changed, performing image quality control with 05-2742 is
recommended.

Repeat procedures (a) to (b) as required in order to change the setting value so that the solid colored area
becomes your desired density.
Since the density of a gradation area (halftone), such as a photograph, is adjusted as well as that of a solid
colored image, follow the procedure below.

(3) Perform automatic calibration for each type of paper whose density has been adjusted by means of the
following flowchart.
* This flowchart is common for the Full color and Black modes.

Start (Offsetting correction of contrast potential has been set.)

0: No automatic 1: Automatic calibration

calibration for each Value for 08-9059 for each paper type
paper type

Set "1" for code 08-9059.

Perform automatic calibration

Finish

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

1-8
 1. General Adjustments – Copying, Printing and e-Filing (Output from Box)

<Hint> Automatic calibration

In paper types whose density has been adjusted, automatic calibration is performed for
all MFP modes in the following table. However, automatic calibration for each paper
type can be performed separately by changing the value of 08-9059 from "0" (default) to
"1". Automatic calibration only for paper types whose density has been adjusted can also
be performed; however, it is recommended to perform it for other paper types as well.

MFP mode How to perform automatic calibration

Perform step (1) referring to "2.13 To Obtain a Good Color Balance on
Copy
Thick Paper". Perform step (2) and later if required.
Print
(600dpi) Perform step (2) referring to "3.2 To Maintain a Steady Color Balance on
Print Thick Paper or Special Paper".
(1200dpi)

After automatic calibration, perform printing and check the image quality.
If further image quality adjustments are necessary, perform the next step.

(4) Check the life of the consumables (particularly the drum and transfer belt unit) and replace them, if
necessary.
• When replacing any consumable, use steps (a) to (b).
(a) Enter the PM support mode. Reset the counter corresponding to the replaced consumable to "0."
* For further information regarding the PM support mode, refer to the Service Manual.
Be sure to reset the counter. Otherwise, it may cause a loss in performance, including degradation
in the image quality and a reduction in the life of the consumables.

(b) Perform automatic calibration.

* Be sure to perform automatic calibration not only with the paper types adjusted in step (1) and (2),
but also all paper types. Refer to the following table for adjustment.
MFP mode How to perform automatic calibration
Perform step (1) referring to "2.13 To Obtain a Good Color Balance on
Copy
Thick Paper". Perform step (2) and later if required.
Print
(600dpi) Perform step (2) referring to "3.2 To Maintain a Steady Color Balance on
Print Thick Paper or Special Paper".
(1200dpi)

* After replacing any consumable, remember to reset the counter corresponding to it to "0." Otherwise, it
may cause a loss in MFP performance, including degradation in the image quality and a reduction in the
life of the consumables.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

1-9
1. General Adjustments – Copying, Printing and e-Filing (Output from Box)

 Caution after the adjustment

• The adjustment may possibly cause an increase in the amount of toner consumed, scattering of the toner,
diminished photo images or gradations (less accurate reproducibility of halftones), extremely dark images
(decreased resolving power), extremely light images (faint thin lines), and shorten the life of the consumables.
Therefore, carefully perform the adjustment, while checking the copy or print image.

• No effect of the adjustment may appear, depending on the operating environment of the MFP. Therefore,
carefully perform the adjustment, while checking the copy or print image.

 Remarks
• The effect of the adjustment may vary, depending on the usage pattern of the consumables, such as the
developer material and drum, and the operating environment of the MFP.

• When replacing any consumable, refer to the relevant information in the Service Manual.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

1 - 10
 1. General Adjustments – Copying, Printing and e-Filing (Output from Box)

1.3 To Achieve the Image Quality Most Suitable for the Paper Used
(To eliminate blur and graininess from an image)

Before adjustment After adjustment

The image looks grained, depending on the A clear image quality, most suitable for a type
type of paper. of paper used, is obtained.

 Explanation
The image sometimes looks slightly blurred or grained on the copy or printout, depending on the type of paper
used. Adjust the transfer roller bias output and the fuser temperature, in order to achieve the image quality most
suitable for the paper used.

 Procedures
* All the steps in the adjustment must be performed by the service technician. The procedure to be followed
differs depending on the purpose as follows:
• To adjust halftone image: Go to step (1)
• To adjust images on the high-density area (only when recycled paper is used): Go to step

(1) Select [05 ADJUSTMENT MODE]. Change the values for codes [2934 to 3937] to adjust the transfer (2nd
transfer) roller bias output.
(Adjust the offset voltage of transfer roller bias so as to optimize the halftones.)
• The code to use varies depending on the paper type. Adjust the value for [05] code corresponding to the
paper type for which you would like to improve the image quality. Set the value within a range of "2" to
"8" to optimize the halftones.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

1 - 11
1. General Adjustments – Copying, Printing and e-Filing (Output from Box)

Recommended Acceptable
Paper type [05] code Subcode Default
value value range
Plain/Thick 0
Thick 1 1
Thick 2 2
Thick 3* 3
OHP 4
Special 1 5
Front 05-2934 2 to 8 0 to 10 5
Special 2 6
Recycled paper 7
Thick 4* 8
Thin* 9
Envelope 10
Full
Special 3* 11
color
Plain/Thick 0
Thick 1 1
Thick 2 2
Thick 3* 3
Special 1 5
Back Special 2 05-2935 6 2 to 8 0 to 10 5
Recycled paper 7
Thick 4* 8
Thin* 9
Envelope 10
Special 3* 11
Plain/Thick 0
Thick 1 1
Thick 2 2
Thick 3* 3
OHP 4
Special 1 5
Front 05-2936 2 to 8 0 to 10 5
Special 2 6
Recycled paper 7
Thick 4* 8
Thin* 9
Envelope 10
Black Special 3* 11
Plain/Thick 0
Thick 1 1
Thick 2 2
Thick 3* 3
Special 1 5
Back Special 2 05-2937 6 2 to 8 0 to 10 5
Recycled paper 7
Thick 4* 8
Thin* 9
Envelope 10
Special 3* 11
* "Front" refers to the printed side in the simplex mode or the side that is delivered facing downwards in the duplex
mode.
"Back" refers to the printed side that is delivered facing upwards in the duplex mode.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

1 - 12
 1. General Adjustments – Copying, Printing and e-Filing (Output from Box)

* The table below shows you the acceptable paper weight for the paper type.
Paper type Acceptable paper weight
Plain paper 60 to 80 g/m² 16 to 21 lb. Bond
Thick 81 to 105g/m² 22 to 28 lb. Bond
Thick 1 106 to 163 g/m² Max. 60 lb. Cover
Thick 2 164 to 209 g/m² Max. 110 lb. Index
Thick 3* 210 to 256 g/m² Max. 140 lb. Index
Thick 4* 257 to 280 g/m² Max. 100 lb. Cover
Thin* 52 to 59 g/m² 14 to 16 lb. Bond
* e-STUDIO2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC only

• After adjusting the transfer roller bias output, perform automatic calibration.
* For further information regarding the procedures, refer to procedure (1) in 1.1 To Obtain a Darker Image.

<Hint> The transfer voltage increases as the set value is increased. It is usually desirable that the set
value be decreased to obtain a clearly highlighted area.

After performing the adjustment, print and check the image quality.
If further image quality adjustment is necessary, go to step (3).

(2) If the image on the high-density area looks grained on plain paper other than the TOSHIBA-recommended
one is used, select "recycled paper" as a paper type.
* To select the paper type, refer to the Operator’s Manual for Copying Guide.
• If fine adjustment of image quality in the recycled paper mode is required in accordance with the paper
type, follow the steps from (a) to (b) below.
(a) Select [05 ADJUSTMENT MODE]. Change the value of the codes [2934] to [2937] to adjust (2nd)
transfer bias output. (In this step the transfer roller bias offset voltage is adjusted to print the high-
density area or the halftone area of the image most clearly.)

Recom Accepta
Subco
Paper type [05] code mended ble value Default
de
value range
Recycled
Front 05-2934 7 2 to 8 0 to 10 5
paper
Full color
Recycled
Back 05-2935 7 2 to 8 0 to 10 5
paper
Recycled
Front 05-2936 7 2 to 8 0 to 10 5
paper
Black
Recycled
Back 05-2937 7 2 to 8 0 to 10 5
paper
* "Front" refers to the printed side in the simplex mode or the side that is delivered facing downwards
in the duplex mode.
"Back" refers to the printed side that is delivered facing upwards in the duplex mode.

• After adjusting the transfer roller bias output, perform automatic calibration.
* Refer to step (1) in "1.1 To Obtain a Darker Image".

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

1 - 13
1. General Adjustments – Copying, Printing and e-Filing (Output from Box)

<Hint> The larger the setting value is, the more the transfer voltage increases. It is usually
recommended that the set value be increased when you print on thick paper or paper with
asperities on its surface. On the other hand, the set value should be decreased when you print on
thin paper.

After setting the value, print and check the image quality.
If further image quality adjustment is necessary, go to step (b).

(b) Select [08 SETTING MODE]. Change the value of the codes [5293/5294] to adjust fusing
temperature in the recycled paper mode. (In this step fusing temperature is adjusted to print the high-
density area of the image most clearly.)

Accepta
Paper Recommen
Adjustment [08] code Subcode ble value Default
type ded value
range
Black Recycled 0
Center heater 08-5293 9 to 11 0 to 22 11
Color paper 1

• After adjusting the fusing temperature, perform automatic calibration.

* Refer to step (1) in "1.1 To Obtain a Darker Image".

<Hint> The smaller the setting value, the lower the fusing temperature becomes. It is usually
recommended that the set value be decreased in order to suppress roughness on the high-density
area of the image. Adjust the value within the range of the recommended values while checking
the image carefully because if it is too small, insufficient fusing may occur.
Since temperatures on the long side of the paper cannot be kept in a proper balance, the same
value must be set for the [08] codes [5293] and [5294] unless otherwise required so.

After setting the value, print and check the image quality.
If further image quality adjustment is necessary, go to step (3).

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

1 - 14
 1. General Adjustments – Copying, Printing and e-Filing (Output from Box)

(3) Check the life of the consumables (particularly the drum and transfer belt unit) and replace them, if
necessary.
• When replacing any consumable, use steps (a) to (b).
(a) Enter the PM support mode. Reset the counter corresponding to the replaced consumable part to "0."
* For further information regarding the PM support mode, refer to the Service Manual.
(b) Perform automatic calibration.
* For further information regarding the procedures, refer to procedure (1) in 1.1 To Obtain a Darker
Image.

* After replacing any consumable, remember to reset the counter by making it correspond to "0." Otherwise,
it may cause a loss in MFP performance, including degradation in the image quality and a reduction in the
life of the consumables.

 Caution after the adjustment

After the fusing temperature was adjusted in step (2) above, printing interruption may occur due to improper
fusing temperature. Therefore adjust the value carefully. If you want to change the conditions for printing
interruption, change the value of the [08] code [5409] (abnormality process starting temperature setting /
recycled paper). For the setting values, refer to the Service Manual.

 Remarks
• Enter the value mentioned in the procedures or one within the recommended value range for the adjustment.
Otherwise, it may cause a loss in MFP performance, including degradation in the image quality and a reduction
in the life of the consumables.

• The desired image quality may not be obtained, depending on the type of paper used. In this case, use the
recommended paper and then print or adjust the image quality.

• If an image problem occurs when you use the other paper type, temporarily set the values of the [08] codes
[2934] to [2937] (bias offset) and [5293] to [5294] (fusing temperature during printing) back to the default ones.
Then perform the adjustment again.

• When replacing any consumable, refer to the relevant information in the Service Manual.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

1 - 15
1. General Adjustments – Copying, Printing and e-Filing (Output from Box)

1.4 To Minimize Variations in the Image Quality under the Operating Conditions
(To optimally program image quality control)

Before adjustment After adjustment

The image contrast varies, depending on the The image quality is constantly maintained.
date and time when copying or printing is
performed or the type of job.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

1 - 16
 1. General Adjustments – Copying, Printing and e-Filing (Output from Box)

 Explanation
Variation in density may appear on images depending on date and time when copying or printing is performed or
the type of a job. To maintain image quality at a certain level, the types or the intervals among image quality
controls must be adjusted.
There are two image quality control modes; the Short Mode which is only for adjusting density on solid images
in a short time, and the Full Mode which is for adjusting density on the wide areas from halftones to solid images.

 Procedures
* The service technician must perform the adjustment in accordance with the procedures below.

(1) The types or the intervals in image quality controls must be adjusted by setting the most appropriate value
for [08] code in accordance with the status of use or stability level required by a user. See the table below for
an overview of image quality controls.
(1)-1. Overview of image quality controls:

Type of image quality control (IQC)

Code for
Target of
Type of control Contents forcible
correction
control
i)Charging/developer bias Density on solid
image 05-2742
1. Full mode IQC *1 correction
ii)Process for halftones Halftones 05-2745
Charging/developer bias simple Density on solid
2. Short Mode IQC *2 Color image 05-2738
correction
Charging/developer bias simple Density on solid
3. Short Mode IQC *2 Black image 05-2739
correction
*1. The correction accuracy is high but it takes approx. 90 seconds (equal to the time taken by existing
models). This control is performed with a simple calibration operated from the control panel.
*2. The control with the simple correction takes approx. 15 seconds, but its correction accuracy is not as
high as the one in the Full Mode.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

1 - 17
1. General Adjustments – Copying, Printing and e-Filing (Output from Box)

Default starting conditions

Start-up condition Full Short Adjustment
(1)After the first warming-up in Switch IQC which starts after the first warming-up
a day *3 (o) o in a day. Code: 08-2492
0: Disabled, 1: Short, 2: Full
(2)When recovered from the
o -
toner-empty status
(3)Time left unused *3 Switch IQC to start. Code: 08-2496
0: Disabled, 1: Short, 2: Full *6
(o) o
Set the period of time left unused. Code: 08-2507,
Default: 2 hours
(4)Relative humidity Set the humidity. Code: 08-2505, Default: 10% RH
o

(5)Accumulated number of Set the number of the output pages. Code: 08-2509,
output pages (Full) o Default: 1000 pages *4
(6) Accumulated number of Set the number of the output pages. Code: 08-2497,
output pages (Short, Color) o Default: 50 pages *4 *5
(7) Accumulated number of
o ↑
output pages (Short, Black)
*3. The Short Mode is set as a default because the MFP can be recovered from warming-up or the Sleep
Mode in a shorter time. For more stable image quality, switch it to the Full Mode.
*4. During continuous copying or printing, the control does not start until all jobs are finished.
If the control needs to be started when the specified number of pages has been output, also change the
setting value for code 08-9199 (automatic interruption page number setting for printing). (Default: 500
pages)
*5. In the Short Mode, the image quality control starts individually for each counter of the Black Mode and
the Color Mode. When the control is performed for the Color Mode, the counter for the Black Mode is also
reset. However,the counter for the Color Mode is not reset when the control is performed for the Black
Mode.
*6: 0 (Disabled) or 1 (Short) is set for 08-9264. If the equipment is left unused for two hours or more, the
Full mode ICQ starts after the end of a job in order to maintain the image quality.

(1)-2. The MFP is installed in a place where the temperature and humidity vary widely:

(a) Set "1" (value × 5%R.H.) for code 08-2505 to increase the frequency of image quality control, in
response to a change in humidity.

* Image quality control will be performed, when the relative humidity changes in accordance with the
specified difference from the previous image quality control. If the difference in the relative humidity
exceeds the specified value, image quality control is performed first. Then a copy or print job will be
performed.

Value for 08-2505 Difference in relative humidity

1 5%R.H.
2 10%R.H. (default)

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

1 - 18
 1. General Adjustments – Copying, Printing and e-Filing (Output from Box)

(b) Set "5" or "3" for code 08-2508 to increase the frequency of image quality control, in response to a
change in humidity.

* Image quality control will be performed, when the drum temperature changes in accordance with the
difference from the previous image quality control. If the difference in the drum temperature exceeds
the specified value after a print job is performed, image quality control is performed.

Value for 08-2508 Difference in drum temperature

3 3°C
5 5°C
7 7°C (default)

• After setting the value for code 08-2505, forcibly perform image quality control, as follows:
Select [05 ADJUSTMENT MODE]. Select code [2742]. Press the [START] button.

(1)-3. To Have Uniform Variations in the Image Quality after Return from the Auto Power Save
Mode:
Change the value of the [08] code [2507] to change the conditions for starting image quality control (shorten
the period of time the MFP is left unused) after the MFP was recovered from the auto power save mode, so
that the image quality control will be easily performed.

Image quality control is performed before the start of a job.

For a more stable image quality on halftones, switch the image quality control to start to the Full Mode with
code 08-2492. (0: Disabled, 1: Short, 2: Full)
Value for
Period of time the MFP is left unused before starting image quality control
08-2507
0 3 minutes or longer
1 5 minutes or longer
2 7 minutes or longer
3 10 minutes or longer
4 15 minutes or longer
5 20 minutes or longer
6 30 minutes or longer
7 45 minutes or longer
8 60 minutes or longer
9 90 minutes or longer
10 120 minutes or longer
11 150 minutes or longer
12 180 minutes or longer
13 240 minutes or longer
14 300 minutes or longer
15 360 minutes or longer (default value)

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

1 - 19
1. General Adjustments – Copying, Printing and e-Filing (Output from Box)

<Note> Do not disable the Auto shut off mode timer setting ("0" is set for 08-9112) while the
Auto power save timer setting is set to invalid ("0" is set for 08-9111). If both settings are
set to invalid, this equipment does not enter the energy saving mode so it is always in the
ready status. Due to this, image quality control according to the period of time the MFP
is left unused is not performed regardless of the setting value of 08-2507.

• After setting the value for code 08-2507, forcibly perform image quality control, as follows:
Select [05 ADJUSTMENT MODE], select code [2742], and then press the [START] button.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

1 - 20
 1. General Adjustments – Copying, Printing and e-Filing (Output from Box)

(1)-4. To optimize the image quality stability according to the number of output pages in a day or
the type of originals:
By changing the setting value for [08] codes, the image quality control can be started at the desired timing
after the specified number of pages have been output. Referring to the guide below, set the value
appropriately in accordance with the total number of pages output in a day, the number of jobs frequently
performed, or the requested image quality in the user’s office.
After changing the setting value, perform the image quality control following the procedure below.
Select [05 ADJUSTMENT MODE]. Select code [2742]. Press the [START] button.
After performing the adjustment, print the image and check its quality.

(A). For standard office use (mainly business documents) (Default)

Code to set Setting Starting conditions
number of
pages value
Full IQC 08-2509 1000 The control starts after every 1000 pages.
The control starts after 50 pages have been output, or when a
Short IQC 08-2497 100
job is interrupted after every 500 pages.
Printing
08-9199 500
interrupted

(B). To stabilize the density in continuous copying/printing(when interrupting jobs and

starting the Short Mode at every 50 pages)
Code to set Setting Starting conditions
number of
pages value *6
Full IQC 08-2509 1000 The control starts after every 1000 pages.
Short IQC The control starts when a job is interrupted after every 50
08-2497 50
pages.
Printing
08-9199 50
interrupted
*6. To start the Short Mode at every 30 pages, set the value to “30” for both 08-2497 and 08-9199. However,
setting a too-short interval will use up too much toner, even though the consumption in the Short Mode is
approximately a quarter of that in the Full Mode.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

1 - 21
1. General Adjustments – Copying, Printing and e-Filing (Output from Box)

(C). To stabilize the image quality on halftones in pictures (when interrupting jobs and
starting the Full Mode at every 250 pages)
Code to set Setting Starting conditions
number of
pages value *7
Full IQC 08-2509 250 The control starts after every 250 pages.
Short IQC The control starts after 50 pages have been output, or when a
08-2497 100
job is interrupted after every 250 pages.
Printing
08-9199 250
interrupted
*7. When the number of times in the Full Mode increases, more toner is consumed.

(D). To emphasize quality (for less use of the Short Mode)

Code to set Setting Starting conditions
number of
pages value *8
Full IQC 08-2509 1000 The control starts after every 250 pages.
Short IQC The control starts only when a job is interrupted after 500
08-2497 500
pages have been output.
Printing
08-9199 1000
interrupted
*8. When the Full Mode and the Short Mode are set simultaneously, the former has a priority.
If you never want to start the Short Mode, set “1” (Disabled) to code 08-2495. (0: Enabled)

Notes:
・Set the value in consideration of users’ requests and the total number of pages output in a day. To maintain
the optimal image quality, it is recommended to start the Short Mode at least two or three times a day.
・Do not set the number of output pages smaller than 50 for codes 08-2509 and 08-9199 because this affects
the life of consumables such as a cleaning blade.
・Changing this setting improves the stability of the image quality. However, a long application of this
change affects the life of consumables. It is recommended to make only a minimal change and then
return to the default value immediately.
・ If 08-2367 (ON/OFF setting of drum and belt reverse rotation amount control) is set to “0”, there is no
effect because interrupting a job does not cause image quality control, regardless of the setting value of 08-
2509 and 08-9199.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

1 - 22
 1. General Adjustments – Copying, Printing and e-Filing (Output from Box)

(2) Use the thick paper mode when you print on plain paper.
• If the thick paper mode is used, printing decelerates but image quality becomes more stable because
differences in color or temperatures during continuous printing will be reduced.
• Set the thick paper mode following steps (a) to (i) below.
(a) Press [USER FUNCTIONS] on the Control Panel to enter the “User Functions” menu.
(b) Press [USER].
(c) Press [DRAWER] in the USER menu.
(d) Select a drawer that you want to set for thick paper mode and paper size.
(e) Press [PAPER TYPE].
(f) Press [THICK 1].
(g) Select [05 ADJUSTMENT MODE]. Then select the subcode “1” for the code [2934] and change the
setting value to “3”.
• Change the level of transfer roller bias offset in the color mode, the front side of paper.
* Check how the copy image changes carefully. The setting value may be changed to “4” or “2” if
required.
(h) Place paper to be used on the drawer that you selected in step (d) above.
(i) Perform automatic calibration.
* Refer to step (1) in “1.1 To Obtain a Darker Image”.

After setting the value, print and check the image quality.
If further image quality adjustment is necessary, go to the next step.

(3) Check the life of the consumables (particularly the drum and transfer belt unit) and replace them, if
necessary.
• When replacing any consumable, use steps (a) to (b).
(a) Enter the PM support mode. Reset the counter corresponding to the replaced consumable to “0.”
* For further information regarding the PM support mode, refer to the Service Manual.
(b) Perform automatic calibration.
* For further information regarding the procedures, refer to procedure (1) in 1.1 To Obtain a Darker
Image.

* After replacing any consumable, remember to reset the counter corresponding to it to “0.” Otherwise, it
may cause a loss in MFP performance, including degradation in the image quality and a reduction in the
life of the consumables.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

1 - 23
1. General Adjustments – Copying, Printing and e-Filing (Output from Box)

 Caution after the adjustment

• The adjustment may possibly slow down the copying or printing speed, extend the warm-up time when the
MFP is returned from the auto power save mode, and shorten the life of the consumables, because of an
increase in the number of times image quality control is performed. Therefore, carefully perform the
adjustment, while checking the copy or print image.
• Note the following when you print in thick paper mode in step (2):
• Printing speed decelerates to 17.5 sheets per minute (A4/LT) after the adjustment.
• The thick paper mode cannot be set for the LCF (Large Capacity Feeder, optional). Therefore the
maximum number of sheets acceptable for continuous printing should be the one for the drawer.
However in the copying mode, you can set the thick paper mode to more than one drawer and copy
more paper continuously with the automatic drawer change function.
• The density level of the halftone image may differ from that of the plain paper mode after the
adjustment.
• The PM counter value increases by 2 counts for 1 sheet of thick paper.

 Remarks
• Enter the value mentioned in the procedures or one within the recommended value range for the adjustment.
Otherwise, it may cause a loss in MFP performance, including slowdown in the copying or printing speed.

• When replacing any consumable, refer to the relevant information in the Service Manual.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

1 - 24
 1. General Adjustments – Copying, Printing and e-Filing (Output from Box)

1.5 To Correct Out-of-Registration Colors

Before adjustment After adjustment

Paper feeding direction Paper feeding direction

The text and background are misaligned or out Text is aligned with the background and a clear
of registration. copy/print image is obtained.

 Explanation
Colors of text or a thin line are sometimes printed out of alignment. Perform color registration control, in order
to print or copy without out-of-registration colors.

 Procedures
* The service technician must perform the adjustment in accordance with the procedure below.
* This adjustment is intended to correct misaligned colors due to differences between the paper feeding speed and
rotating speed of the transfer belt. Therefore, it will be effective, only if colors are misaligned in the paper
feeding direction (or the secondary scanning direction). This adjustment cannot improve misaligned colors in
the direction perpendicular to paper feeding (or primary scanning) or in the secondary scanning direction
periodically (partially at regular intervals). Refer to “Troubleshooting for the Image 1) Color deviation” in the
Service Manual.

<Adjustment for plain paper>

(1) Make sure that no out-of-registration colors are visible on an original.

(2) Select [05 ADJUSTMENT MODE], select code [4719], and then press the [START] button.
• Registration control will be forcibly performed.

<Adjustment for thick paper>

(1) Make sure that no out-of-registration colors are visible on an original.

(2) Load the thick papers in the drawer. (Paper weight: 106 to 256 g/m² / 29 to 80 lbs (Cover) / 90 to 140 lbs
(Index))

(3) Select the paper type of the thick paper loaded in the drawer.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

1 - 25
1. General Adjustments – Copying, Printing and e-Filing (Output from Box)

(4) Select [05 ADJUSTMENT MODE]. Select code [4719], and then press the [START] button.
• Registration control will be forcibly performed.

(5) Enter code [104], and then press [TEST PRINT].

•Paper is fed from the drawer to print out a test print pattern.
Code Test print pattern Paper size No. of copies
Test print pattern for identifying
104 A3/LD 2
out-of-registration colors

(6) Check the first page of the printed test print pattern to identify a pattern for the out-of-registration colors.
* There are 2 patterns for the out-of-registration colors. Check which pattern the out-of-registration colors to
adjust on the body are included.

Pattern A for out-of-registration colors

Patch eliminated
trailing edge

Paper feeding speed

faster than transfer belt
Page 1

Page number
rotating speed

Paper feeding direction

Black belt at the leading edge in the paper feeding direction

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

1 - 26
 1. General Adjustments – Copying, Printing and e-Filing (Output from Box)

Pattern B for out-of-registration colors

Patch eliminated at
the leading edge

Paper feeding speed

slower than transfer belt
Page 1

rotating speed
Paper feeding direction

(6) Finely adjust the rotating speed of the fuser motor, in accordance with a pattern for the out-of-registration colors.
•Use steps (a) to (b) to perform the adjustment.
(a) Select code [4529]. Finely adjust the rotating speed of the fuser motor.
• Adjust the values in accordance with a pattern for the out-of-registration colors as shown in the table
below.
Pattern for
out-of- Acceptable
[05] code Subcode Recommended value Default
registration value range
colors
123 to 127
Pattern A (Set a value smaller than the
current value)
05-4529 4 0 to 255 128
129 to 133
Pattern B (Set a value larger than the
current value)

(b) Select code [104], and then press [TEST PRINT]. Check all the patches on the second page of the
printed test print pattern to check whether the misaligned colors have been improved.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

1 - 27
1. General Adjustments – Copying, Printing and e-Filing (Output from Box)

 Caution after the adjustment

Nothing in particular.

 Remarks
• Enter a value within the recommended value range mentioned in the procedures. Otherwise, it may cause a loss
in MFP performance, including degradation in the image quality.

• Out-of-registration colors cannot always be perfectly corrected; this depends on the type of text or lines to print.

• Also, refer to the relevant information in the Service Manual for further information regarding color registration
control procedures.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

1 - 28
 1. General Adjustments – Copying, Printing and e-Filing (Output from Box)

1.6 To Adjust Printing Positions on Front and Back Sides in the

duplex mode

 Explanation
The printing positions on the front and back sides of business cards may deviate. The amount of this deviation
can be reduced with image position or image distortion adjustment.

 Procedures
* The service technicians must perform all adjustments in accordance with the procedures below.
(1) Overview of adjustment
The adjustment is divided into 3 major categories noted below. The points for each adjustment are as follows:
(a) Image position adjustment: Adjust values as closely as you can to the target value (+/-0).
(To make printing positions as precise as possible)
(b) Image distortion adjustment: Adjust the image distortion that is not susceptible to the self-diagnostic
codes by using the hardware.
(To make printing positions as precise as possible)
(c) Fine image positions adjustment: Adjust the image positions finely to place the images on both sides in
their optimal positions.

(2)-(a) Image position adjustment

Refer to the “6.1.7 Image dimensional adjustment at the printing section” of the Service Manual and adjust
the image positions by approximating values from [A] to [F] below to a target value (+/-0) as closely as
possible.

Adjustment Adjustment
Items Chart Chart
Tolerance Tolerance
[A] Reproduction ratio of the primary
05-98*1 200 ± 0.5 mm 05-315 *1 4.2 ± 0.5 mm
scanning direction
[B] Primary scanning data writing start
52 ± 0.5 mm 4.2 ± 0.5 mm
position
[C] Reproduction ratio of the secondary
scanning direction (Fine adjustment of 05-98 200 ± 0.5 mm 05-315 *2 4.2 ± 0.5 mm
transfer belt motor rotation speed)
[D] Secondary scanning data writing start
52 ± 0.5 mm 4.2 ± 0.5 mm
position
[E] Primary scanning data writing start
52 ± 0.5 mm 4.2 ± 0.5 mm
position at duplexing
05-3 05-316 *2
[F] Secondary scanning data writing start
52 ± 0.5 mm 4.2 ± 0.5 mm
position at duplexing
*1: e-STUDIO2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC only
*2: Use this chart to adjust the void width match.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

1 - 29
1. General Adjustments – Copying, Printing and e-Filing (Output from Box)

Reproduction ratio adjustment of primary scanning direction

Adjust the reproduction ratio of primary scanning direction in printing.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC
Since this adjustment changes the scaling of image data, use the printed image output in the normal mode or
the print sample shown in "(3)-(b) Image distortion adjustment" on next page for the adjustment. Do not use
the printed image output in [05 ADJUSTMENT MODE] (grid pattern, etc.) since the image processing is not
executed for the reproduction ratio adjustment.
Code Function Remarks
The larger the value is, the larger the reproduction ratio in the
primary scanning direction becomes.
7001 PRT(*1)/FAX
(0.1%/step)
Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (Default: 128)

*1: PRT supports only printing for Scan to Box (a binary format image). This adjustment is not available
for 600dpi or 600x1200dpi printing.

Make a test copy and compare the image obtained with the current settings; if necessary, make
adjustments according to the following procedure:

Notes:
• Since the reproduction ratio may vary due to expansion and contraction of the paper immediately
after the image is printed out, it is recommended to measure its dimension after at least 3
minutes have passed.
• This adjustment may cause image troubles such as moire, disappearance or breaking of thin
lines on the printed image. Therefore check if there is no such image trouble while you are
performing the adjustment.

<Procedure>
(1) Select [05 ADJUSTMENT MODE].
(2) Key in a code and press the [START] button.
(3) Key in the adjustment value. (To correct a value, press [CLEAR])
(4) Press [OK] to store the value. -> The equipment goes back to the
ready state.
(5) Make a test copy and check the image copied. To check the printed image, turn off the power
and then back on, and then print the image. If the image is not in the desired reproduction ratio,
repeat steps (2) to (4).

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

1 - 30
 1. General Adjustments – Copying, Printing and e-Filing (Output from Box)

e-STUDIO2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC
[05] Code Function Remarks

The larger the value is, the larger the reproduction ratio in the
05-4001 PRT/FAX primary scanning direction becomes. (0.1%/step)
Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (Default: 128)

Perform adjustments according to the following procedure while checking the chart output by [05
Adjustment Mode].

Notes:
• Since the reproduction ratio may vary due to expansion and contraction of paper immediately
after the image is printed out, it is recommended to measure its dimension after at least 3 minutes
have passed.
• Use the second drawer, A3/LD.
• Make sure the first line of the grid pattern is printed out since the line is occasionally vanished.

<Procedure>
(1) Select [05 ADJUSTMENT MODE].
(2) Key in a code and press the [START] button.
(3) Key in the adjustment value. (To correct a value, press [CLEAR].)
(4) Press [OK] to store the value. → The equipment goes back to the ready state.
(5) Check the chart.
If the image is not in the desired reproduction ratio, repeat steps (2) to (4).

(3)-(b) Image distortion adjustment

(3)-1 Adjustment of tilted images on the trailing edge
In this procedure, it is recommended to use the print sample (05-316, 04-141, 04-410) as shown
below.

③15mm ⑦15mm
Front side
④15mm ⑧15mm

Center position
(top-bottom and left-right symmetric)
②15mm ⑥15mm
Rear side
①15mm ⑤15mm

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

1 - 31
1. General Adjustments – Copying, Printing and e-Filing (Output from Box)

• Example of phenomenon
The image on the trailing edge is tilted as shown below in the simplex mode.

Front side

Rear side

When this tilted image is printed in the duplex mode, image positions on the front and back sides become as
shown below.

Front side

Back side

• Adjustment method
e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC
Loosen the 2 screws [2] on the fuser unit guide rail (front). Remove 1 screw [3].
Change its position to the adjustment hole [4] and move the fuser unit guide rail (front) [2] up or down.
(Guideline of the movement: One scale)
* There is a 0.5mm wide scale at the position indicated by [5].

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

1 - 32
 1. General Adjustments – Copying, Printing and e-Filing (Output from Box)

Move the fuser unit guide rail [1] upward Move the fuser unit guide rail [1] downward

Front side Front side

Before
adjustment

After
adjustment

Rear side Rear side

The reproduction ratio in the secondary scanning The reproduction ratio in the secondary scanning
direction on the front side becomes large. direction on the front side becomes small.

e-STUDIO2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC
Loosen 1 screw [1] on the fuser unit front guide rail. Remove 1 screw [2] and replace it in the adjustment
hole [3]. Move the fuser unit front guide rail up or down (one step).
* 0.5-mm scale [4]

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

1 - 33
1. General Adjustments – Copying, Printing and e-Filing (Output from Box)

Move the fuser unit guide rail [1] upward Move the fuser unit guide rail [1] downward

Front side Front side

Before
adjustment

After
adjustment

Rear side Rear side

The reproduction ratio in the secondary scanning The reproduction ratio in the secondary scanning
direction on the front side becomes large. direction on the front side becomes small.

(3)-2 Adjustment of tilted images on the leading/trailing edge

• Example of phenomenon
The image on the leading and trailing edges is tilted as shown below in the simplex mode.

Front side

Rear side

When this tilted image is printed in the duplex mode, image positions on the front and back sides become as
shown below.

Front side

Back side

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

1 - 34
 1. General Adjustments – Copying, Printing and e-Filing (Output from Box)

• Adjust the tilted images of leading edge

When a printed image at the leading edge of paper is tilted as shown below, correct this by the following
steps.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

1 - 35
1. General Adjustments – Copying, Printing and e-Filing (Output from Box)

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC

Adjustment method
Tilting the developer unit.

<Adjustment procedure>
(1) Remove the waste toner box, toner box, developer unit, cleaner unit, left cover and receiving tray from the
MFP.
Refer to the following pages of the Service Manual
(a) 4.6.1 Waste toner box
(b) 4.6.2 Developer unit
(c) 4.6.8 Cleaner unit
(d) 4.1.2 Left cover
(e) 4.1.3 Recieving tray

(2) Remove 3 screws [1].

(3) Release the latches [1], and then take off the toner cover
[2].

Note:
When taking off the toner cover, remove the cooling duct
[3], and toner stays [4] and [5].

(4) Loosen 5 screws [1].

(5) Move the frame [2] to the right or left to adjust its position.

Remark:
Up to 1 mm is adjustable (0.5 mm for the right and left).

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

1 - 36
 1. General Adjustments – Copying, Printing and e-Filing (Output from Box)

Move the frame [2] to the right Move the frame [2] to the left

Front side Front side

Before
adjustment

After
adjustment

Rear side Rear side

The writing start position on the front side is moved The writing start position on the front side is moved
to the leading edge side. to the trailing edge side.

e-STUDIO2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC

Procedure
Tilt the laser optical unit (LSU).

Explanation of the portions used for adjustment

[1] LSU holder

[2] Frame
[3] The screw hole to use when adjusting the titled volume
[4] The scale to use when adjusting the tilted volume (LSU holder side)
[5] The scale to use when adjusting the tilted volume (frame side)
[6] The screw hole to use when the value of “A-B” is +0.5 mm (“+0.5” is marked)
[7] The screw hole to use when the value of “A-B” is -0.5 mm (“-0.5” is marked)

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

1 - 37
1. General Adjustments – Copying, Printing and e-Filing (Output from Box)

<Procedure>
Check that paper is not skewed in the side guides of the drawer in advance.

(1) Output a grid pattern of A3/LD size and check the tilted volume of an image (the value of “A-B”).

(2) Remove 5 screws and take off the left cover (Refer to “4.1.2. Left cover” in the Service Manual).

Notes:
Be sure to check the scale positions before carrying
out the adjustment. Take a memo of the scale
positions where the LSU holder [4] and the frame [5]
ones are aligned.
Fig. C: The scale position is aligned at the center. Fig.
D: The scale position is aligned at the fifth one on the
front side from the center.

(3) Loosen 1 screw [8].

(4) Remove 1 screw [9].

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

1 - 38
 1. General Adjustments – Copying, Printing and e-Filing (Output from Box)

(5) Temporarily tighten the screw [9] removed in step

(4) into the screw hole [3].

(6)Select the closest value to the tilted volume "A-B" from the following table and check the scales of the frame
and the LSU holder to be aligned.

Scale position to be aligned Tilted volume (A-B): [Unit: mm]

Frame LSU holder 297 mm (A3) 279 mm (LD)

Eighth Eighth 1.12 1.04

Seventh Seventh 0.98 0.91

Sixth Sixth 0.84 0.78

Fifth Fifth 0.7 0.65

Front
Fourth Fourth 0.56 0.52

Third Third 0.42 0.39

Second Second 0.28 0.26

First First 0.14 0.13

Center 0 0 0 0

First First -0.14 -0.13

Second Second -0.28 -0.26

Third Third -0.42 -0.39

Fourth Fourth -0.56 -0.52

Rear
Fifth Fifth -0.7 -0.65

Sixth Sixth -0.84 -0.78

Seventh Seventh -0.98 -0.91

Eighth Eighth -1.12 -1.04

Moving approx.
Moving approx.
Remarks 0.14 mm per 1
0.13 mm per 1 scale
scale

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

1 - 39
1. General Adjustments – Copying, Printing and e-Filing (Output from Box)

The scale positions from the first to the eighth on the front and rear sides

(7)Make sure of the scale position to be aligned by referring to the table. Align the scale of LSU holder to that for
the frame.

E.g. 1: A3 size paper (Width: 297 mm), A-B:

Approx. -0.6 mm
- Select -0.56 from the table and make sure that the
scale position located at the fourth one on the rear
side is to be aligned.
- Move the LSU holder [1] to the front side so that
its scale position of the fourth one on the rear side
is aligned to that for the frame [2].

E.g. 2: A3 size paper (Width: 297 mm), A-B:

Approx. 0.3 mm
- Select 0.3 from the table and make sure that the
scale position located at the second one on the
front side is to be aligned.
- Move the LSU holder [1] to the rear side so that its
scale position of the second one on the front side
is aligned to that for the frame [2].

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

1 - 40
 1. General Adjustments – Copying, Printing and e-Filing (Output from Box)

Notes:
This describes the adjustment procedure in the standard operation; however, adjustment of tilting in the laser
optical unit has sometimes been carried out on the manufacturing line and the scales of the frame and the LSU
holder may be aligned at a position other than the center.

In this case, move the scale position only by the required volume to be tilted since the ones of the frame and the
LSU holder have aligned.

Obtain the value in accordance with the following condition when moving the scale.
A3 size paper (Width: 297 mm): The value of A-B becomes smaller by approx. 0.14 mm per 1 scale.
LD size paper (Width: 279 mm): The value of A-B becomes smaller by approx. 0.13 mm per 1 scale.
If the value of A-B is plus, use the scale in the front side.
If the value of A-B is minus, use the scale in the rear side.

E.g. 3: The second scales on the front side are aligned

and the value of A-B is approx. 0.5 mm
Since the value of A-B is plus, move the scale to the rear
side. Since the value of A-B is approx. 0.5 mm, move
4 scales.
Move the LSU holder by 4 scales to the rear side from
the second scale on the front side, so that the sixth
ones are aligned.

(8) Secure the screw temporarily tightened in step (5).

(9) Tighten the screw [8] loosened in step (3).

(10) Output a grid pattern of A3/LD size and check whether image tilting has occurred or not. If this problem still
persists, return to step (3) and perform the adjustment again.

* The tilted volume of 0.5 mm or -0.5 mm can be adjusted in a simplified method.

For details, refer to “6.7.2. Adjustment of image tilting at the leading edge [2] Adjustment of the tilted volume
by 0.5 mm with a simplified method” in the Service Manual.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

1 - 41
1. General Adjustments – Copying, Printing and e-Filing (Output from Box)

(4)-(d) Fine image position adjustment

Adjust the image position finely in order to shift the image on both sides to the optimal positions. Refer to
the procedure “(2)-(a) Image position adjustment”.
Before adjustment After adjustment

Front side Front side

Rear side Rear side

The center of the image may have a deviation. Suppress the deviation in the center.

Images may slightly deviate from the correct writing start position; however, the entire amount of the deviation
between image positions on both sides is reduced.

 Precautions after the completion of the adjustment

It is very difficult precisely to match the image positions on the front and back sides. The deviation amount will
not be “0”, if minor deviations occurring during continuous printing are included. However, the amount of the
deviation between the front and back sides can be reduced to approximately 0.5 mm to 1.5 mm by using this
adjustment.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

1 - 42
2. Copier-specific Adjustments

2.1 To Copy Text Clearly (To eliminate faint, smudged or blurred text)

Before adjustment After adjustment

When a light print image is copied, the text The graphic image and text look darker and
looks blurred. sharper.

 Explanation
Perform image processing, in order to obtain a sharp and dark copy image when copying an original containing
light text and graphic images, or a light copy image when copying an original containing a highly colored text
and copy image.

 Procedures
* The procedure to use varies, depending on whether to adjust the copy image quality in the Black mode, Full
color mode. Refer to the procedure corresponding to the particular user’s request.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2-1
2. Copier-specific Adjustments

2.1.1 To Adjust the Copy Image Quality in the Black Mode

* The Black Mode setting is applied even if it is judged as black in the Auto Color Mode.
* You can start with any of the procedures. But it is recommended to perform the procedures in order, as listed
below. You can use one procedure in conjunction with another. But if this changes the image quality more than
required or loses the effectiveness of the adjustment, restore the settings made in the previously used procedure
to the original ones. Then use other procedures.
* Both the service technician and the user can use procedures (1), (3) and (5).
* Only the service technician must use procedures (2), (4), (6), (7), (8) and (9).

(1) Press [BASIC] on the Control Panel. Press [ ] to increase the copy density.

After increasing the copy density, copy and check the copy image quality.
With the copy density set to the maximum, if further image quality adjustments are still necessary, the
service technician must use the following procedures.

(2) Select [05 ADJUSTMENT MODE]. Increase the values for the codes [7114] to [7116], [7123] to [7125],
[7134], [7137], [7138] and [7141] to make the copied text darker.

•The code to use varies according to the original mode (Text/Photo, Text, Photo, User custom, Gray Scale) or
the manual/automatic density setting. Select the [05] code for the mode in which the image quality is to be
changed, and set “128” or more for the setting value.

Color Recommended Acceptable

Target Original mode [05]code Default
mode value value range
Text/Photo 05-7114
Text 05-7115
Manual Set a value larger
Photo 05-7116 0~255 128
density than 128.
Image smoothing 05-7138
User custom 05-7134
Black
Text/Photo 05-7123
Text 05-7124
Automatic Set a value larger
Photo 05-7125 0~255 128
density than 128.
Image smoothing 05-7141
User custom 05-7137
* When the manual setting value of the manual density is altered while it is set in the BASIC menu on the control
panel, the density in the steps in all the indicators including the center value is also changed. One step in the
indicator corresponds to “20” of the setting value in [05] code.

After the setting value is changed, make a copy and confirm the image quality.
If you need additional image quality adjustment, perform the next procedure.

(3) Press [IMAGE] on the Control Panel. Press [SHARPNESS].

Press [SHARP] to increase the sharpness intensity.

After increasing the sharpness intensity, copy and check the copy image quality.
With the sharpness intensity set to the maximum, if further image quality adjustments are still necessary, the
service technician must use the following procedures.
e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2-2
 2. Copier-specific Adjustments

(4) Select [05 ADJUSTMENT MODE]. Increase the values for codes [7056] to [7058] and [7061], [7249] to
make the copied text darker (sharpness level increases).
• The code to use varies according to the original mode (Text/Photo, Text or Photo). Adjust the value for
[05] code corresponding to the original mode in which you would like to improve the image quality and set
values larger than “128”.

Recommended Acceptable
Color mode Original mode [05]code Default
value value range
Text/Photo 05-7056
Text 05-7057
Set a value larger
Black Photo 05-7058 0 to 255 128
than 128.
Image smoothing 05-7061
User custom 05-7249

* The smaller the setting value, the lower the sharpness becomes, while the larger the setting value, the
higher the sharpness becomes.

(For example, if the intensity of the center value is reduced by "25" (smaller), the value of each step of the
indicator will also be correspondingly decreased.) However, the adjustment value range which affects the
sharpness is within +/-100; this is the total of the setting value for the [05] code and that for the indicator.
For example, when "103" (reduced by 25 from the default value) is set for the [05] code as shown in the
figure below, the variation on the software side by the indicator is within -3 steps. Even if -4 steps are
applied, the image quality will not change.

-4 -3 -2 -1 0 +1 +2 +3 +4
Soft Sharp

| | | | | | | | |

Default: -100 -75 -50 -25 0 +25 +50 +75 +100 Assigned adjustment
value of sharpness
Setting value "103": -100 -100 -75 -50 -25 0 +25 +50 +75

Since "-25" is assigned to the center, the image quality

remains the same even if the indicator is changed from
"-3" to "-4".

After selecting the Text mode, copy and check the copy image quality.
If further image quality adjustments are still necessary, use the next procedure.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2-3
2. Copier-specific Adjustments

(5) Press [BASIC] on the Control Panel. Select “TEXT” from among the original mode options.
* To have “TEXT” selected from among the original mode options by default, refer to 2.18 To Program
Frequently Used Copy Settings (To Use Custom Mode).

After selecting the Text mode, copy and check the copy image quality.
If further image quality adjustments are still necessary, use the next procedure.

(6) Select [05 ADJUSTMENT MODE]. Decrease the values for codes [7097], [7098] and [7252] to make the
text darker (improving faint text or thin lines).

Recommended Acceptable
Original mode [05] code Default
value value range
Text / Photo 05-7097
Set a value smaller
Text 05-7098 0 to 4 2
than 2.
User custom 05-7252

* Set the value in increments of approximately 1, while checking the copy image until the optimum value is
obtained.

<Note> Note that if a too small setting value is set, the life of the supplies may be shortened.

After increasing the copy density, copy and check the copy image quality.
If further image quality adjustments are still necessary, use the next procedure.

(7) Select [05 ADJUSTMENT MODE]. Change the values for codes [7190] to [7192] and [7956] to adjust the
gamma balance in each of medium- and high-density areas.

Recommended Acceptable
Original mode [05] code Subcode Default
value value range
Text / Photo 05-7190
Text 05-7191 Set a value larger
1/2 0 to 255 128
Photo 05-7192 than 128.
Image smoothing 05-7956

* Set the value in increments of approximately 20, while checking the copy image until the optimum value is
obtained.
(Please be careful because the gradation (or density) of the medium-density area may exceed that of the
high-density area, depending on the set value.)

* The subcode varies according to the area where the density is adjusted. Refer to the table below and set the
subcode for the area to be adjusted. The density of light text or a graphic image will vary, if the medium-
or high-density area is mainly adjusted. Setting “0” for the subcode allows you to adjust the low-density
area. But it will not affect the light text or graphic images. Therefore, never change the value for the low-
density area.
Subcode Area where the density is adjusted
1 Medium-density area
2 High-density area

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2-4
 2. Copier-specific Adjustments

After changing the value, make a copy and check the image quality.
If further image quality adjustments are necessary, reset all the values changed in steps (1) to (6) above to
the default ones and then follow the next step.

(8) Select [08 SETTING MODE]. Change the value for subcode “3” of code [2548] to make the outline of the
copied text thicker and clearer, or thinner and finer.
* This adjustment can be made applicable to all colors by selecting the corresponding subcode. In this step,
however, change the setting value only for subcode “3” to adjust the image quality for the black mode.

Acceptable
Setting item [08] code Subcode Recommended value Default
range value
To make the outline of text
thicker and clearer:
Potential on printing Set a value smaller than 5.
white text / Correction 08-2548 3 0 to 12 6
setting (K) To make the outline of text
thinner and finer:
Set a value larger than 5.

* To check the amount changed with this setting, it is recommended to set the value at “3” or “4” first to
decrease it, and then to set the value at “8” or “9” first to increase it. Then check the copy image and
increase or decrease the value further so that the image will be adjusted finely.

• After changing the value, perform automatic calibration.

* Refer to step (1) in “1.1 To Obtain a Darker Image” to perform automatic calibration.

If further adjustments are necessary after performing step (8), you can repeat steps (1) to (7). When
repeating these steps, however, adjust the value while checking the copy image carefully.

(9) Select [08 SETTING MODE]. Change the value for subcode “3” or “7” of code [2620].

Acceptable
Original mode [08]code Subcode Recommended value Default
range value
Text/Photo
Text
Photo Plain paper 08-2620 3
Image
Set a value larger than 15
moothing
to make the text darker 8 to 36 15
Text/Photo and clearer.
Text
Photo Thick 08-2620 7
Image
moothing

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2-5
2. Copier-specific Adjustments

 Caution after the adjustment

The adjustment may possibly cause an increase in the amount of toner used, moiré, blurred text (small, dark text
blurred), faint text (fine outlines of text shredded) diminished photo images or gradational images (less accurate
reproducibility of halftones), or in some consumption conditions of consumables, background fogging or a
decrease in the amount of developer material (carrier streaks). Therefore, carefully perform the adjustment while
checking the copy image.

 Remarks
• Enter a value within the recommended value range mentioned in the procedures. Otherwise, it may cause a loss
in MFP performance, including degradation in the image quality and a reduction in the life of the consumables.

• If you perform only step (8) above (changing the setting value of subcode “3” of code [08-2548]) as an image
quality adjustment for the black mode, it may cause an extra increase or decrease in the amount of K toner used
compared with that for the other colors, or it may create a difference in the reproducibility of halftones.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2-6
 2. Copier-specific Adjustments

2.1.2 To Adjust the Copy Image Quality in the Full Color Mode

* The setting value for the Full color mode shall be applied also when the original is judged as the full color
image in the Auto color mode.
* You can start with any of the procedures. But it is recommended to perform the procedures in order, as listed
below. You can use one procedure in conjunction with another. But if this changes the image quality more than
required or loses the effectiveness of the adjustment, restore the settings made in the previously used procedure
to the original ones. Then use other procedures.
* Both the service technician and the user can use procedures (1), (3) and (7).
* Only the service technician must use procedures (2), (4), (5), (6), (8) and (9).

(1) Press [BASIC] on the Control Panel. Press [ ] to increase the copy density.

After increasing the copy density, copy and check the copy image quality.
With the copy density set to the maximum, if further image quality adjustments are still necessary, the
service technician must use the following procedures

(2) Select [05 ADJUSTMENT MODE]. Increase the values for codes [7713 to 7726] to strengthen the copy
density of text.

• The code to be set varies depending on the original mode setting (Text/photo, Text, Printed image, Photo
(developing paper), Map, User custom, Red seal color) or the manual/automatic density setting. Select the
[05] code for the mode in which the image quality is to be changed, and set “128” or more for the setting
value.
Color Recommended Acceptable
Target Original mode [05]code Default
mode value value range
Text/Photo 05-7713
Text 05-7714
Manual Printed image 05-7715
density Set a value larger
Photo 05-7716 0 to 255 128
than 128.
Map 05-7717
User custom 05-7718
Red seal color 05-7719
Full color
Text/Photo 05-7720
Text 05-7721
Printed image 05-7722
Automatic Set a value larger
Photo 05-7723 0 to 255 128
density than 128.
Map 05-7724
User custom 05-7725
Red seal color 05-7726
* When the manual setting value of the manual density is altered while it is set in the BASIC menu on the
control panel, the density in the steps in all the indicators including the center value is also changed. One
step in the indicator corresponds to “20” of the setting value in [05] code.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2-7
2. Copier-specific Adjustments

After increasing the copy density, copy and check the copy image quality.
If further image quality adjustments are still necessary, use the next procedure.

(3) Press [IMAGE] on the Control Panel. Press [SHARPNESS].

Press [SHARP] to increase the sharpness intensity.

After increasing the sharpness intensity, copy and check the copy image quality.
With the sharpness intensity set to the maximum, if further image quality adjustments are still necessary, the
service technician must use the following procedures.

(4) Select [05 ADJUSTMENT MODE]. Increase the values for codes [7794 to 7800] to strengthen the copy
density of text (or increase the sharpness intensity).
• The code to use varies according to the original mode (Text/Photo, Text, Printed image, Photo or Map).
Adjust the value for [05] code corresponding to the original mode in which you would like to improve the
image quality and set values larger than “128” for codes 05-7794 to 7800.
Original mode [05] code Recommended value Acceptable value range Default
Text/Photo 05-7796
Text 05-7797
Printed image 05-7798
Photo 05-7799 Set a value larger than 128. 0 to 255 128
Map 05-7800
User custom 05-7795
Red seal color 05-7794
* Setting “0” provides the softest image, while setting “255” provides the sharpest image.
Changing the values for these codes will change the sharpness intensity, when the “Sharpness” indicator in
the “IMAGE” menu is set to the center. Remember that 1 step of the indicator will increase or decrease the
sharpness intensity by 25. If the sharpness intensity of the center value is changed, each step of the indicator
will be changed accordingly. (For instance, if the center value is increased by 25 (sharper), the value of each
step of the indicator will also be increased by 25 (sharper).)
However, the range of adjustment values that is valid for sharpness level change is from -100 to +100 of
the total of the setting value of the [05] code and that of the indicator. For instance, if the setting value of
the [05] code is “103” (-25 from the default value), the limit of the steps in the soft side of the indicator is
“-3”. If the step is set at “-4”, the image quality will not be changed.

* The adjustment value range that has an effect on the sharpness is within +/- 100; this is the total of the
setting value for the [05] code and that for the indicator. For example, when "103" (reduced by 25 from the
default value) is set for the [05] code as shown in the figure below, the variation on the software side by the
indicator is within -3 steps. Even if -4 steps are applied, the image quality will not change.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2-8
 2. Copier-specific Adjustments

-4 -3 -2 -1 0 +1 +2 +3 +4
Soft Sharp

| | | | | | | | |

Default: -100 -75 -50 -25 0 +25 +50 +75 +100 Assigned adjustment
value of sharpness
Setting value "103": -100 -100 -75 -50 -25 0 +25 +50 +75

Since "-25" is assigned to the center, the image quality

remains the same even if the indicator is changed from
"-3" to "-4".

After increasing the sharpness intensity, copy and check the copy image quality.
If further image quality adjustments are still necessary, use the next procedure.

(5) Select [05 ADJUSTMENT MODE] and change the values of the codes [7840], [7841] and [7842] to adjust
the reproduction level of the Text/Photo, User custom and Red seal color original modes.
The larger the value is, the clearer the reproduction of thin text will become.
Original mode [05] Code Recommended value Acceptable value range Default
Text/Photo 05-7840
User custom 05-7841 Set a value larger than 5. 0 to 9 0
Red seal color 05-7842
* Adjustment for the User custom setting is enabled in the Text/Photo mode base only.
* Set the value in increments of 1, while checking the copy image until the optimum value is obtained.
Set the value to “5” and check the copy image quality. If further image quality adjustment is necessary, set
the value to “6”. If further adjustment is necessary, increase the value step by step.

* If a value becomes too much larger, a photo area may become coarse.
* If “4” to “1” is set for the setting value, the text may become blurred.
* For the User custom mode, refer to “2.18 To Program Frequently Used Copy Settings (To Use Custom
Mode)”.
* The setting content of the default value “0” is the same as that for the value “5”.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2-9
2. Copier-specific Adjustments

(6) Select [05 ADJUSTMENT MODE]. Change the values for codes [7889 to 7892] to adjust the maximum
color density of the text.
Color to Acceptable
[05] code Recommended value Default
adjust value range
Y
05-7889
(Yellow)
Set a value larger than 5 to
M
05-7890 increase the density.
(Magenta)
0 to 10 5
C
05-7891 Set a value smaller than 5 to
(Cyan)
decrease the density.
K
05-7892
(Black)
* Set the value in increments of 1, while checking the copy image until the optimum value is obtained.

* This adjustment will be effective, only if the [TEXT/PHOTO] or [TEXT] mode is selected or the
[CUSTOM] mode based on the [TEXT/PHOTO] or [TEXT] mode is selected from among the original
mode options. Only the text areas (portions that are recognized as text) are adjusted in the
[TEXT/PHOTO] mode and [TEXT] mode. Only K color can be adjusted in the [TEXT] mode.

After adjusting the maximum color density of the text, copy and check the copy image quality.
If further image quality adjustments are still necessary, use the next procedure.

(7) Press [BASIC] on the Control Panel. Select “TEXT” from among the original mode options.
* To have “TEXT” selected from among the original mode options by default, refer to 2.18 To Program
Frequently Used Copy Settings (To Use Custom Mode).

After changing the value, make a copy and check the image quality.
If further image quality adjustments are necessary, reset all the values changed in steps (1) to (6) above to
the default one and then follow the next step.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2-10
 2. Copier-specific Adjustments

(8) Select [08 SETTING MODE]. Change the value for code [2548] to make the outline of the copied text
thicker and clearer, or thinner and finer.
* This adjustment can be made applicable to all colors by selecting the corresponding subcode. However, it
is recommended to enter the same setting value for all the subcodes unless otherwise required.

Acceptable
Setting item [08] code Subcode Recommended value Default
range value
Y 0 To make the outline of text
thicker and clearer:
Potential on printing M 1 Set a value smaller than 5.
white text / 08-2548 0 to 12 6
Correction setting C 2 To make the outline of text
thinner and finer:
K 3 Set a value larger than 5.

* To check the amount changed with this setting, it is recommended to set the value at “3” or “4” first to
decrease it, and then to set the value at “8” or “9” first to increase it. Then check the copy image and
increase or decrease the value further so that the image will be adjusted finely.

• After changing the value, perform automatic calibration.

* Refer to step (1) in “1.1 To Obtain a Darker Image” to perform automatic calibration.

If further adjustments are necessary after performing step (8), you can repeat steps (1) to (7).
When repeating these steps, however, adjust the value while checking the copy image carefully.

(9) Select [08 SETTING MODE]. Change the value for subcode “0” to “7” of code [2620].
Color to Original Acceptable
[08]code Subcode Recommended value Default
adjust mode range value
Y 0
M 1
Plain paper 08-2620
C 2
Set a value larger than 15
K 3
to make the text darker and 8-36 15
Y 4 clearer.
M 5
Thick 08-2620
C 6
K 7

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2-11
2. Copier-specific Adjustments

 Caution after the adjustment

The adjustment may possibly cause an increase in the amount of toner used, moiré, blurred text (small, dark text
blurred), faint text (fine outlines of text shredded) diminished photo images or gradational images (less accurate
reproducibility of halftones), or in some consumption conditions of consumables, background fogging or a
decrease in the amount of developer material (carrier streaks). Therefore, carefully perform the adjustment while
checking the copy image.

 Remarks
• Enter a value within the recommended value range mentioned in the procedures. Otherwise, it may cause a loss
in MFP performance, including degradation in the image quality and a reduction in the life of the consumables.

• If you perform only step (8) above (changing the setting value of code [08-2548]) as an image quality
adjustment for a certain color, it may cause an extra increase or decrease in the amount of the toner used for this
color compared with that for the other colors, or it may create a difference in the reproducibility of halftones.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2-12
 2. Copier-specific Adjustments

2.2 To Closely Match the Color Balance of the Original

Before adjustment After adjustment

Copy Copy

The copy image looks yellowish, compared The color balance of the copy image is closely
with the original. matched with that of the original.

 Explanation
Depending on the color balance of the original, the copy image sometimes looks different from the original. To
make the colors on the copy the same as those in the original, perform image quality control, automatic
calibration, color adjustment (color balance, RGB and hue adjustments), and color density adjustment.

 Procedures
* You can start with any of the procedures. But it is recommended to perform the procedures in order, as listed
below. You can use one procedure in conjunction with another. But if this changes the image quality more than
required or loses the effectiveness of the adjustment, restore the settings made in the previously used procedure
to the original ones. Then use other procedures.
* Both the service technician and the user can use procedures (1) to (3).
* Only the service technician must use procedure (4) and (5).

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2-13
2. Copier-specific Adjustments

(1) Perform automatic calibration to correct variations in the copy density.

* [ADMIN] is selected from among the [CALIBRATION DISPLAY LEVEL] options by default. In other
words, an administrator is authorized to operate automatic calibration. But the [USER] option can also be
selected to allow the user to operate it. Refer to the MFP Management Guide for further information
regarding how to select the [CALIBRATION DISPLAY LEVEL] option.

• Use steps (a) through (i) to perform automatic calibration.

(a) Press [USER FUNCTIONS] on the Control Panel to enter the “User Functions” menu.
(b) Press [ADMIN].
(c) Enter an administrator password of 6 to 64 digits. Press [ENTER].
(d) Press [GENERAL].
(e) Press [CALIBRATION].
(f) Press [COPY].
(g) Press [CALIBRATION] to print out the test chart.
(h) Place the printed test chart on the original glass.
(i) Press the [START] button to perform calibration. When the calibration comes to an end, the message
“Scanning and calibrating” will disappear.

* As a result of the above steps, the copy image quality will be corrected in the Full color mode and
the Black and White mode simultaneously.

After performing automatic calibration, copy and check the copy image quality.
If further image quality adjustments are still necessary, use the next procedure.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2-14
 2. Copier-specific Adjustments

(2) Perform hue adjustment to adjust the tint of the color in the color area to change.
• Use steps (a) through (d) to perform the adjustment.
(a) Press [IMAGE] on the Control Panel.
(b) Press [HUE].
(c) Press [+] or [-] on the indicator of the color to adjust.
* Pressing [+] or [-] on the indicator changes the hue as shown below.
(For instance, press [+] at R (Red). Then the tint of R (Red) is closely matched with that of Y (Yellow). Press [-] at
R (Red). Then the tint of R (Red) will be closely matched with that of M (Magenta).

(d) Press [ENTER].

After adjusting the hue, copy and check the copy image quality.
If further image quality adjustments are still necessary, use the next procedure.

(3) Perform color balance adjustment or RGB adjustment to adjust the tint of colors in general.
• Use steps (a) through (d) to perform the adjustment.
(a) Press [IMAGE] on the Control Panel.
(b)Press [COLOR BALANCE] to adjust the color balance by changing the amount of toner (C, M, Y
and K) or [RGB ADJUSTMENT] to adjust the color balance by changing the intensity of R, G and B.
(c) Press [+] to enhance the tint of the color or [-] to decrease it.
* After selecting the color balance by changing the amount of toner (C, M, Y and K), press
[DETAIL]. The tint of the color can be adjusted according to density area (low-, medium- or high-
density area).
(d) Press [ENTER].

After adjusting the tint of the colors, copy and check the copy image quality.
If further image quality adjustments are still necessary, use the next procedure.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2-15
2. Copier-specific Adjustments

(4) Select [05 ADJUSTMENT MODE]. Change the setting values for codes [7665] to [7671] to adjust the hue.

Original mode [05]code Subcode Recommended value Default

Text/Photo 05-7665
Text 05-7666
Printed image 05-7667
Photo 05-7668 0/1/2/3/4/5 0 to 255 128
Map 05-7669
User custom 05-7670
Red seal color 05-7671
* Set the value in increments of approx. 15 steps while checking the copy image until the optimum value is
obtained.

* Each setting value for the Text/Photo, Text and Photo (developing paper) original mode is reflected to the
quality of the image in the Full color and Auto color modes.

* The sub code varies according to the area where the hue is adjusted. Set the sub code for the area to be adjusted
by referring to the following below.

Target area of hue

Subcode Recommended value
adjustment
Setting a larger value: The tint of Red becomes closer to that
For adjusting the tint of of Y (Yellow).
0
Red Setting a smaller value: The tint of Red becomes closer to
that of M (Magenta).
Setting a larger value: The tint of Yellow becomes closer to
For adjusting the tint of that of G (Green).
1
Yellow Setting a smaller value: The tint of Yellow becomes closer to
that of R (Red).
Setting a larger value: The tint of Green becomes closer to
For adjusting the tint of that of C (Cyan).
2
Green Setting a smaller value: The tint of Green becomes closer to
that of Y (Yellow).
Setting a larger value: The tint of Cyan becomes closer to
For adjusting the tint of that of B (Blue).
3
Cyan Setting a smaller value The tint of Cyan becomes closer to
that of G (Green).
Setting a larger value: The tint of Blue becomes closer to
For adjusting the tint of that of M (Magenta).
4
Blue Setting a smaller value The tint of Blue becomes closer to
that of C (Cyan).
Setting a larger value: The tint of Magenta becomes closer to
For adjusting the tint of that of R (Red).
5
Magenta Setting a smaller value The tint of Magenta becomes closer
to that of B (Blue).

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2-16
 2. Copier-specific Adjustments

(5) Select [05 ADJUSTMENT MODE]. Change the values for codes [7960 to 7987] to adjust the color density.
Color to Acceptable
Original mode [05] code Subcode Recommended value Default
adjust value range
Text/Photo 05-7960 0/1/2
Text 05-7961 0/1/2
Printed image 05-7962 0/1/2
Y
Photo 05-7963 0/1/2
(Yellow)
Map 05-7964 0/1/2
User custom 05-7980 0/1/2
Red seal color 05-7984 0/1/2
Text/Photo 05-7965 0/1/2
Text 05-7966 0/1/2
Printed image 05-7967 0/1/2
M
Photo 05-7968 0/1/2
(Magenta)
Map 05-7969 0/1/2
User custom 05-7981 0/1/2 Set a value larger than 128
Red seal color 05-7985 0/1/2 to increase the density.
0 to 255 128
Text/Photo 05-7970 0/1/2
Set a value smaller than 128
Text 05-7971 0/1/2 to decrease the density.
Printed image 05-7972 0/1/2
C
Photo 05-7973 0/1/2
(Cyan)
Map 05-7974 0/1/2
User custom 05-7982 0/1/2
Red seal color 05-7986 0/1/2
Text/Photo 05-7975 0/1/2
Text 05-7976 0/1/2
Printed image 05-7977 0/1/2
K
Photo 05-7978 0/1/2
(Black)
Map 05-7979 0/1/2
User custom 05-7983 0/1/2
Red seal color 05-7987 0/1/2
* Set the value in increments of approximately 10, while checking the copy image until the optimum value is
obtained.

* The value for the code corresponding to the original mode (Text/Photo, Text, or Printed image) will affect
the copy image quality in the Full color mode and the Auto color mode.

* The subcode varies according to the area where the density is adjusted. Refer to the table below and set the
subcode for the area to be adjusted.
Subcode Area where the density is adjusted
0 Low-density area
1 Medium-density area
2 High-density area
 Caution after the adjustment
The adjustment may possibly cause offset failure, particularly when the highly colored original is copied in the
Photo mode. Therefore, carefully perform the adjustment, while checking the copy image.

 Remarks
Enter a value within the recommended value range mentioned in the procedures. Otherwise, it may cause a loss in
MFP performance, including degradation in the image quality and a reduction in the life of the consumables.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2-17
2. Copier-specific Adjustments

2.3 To Improve the Reproducibility of Gray

Before adjustment After adjustment

Another color (M) is blended in the gray area. No undesired color is blended. A clear copy
image is obtained.

 Explanation
When an original containing gray is copied, another color may be blended in the gray area. Perform image quality
control, automatic calibration, color adjustment (color balance adjustment or RGB adjustment) and color density
adjustment, in order to avoid this problem (or to obtain an achromatic color, for instance).

 Procedures
* You can start with any of the procedures. But it is recommended to perform the procedures in order, as listed
below. You can use one procedure in conjunction with another. But if this changes the image quality more than
required or loses the effectiveness of the adjustment, restore the settings made in the previously used procedure
to the original ones. Then use other procedures.
* Both the service technician and the user can use procedures (1) and (2).
* Only the service technician must use procedure (3).

(1) Perform automatic calibration to correct variations in the copy density.

* For further information regarding the adjustment procedures, refer to procedure (1) in 2.2 To Closely
Match the Color Balance of the Original.

* [ADMIN] is selected from among the [CALIBRATION DISPLAY LEVEL] options by default. In other
words, an administrator is authorized to operate automatic calibration. But the [USER] option can also be
selected to allow the user to operate it. Refer to the MFP Management Guide for further information
regarding how to select the [CALIBRATION DISPLAY LEVEL] option.
After performing automatic calibration, copy and check the copy image quality.
If further image quality adjustments are still necessary, use the next procedure.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2-18
 2. Copier-specific Adjustments

(2) Perform color balance adjustment or RGB adjustment to adjust the tint of colors in general.
* For further information regarding the adjustment procedures, refer to procedure (3) in 2.2 To Closely
Match the Color Balance of the Original.

After adjusting the tint of colors, copy and check the copy image quality.
If further image quality adjustments are still necessary, use the next procedure.

(3) Select the User custom mode and select [05 ADJUSTMENT MODE]. Change the setting value for the code
[7690] to decrease the magenta level in gray.
*For the User custom mode, refer to the procedures in "2.18.2 To Adjust Custom Mode Settings in Full
Color Mode".

[05] Code Setting value

05-7690 3

(4) Select [05 ADJUSTMENT MODE]. Change the values for codes [7960 to 7987] to adjust the color density.
Color to Acceptable
Original mode [05] code Subcode Recommended value Default
adjust value range
Text/Photo 05-7960 0/1/2
Text 05-7961 0/1/2
Printed image 05-7962 0/1/2
Y
Photo 05-7963 0/1/2
(Yellow)
Map 05-7964 0/1/2
User custom 05-7980 0/1/2
Red seal color 05-7984 0/1/2
Text/Photo 05-7965 0/1/2
Text 05-7966 0/1/2
Printed image 05-7967 0/1/2
M
Photo 05-7968 0/1/2
(Magenta)
Map 05-7969 0/1/2
User custom 05-7981 0/1/2 Set a value larger than 128
Red seal color 05-7985 0/1/2 to increase the density.
0 to 255 128
Text/Photo 05-7970 0/1/2
Set a value smaller than 128
Text 05-7971 0/1/2 to decrease the density.
Printed image 05-7972 0/1/2
C
Photo 05-7973 0/1/2
(Cyan)
Map 05-7974 0/1/2
User custom 05-7982 0/1/2
Red seal color 05-7986 0/1/2
Text/Photo 05-7975 0/1/2
Text 05-7976 0/1/2
Printed image 05-7977 0/1/2
K
Photo 05-7978 0/1/2
(Black)
Map 05-7979 0/1/2
User custom 05-7983 0/1/2
Red seal color 05-7987 0/1/2
* Set the value in increments of approximately 10, while checking the copy image until the optimum value is obtained.

* The value for the code corresponding to the original mode (Text/Photo, Text, or Printed image) will affect
the copy image quality in the Full color mode and the Auto color mode.
* The subcode varies according to the area where the density is adjusted. Refer to the table below and set the
subcode for the area to be adjusted.
Subcode Area where the density is adjusted
0 Low-density area
1 Medium-density area
2 High-density area
e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2-19
2. Copier-specific Adjustments

 Caution after the adjustment

The adjustment may possibly cause offset failure, particularly when a highly colored original is copied in the Photo mode.
Also, it may cause degradation in the color reproducibility. (Excessively enhancing the tint of black makes other colors,
such as skin tones, look dull.) Therefore, carefully perform the adjustment, while checking the copy image.

 Remarks
Enter a value within the recommended value range mentioned in the procedures. Otherwise, it may cause a loss in
MFP performance, including degradation in the image quality and a reduction in the life of the consumables.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2-20
 2. Copier-specific Adjustments

2.4 To Copy in Vivid Colors

Before adjustment After adjustment

When a copy is made without any adjustments, The copy image is obtained in vivid colors.
the vividness is insufficient on the copy image.

 Explanation
When a copy is made without any adjustments, the vividness may be insufficient on the copy image. Perform
saturation adjustment, color adjustment (color balance adjustment or RGB adjustment), and color density
adjustment, in order to obtain a copy image in vivid colors.

 Procedures
* You can start with any of the procedures other than (5). But it is recommended to perform the procedures in
order, as listed below. You can use one procedure in conjunction with another. But if this changes the image
quality more than required or loses the effectiveness of the adjustment, restore the settings made in the
previously used procedure to the original ones. Then use other procedures.
* Both the service technician and the user can use procedures (1) to (3).
* Only the service technician must use procedure (4) and (5).
* Only if the vividness of R (Red) is still insufficient even after procedures (1) to (4) have been used, the service
technician must use procedure (6).

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2-21
2. Copier-specific Adjustments

(1) Press [IMAGE] on the Control Panel. Press [ONE TOUCH ADJUSTMENT].
Press [VIVID] .

After selecting the “Vivid” option, copy and check the copy image quality.
When the copy image quality with the “Vivid” option is insufficient, cancel the “Vivid” option and use the
next procedure.
(The one-touch adjustment can be canceled by pressing [ONE TOUCH ADJUSTMENT] again.)

(2) Perform saturation adjustment to adjust the overall saturation.

• Use steps (a) through (d) to perform the adjustment.
(a) Press [IMAGE] on the Control Panel.
(b)Press [SATURATION].
I Press [+] to increase the saturation of the copy image.
(d) Press [ENTER].

After adjusting the saturation, copy and check the copy image quality.
If further image quality adjustments are still necessary, use the next procedure.

(3) Perform color balance adjustment or RGB adjustment to adjust the tint of colors in general.
* For further information regarding the adjustment procedures, refer to procedure (3) in 2.2 To Closely
Match the Color Balance of the Original.

After adjusting the tint of colors, copy and check the copy image quality.
If further image quality adjustments are still necessary, the service technician must use the next procedure.

(4) Select [05 ADJUSTMENT MODE]. Change the setting values for codes [7675] to [7681] to adjust the saturation.

Original mode [05]code Subcode Recommended value Default

Text/Photo 05-7675
Text 05-7676
Printed image 05-7677
Photo 05-7678 0/1/2/3/4/5 0 to 255 128
Map 05-7679
User custom 05-7680
Red seal color 05-7681
* Set the value in increments of approx. 15 steps while checking the copy image until the optimum value is
obtained.

* Each setting value for the Text/Photo, Text and Photo (developing paper) original mode is reflected to the
quality of the image in the Full color and Auto color modes.

* The sub code varies according to the area where the hue is adjusted. Set the sub code for the area to be adjusted
by referring to the following below.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2-22
 2. Copier-specific Adjustments

Target area of hue

Subcode Recommended value
adjustment
For adjusting the tint of
0
Red
For adjusting the tint of
1
Yellow
For adjusting the tint of
2 Setting a larger value: The saturation level increases.
Green
Setting a smaller value: The saturation level decreases.
For adjusting the tint of
3
Cyan
For adjusting the tint of
4
Blue
For adjusting the tint of
5
Magenta

(5) Select [05 ADJUSTMENT MODE]. Change the values for codes [7960 to 7987] to adjust the color density.
Color to Acceptable
Original mode [05] code Subcode Recommended value Default
adjust value range
Text/Photo 05-7960 0/1/2
Text 05-7961 0/1/2
Printed image 05-7962 0/1/2
Y
Photo 05-7963 0/1/2
(Yellow)
Map 05-7964 0/1/2
User custom 05-7980 0/1/2
Red seal color 05-7984 0/1/2
Text/Photo 05-7965 0/1/2
Text 05-7966 0/1/2
Printed image 05-7967 0/1/2
M
Photo 05-7968 0/1/2
(Magenta)
Map 05-7969 0/1/2
User custom 05-7981 0/1/2 Set a value larger than 128
Red seal color 05-7985 0/1/2 to increase the density.
0 to 255 128
Text/Photo 05-7970 0/1/2 Set a value smaller than 128
Text 05-7971 0/1/2 to decrease the density.
Printed image 05-7972 0/1/2
C
Photo 05-7973 0/1/2
(Cyan)
Map 05-7974 0/1/2
User custom 05-7982 0/1/2
Red seal color 05-7986 0/1/2
Text/Photo 05-7975 0/1/2
Text 05-7976 0/1/2
Printed image 05-7977 0/1/2
K
Photo 05-7978 0/1/2
(Black)
Map 05-7979 0/1/2
User custom 05-7983 0/1/2
Red seal color 05-7987 0/1/2
* Set the value in increments of approximately 10, while checking the copy image until the optimum value is
obtained.

* The value for the code corresponding to the original mode (Text/Photo, Text, or Printed image) will affect
the copy image quality in the Full color mode and the Auto color mode.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2-23
2. Copier-specific Adjustments

* The subcode varies according to the area where the density is adjusted. Refer to the table below and set the
subcode for the area to be adjusted.

Subcode Area where the density is adjusted

0 Low-density area
1 Medium-density area
2 High-density area

After setting the values, copy and check the copy image quality.
Only if the vividness of R (Red) is still insufficient even after all the above procedures have been used, must
the service technician use the next procedure.

(6) Select [05 ADJUSTMENT MODE]. Change the value for code [2905] to adjust the transfer (1st transfer)
roller bias output.
(Adjust the offset voltage of transfer roller bias for C (Cyan) and K (Black) so as to increase the density of R
(Red).)

• The code to use varies depending on the paper type and color to adjust. Adjust the value for the subcode
corresponding to the color for which you would like to improve the image quality. Set the value within a
range of “2” to “5” to obtain the highest density of R (Red).

Color to Recommended Acceptable

Paper type [05] code Subcode Default
adjust value value range
C (Cyan) 2
Plain paper
K (Black) 3
05-2905 2 to 5 0 to 10 5
C (Cyan) 8
Thick
K (Black) 9
* Never change the values for subcodes other than the above. Otherwise, it may cause a loss in MFP
performance, including degradation in the image quality.

<Note> • The adjustment may possibly decrease the density of G (Green), B (Blue) and K (Black)
extremely. Therefore, carefully perform the adjustment, while checking the copy image.

• Unless this adjustment changes the density of R (Red), return the values to the default (set
value: 5).

• This adjustment may affect not only the copy image but also every image quality such as the
printout. Therefore, perform the adjustment, being aware that the image quality of all future
printouts will be changed, when printing out originals other than the one that is used for the
adjustment.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2-24
 2. Copier-specific Adjustments

 Caution after the adjustment

The adjustment may possibly cause offset failure, particularly when the highly colored original is copied in the
Photo mode. Therefore, carefully perform the adjustment, while checking the copy image.

 Remarks
Enter a value within the recommended value range mentioned in the procedures. Otherwise, it may cause a loss in
MFP performance, including degradation in the image quality and a reduction in the life of the consumables.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2-25
2. Copier-specific Adjustments

2.5 To Make the Pale Area of the Original Look Darker and Sharper
(To improve the highlight reproducibility)

Before adjustment After adjustment

The splashing area (highlight) is blurred. A clear copy image of the splashing area
is obtained.

 Explanation
Perform the copy density adjustment and background adjustment, in order to make the pale area (highlight) of
the original look darker and sharper on the copy.

 Procedures
* You can start with any of the procedures. But it is recommended to perform the procedures in order, as listed
below. You can use one procedure in conjunction with another. But if this changes the image quality more than
required or loses the effectiveness of the adjustment, restore the settings made in the previously used procedure
to the original ones. Then use other procedures.
* Both the service technician and the user can use procedures (1) and (3).
* Only the service technician must use procedures (2), (4) and (5).

(1) Press [IMAGE] on the Control Panel. Press [BACKGROUND ADJUSTMENT].

Press [DARK] to darken the background.

After increasing the background density, copy and check the copy image quality.
With the background density set to the maximum, if further image quality adjustments are still necessary, the
service technician must use the next procedure.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2-26
 2. Copier-specific Adjustments

(2) Select [05 ADJUSTMENT MODE]. Change the values for the following codes below to adjust the density
level of the background.
* The highlighted area will become highly visible, if the background density is increased.
Acceptable
Color mode Original mode [05] code Recommended value value Default
range
Text/Photo 05-7656
Text 05-7657
Printed Image 05-7658
Full color Photo 05-7659
Map 05-7660
User custom 05-7661
Red seal color 05-7662
Text/Photo 05-7707
Mono color Text 05-7708
Printed Image Set 128 or larger. 0 to 255 128
05-7709
Text/Photo 05-7710
Twin color Text 05-7711
Printed Image 05-7712
Text/Photo 05-7100
Text 05-7101
Black Printed Image 05-7102
Image smoothing 05-7105
User custom 05-7106
* Set the value in increments of approximately 10, while checking the copy image until the optimum value is
obtained.

<Note> “Making the highlighted area more visible (or increasing the background density)” and
“eliminating the background color (or decreasing the background density)” are mutually
contradictory. If the background color is darkened to make the highlighted area more visible,
the hue of the background may change.
After adjusting the background density, copy and check the copy image quality.
If further image quality adjustments are still necessary, use the next procedure.

(3) Press [BASIC] on the Control Panel. Press [ ] to increase the copy density.
After increasing the copy density, copy and check the copy image quality.
With the copy density set to the maximum, if further image quality adjustments are still necessary, the
service technician must use the next procedure.

(4) Select the User custom mode and select [05 ADJUSTMENT MODE]. Change the setting value for the code
[7690] to change the reproduction level of the background.
* For the User custom mode, refer to the procedures in “2.18.2 To Adjust Custom Mode Settings in Full Color Mode”.
[05] Code Setting value
05-7690 4

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2-27
2. Copier-specific Adjustments

(5) Select [05 ADJUSTMENT MODE]. Change the values for codes [7190 to 7193] and [7960 to 7987] to
adjust the color density.
Acceptable
Color Color to Original [05] Recommended
Subcode value Default
mode adjust mode code value
range
Text/Photo 05-7960 0/1
Text 05-7961 0/1
Printed image 05-7962 0/1
Y
Photo 05-7963 0/1
(Yellow)
Map 05-7964 0/1
User custom 05-7980 0/1
Red seal color 05-7984 0/1
Text/Photo 05-7965 0/1
Text 05-7966 0/1
M Printed image 05-7967 0/1
(Magenta Photo 05-7968 0/1
) Map 05-7969 0/1
User custom 05-7981 0/1 Set a value larger
Full color Red seal color 05-7985 0/1 than 128 to
Mono color increase the
Twin color Text/Photo 05-7970 0/1
density.
Text 05-7971 0/1
Printed image 05-7972 0/1 0 to 255 128
C
Photo 05-7973 0/1
(Cyan) Set a value
Map 05-7974 0/1 smaller than 128
User custom 05-7982 0/1 to decrease the
Red seal color 05-7986 0/1 density.
Text/Photo 05-7975 0/1
Text 05-7976 0/1
Printed image 05-7977 0/1
K
Photo 05-7978 0/1
(Black)
Map 05-7979 0/1
User custom 05-7983 0/1
Red seal color 05-7987 0/1
Text/Photo 05-7190 0/1
Text 05-7191 0/1
K
Black Printed image 05-7192 0/1
(Black)
Image
05-7193 0/1
smoothing
* Set the value in increments of approximately 10, while checking the copy image until the optimum value is
obtained.

* The value for the code corresponding to the original mode (Text/Photo, Text, or Printed image) will affect
the copy image quality in the Full color mode and the Auto color mode.

* The subcode varies according to the area where the density is adjusted. Refer to the table below and set the
subcode for the area to be adjusted. The density of the highlighted area will vary, if the low- or medium-
density area is mainly adjusted. Setting “2” for subcode allows you to adjust the high-density area. But it
will not affect the highlighted area. Therefore, never change the value for the high-density area.
Subcode Area where the density is adjusted
0 Low-density area
1 Medium-density area

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2-28
 2. Copier-specific Adjustments

 Caution after the adjustment

The adjustment may possibly provide an excessively dark background. Therefore, carefully perform the
adjustment, while checking the copy image.

 Remarks
Enter a value within the recommended value range mentioned in the procedures. Otherwise, it may cause a loss
in MFP performance, including degradation in the image quality and a reduction in the life of the consumables.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2-29
2. Copier-specific Adjustments

2.6 To Eliminate the Background Color

Before adjustment After adjustment

The background color of the original is also The background color is eliminated, allowing
copied. Therefore, no clear contrast is made clear contrast between the background and text.
between the background and text.

 Explanation
When a full-color original, such as colored paper, is copied, its background color is also copied. Therefore, no
clear contrast is made between the background and the text on the copy. Perform background adjustment, in
order to copy an original with a highly colored background, while eliminating the background color or making it
white.

 Procedures
* The procedure to use varies, depending on whether to adjust the copy image quality in the Black mode or the
Full color mode. Refer to the procedure corresponding to the user’s particular request.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2-30
 2. Copier-specific Adjustments

2.6.1 To Adjust the Copy Image Quality in the Black Mode

* You can start with any of the procedures. But it is recommended to perform the procedures in order, as listed
below. You can use one procedure in conjunction with another. But if this changes the image quality more than
required or loses the effectiveness of the adjustment, restore the settings made in the previously used procedure
to the original ones. Then use other procedures.
* Both the service technician and the user can use procedure (1).
* Only the service technician must use procedures (2) to (3).

(1) Press [IMAGE] on the Control Panel. Press [BACKGROUND ADJUSTMENT].

Press [LIGHT] to decrease the background density.

After decreasing the background density, copy and check the image quality.
With the background density set to the minimum, if further image quality adjustments are still necessary, the
service technician must use the next procedure.

(2) Select [05 ADJUSTMENT MODE]. Change the values for codes [7100] to [7102], [7105] and [7106] adjust
the density level of the background.

Acceptable
Recommended
Adjustment Original mode [05] code value Default
value
range
Text/Photo 05-7100
Text 05-7101
Black Photo 05-7102 Set 127 or larger. 0 to 255 128
Image smoothing 05-7105
User custom 05-7106
* The smaller the setting value, the lighter the background becomes, while the larger the setting value, the
darker the background becomes.

Adjust the value and determine the optimal value while checking the copies by considering that the
setting value "25" for the [05] code corresponds to one step in the background adjustment on the control
panel.

If further image quality adjustments are still necessary, use the next procedure.

(3) Select [05 ADJUSTMENT MODE]. Change the values for codes [7190] to [7192] to adjust the gamma
balance in each of low- and medium-density areas.

Original Acceptable
[05] code Subcode Recommended value Default
mode value range
Text/Photo 05-7190 0/1
Text 05-7191 0/1 Set a value smaller than 128. 0 to 255 128
Photo 05-7192 0/1
* Set the value in increments of approximately 20, while checking the copy image until the optimum value is obtained.

* The subcode varies according to the area where the density is adjusted. Refer to the table below and set the
subcode for the area to be adjusted. The background density will vary, if the low- or medium-density area

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2-31
2. Copier-specific Adjustments

is mainly adjusted. Setting “2” for the subcode allows you to adjust the high-density area. But it will not
affect the background density. Therefore, never change the value for the high-density area.
Subcode Area where the density is adjusted
0 Low-density area
1 Medium-density area

After adjusting the gamma curve balance, copy and check the copy image quality.
If further image quality adjustments are still necessary, use the next procedure.

 Caution after the adjustment

The adjustment may possibly cause text handwritten with a pencil or light text to become illegible on the copy.
Therefore, carefully perform the adjustment, while checking the copy image.

 Remarks
Enter a value within the recommended value range mentioned in the procedures. Otherwise, it may cause a loss in
MFP performance, including degradation in the image quality.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2-32
 2. Copier-specific Adjustments

2.6.2 To Adjust the Copy Image Quality in the Full Color Mode

* You can start with any of the procedures. But it is recommended to perform the procedures in order, as listed
below. You can use one procedure in conjunction with another. But if this changes the image quality more than
required or loses the effectiveness of the adjustment, restore the settings made in the previously used procedure
to the original ones. Then use other procedures.
* Both the service technician and the user can use procedures (1) and (4).
* Only the service technician must use procedures (2) and (3).

(1) Press [AUTO] on the Control Panel to select the automatic density adjustment.

(2) Press [IMAGE] on the Control Panel. Press [BACKGROUND ADJUSTMENT].

Press [LIGHT] to decrease the background density.

After decreasing the background density, copy and check the image quality.
With the background density set to the minimum, if further image quality adjustments are still necessary, the
service technician must use the next procedure.

(3) Select [05 ADJUSTMENT MODE]. Change the values for the following codes below to adjust the density
level of the background.
Acceptable
Adjustment Original mode [05] code Recommended value Default
value range
Text/Photo 05-7656
Full color / Auto color
Text 05-7657
(when judged as color)
Printed image 05-7658
Photo 05-7659 Set a value smaller than
0 to 255 128
128.
Map 05-7660
Full color
User custom 05-7661
Red seal color 05-7662
* Set the value in increments of approximately 10, while checking the copy image until the optimum value is
obtained.

* The value for the code corresponding to the original mode (Text/Photo, Text, or Printed image) will affect
the copy image quality in the Full color mode and the Auto color mode.

* In the manual density adjustment, images are processed with the highlighting reproducibility given priority.
Therefore it is recommended to select the automatic density adjustment in order to make the background
lighter.

<Note> “Making the highlighted area more visible (or increasing the background density)” and
“eliminating the background color (or decreasing the background density)” are mutually
contradictory. If the density of the background color is decreased, the highlighted area may
become less visible.

After adjusting the background density, copy and check the copy image quality.
If further image quality adjustments are still necessary, or background elimination is necessary according to
color, use the next procedure.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2-33
2. Copier-specific Adjustments

(4) Select [05 ADJUSTMENT MODE]. Change the values for codes [7960 to 7987] to adjust the color density.
Color to Acceptable
Original mode [05] code Subcode Recommended value Default
adjust value range
Text/Photo 05-7960 0/1/2
Text 05-7961 0/1/2
Printed image 05-7962 0/1/2
Y
Photo 05-7963 0/1/2
(Yellow)
Map 05-7964 0/1/2
User custom 05-7980 0/1/2
Red seal color 05-7984 0/1/2
Text/Photo 05-7965 0/1/2
Text 05-7966 0/1/2
Printed image 05-7967 0/1/2
M
Photo 05-7968 0/1/2
(Magenta)
Map 05-7969 0/1/2
User custom 05-7981 0/1/2 Set a value larger than 128
to increase the density.
Red seal color 05-7985 0/1/2
0 to 255 128
Text/Photo 05-7970 0/1/2 Set a value smaller than 128
Text 05-7971 0/1/2 to decrease the density.
Printed image 05-7972 0/1/2
C
Photo 05-7973 0/1/2
(Cyan)
Map 05-7974 0/1/2
User custom 05-7982 0/1/2
Red seal color 05-7986 0/1/2
Text/Photo 05-7975 0/1/2
Text 05-7976 0/1/2
Printed image 05-7977 0/1/2
K
Photo 05-7978 0/1/2
(Black)
Map 05-7979 0/1/2
User custom 05-7983 0/1/2
Red seal color 05-7987 0/1/2
* Set the value in increments of approximately 10, while checking the copy image until the optimum value is
obtained.

* The setting value "25" corresponds to one step in the background adjustment on the control panel.

* The value for the code corresponding to the original mode (Text/Photo, Text, or Printed image) will affect
the copy image quality in the Full color mode and the Auto color mode.

* The subcode varies according to the area where the density is adjusted. Refer to the table below and set the
subcode for the area to be adjusted. The background (highlight) density will vary, if the low- or medium-
density area is mainly adjusted. Setting “2” for the subcode allows you to adjust the high-density area.
But it will not affect the background density. Therefore, never change the value for the high-density area.
Subcode Area where the density is adjusted
0 Low-density area
1 Medium-density area

After adjusting the background density, copy and check the copy image quality.
If further image quality adjustments are still necessary, use the next procedure.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2-34
 2. Copier-specific Adjustments

(5) Press [BASIC] on the Control Panel. Select “TEXT” from among the original mode options.
* To have “TEXT” selected from among the original mode options by default, refer to To Program
Frequently Used Copy Settings (To Use Custom Mode).

 Caution after the adjustment

The adjustment may possibly cause the highlighted area to become less visible on the copy. Therefore, carefully
perform the adjustment, while checking the copy image.

 Remarks
Enter a value within the recommended value range mentioned in the procedures. Otherwise, it may cause a loss
in MFP performance, including degradation in the image quality.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2-35
2. Copier-specific Adjustments

2.7 To Avoid Copying the Image Seen through the Back of a

Page Printed on Thin Paper

Original printed on thin paper (front) Original printed on thin paper (back)

Before adjustment After adjustment

When a double-sided original printed on thin The images seen through the back of the page
paper is copied, the images seen through the are not copied any more in duplex copying.
back of the page are also copied.

 Explanation
When a double-sided original printed on thin paper, such as a brochure and leaflet, is copied, the images seen
through the back of the page are also copied. Perform background adjustment, in order to avoid this problem.

 Procedures
* The procedure to use varies, depending on whether to adjust the copy image quality in the Black mode or the
Full color mode. Refer to the procedure corresponding to the user’s particular request.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2-36
 2. Copier-specific Adjustments

2.7.1 To Adjust the Copy Image Quality in the Black Mode

* You can start with any of the procedures. But it is recommended to perform the procedures in order, as listed
below. You can use one procedure in conjunction with another. But if this changes the image quality more than
required or loses the effectiveness of the adjustment, restore the settings made in the previously used procedure
to the original ones. Then use other procedures.
* Both the service technician and the user can use procedure (1) and (2).
* Only the service technician must use procedures (3) to (5).

(1) Press [IMAGE] on the Control Panel. Press [BACKGROUND ADJUSTMENT].

Press [LIGHT] to decrease the background density.

After decreasing the background density, copy and check the image quality.
With the background density set to the minimum, if further image quality adjustments are still necessary, the
service technician must use the next procedure.

(2) Press [BASIC] on the Control Panel. Press [ ] to decrease the copy density.
* Move the copy density indicator to the “ ” side for 1 or 2 steps. The images seen through the back of the page
will no longer be copied. But remember that text will also be lightly copied, depending on the type of original.

After decreasing the copy density, copy and check the copy image quality.
With the copy density set to the minimum, if the images seen through the back of the page are still copied, or if
you would like to prevent this problem without changing the copy density of text, use the next procedure.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2-37
2. Copier-specific Adjustments

(3) Select [05 ADJUSTMENT MODE]. Change the values for codes [7100] to [7102], [7105] and [7106]
adjust the density level of the background.
Acceptable
Recommended
Adjustment Original mode [05] code value Default
value
range
Text/Photo 05-7100
Text 05-7101
Black Photo 05-7102 Set 128 or larger. 0 to 255 128
Image smoothing 05-7105
User custom 05-7106
* The smaller the setting value, the lighter the background becomes, while the larger the setting value, the
darker the background becomes.
Adjust the value and determine the optimal value while checking the copies by considering that the
setting value "25" for the [05] code corresponds to one step in the background adjustment on the control
panel.

After adjusting the background density, copy and check the copy image quality.
If further image quality adjustments are still necessary, use the next procedure.

(4) Select [05 ADJUSTMENT MODE]. Change the values for codes [7190] to [7192] to adjust the gamma
balance in each of the low- and medium-density area.

Original [05] Acceptable

Subcode Recommended value Default
mode code value range
Text/Photo 05-7190 0/1
Set a value smaller than
Text 05-7191 0/1 0 to 255 128
128.
Photo 05-7192 0/1

* Set the value in increments of approximately 20, while checking the copy image until the optimum value is
obtained. (Note that gradations (density level) in the medium- and high-density areas may be reversed with
some setting values.)

* Since the subcode varies according to the area where the density is adjusted, refer to the table below and
set the appropriate subcode. Remember that mainly adjusting the low- or medium-density area will change
the copy density of the images seen through the back of the page. Setting “2” for the subcode will allow
you to adjust the high-density area. But this will not solve the problem. Therefore, never change the value
for the high-density area.

Subcode Area where the density is adjusted

0 Low-density area
1 Medium-density area

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2-38
 2. Copier-specific Adjustments

 Caution after the adjustment

The adjustment may possibly cause text handwritten with a pencil or light text to become illegible on the copy.
Therefore, carefully perform the adjustment, while checking the copy image.

 Remarks
Enter a value within the recommended value range mentioned in the procedures. Otherwise, it may cause a loss
in MFP performance, including degradation in the image quality and a reduction in the life of the consumables.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2-39
2. Copier-specific Adjustments

2.7.2 To Adjust the Copy Image Quality in the Full Color Mode

* You can start with any of the procedures. But it is recommended to perform the procedures in order, as listed
below. You can use one procedure in conjunction with another. But if this changes the image quality more than
required or loses the effectiveness of the adjustment, restore the settings made in the previously used procedure
to the original ones. Then use other procedures.
* Both the service technician and the user can use procedures (1) and (3).
* Only the service technician must use procedure (2).

(1) Press [IMAGE] on the Control Panel. Press [BACKGROUND ADJUSTMENT].

Press [LIGHT] to decrease the background density.

After decreasing the background density, copy and check the copy image quality.
With the background density set to the minimum, if the images seen through the back of the page are still
copied, the service technician must use the next procedure.

(2) Select [05 ADJUSTMENT MODE]. Change the values for the following codes below to adjust the density
level of the background.
Acceptable
Adjustment Original mode [05] code Recommended value Default
value range
Text/Photo 05-7656
Full color / Auto color
Text 05-7657
(when judged as color)
Printed image 05-7658
Set a value smaller than
Photo 05-7659 0 to 255 128
128.
Map 05-7660
Full color
User custom 05-7661
Red seal color 05-7662
* Set the value in increments of approximately 10, while checking the copy image until the optimum value is
obtained.

* The value for the code corresponding to the original mode (Text/Photo, Text, or Printed image) will affect
the copy image quality in the Full color mode and the Auto color mode.

<Note> “Making the highlighted area more visible (or increasing the background density)” and
“eliminating the background color (or decreasing the background density)” are mutually
contradictory. If the density of the background color is decreased, the highlighted area may
become less visible.

After adjusting the background density, copy and check the copy image quality.
If further image quality adjustments are still necessary, use the next procedure.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2-40
 2. Copier-specific Adjustments

(3) Press [BASIC] on the Control Panel. Select “TEXT” from among the original mode options.
* To have “TEXT” selected from among the original mode options by default, refer to 2.18 To Program
Frequently Used Copy Settings (To Use Custom Mode).

 Caution after the adjustment

The adjustment may possibly cause the highlighted area to become less visible on the copy. Therefore, carefully
perform the adjustment, while checking the copy image.

 Remarks
Enter a value within the recommended value range mentioned in the procedures. Otherwise, it may cause a loss
in MFP performance, including degradation in the image quality.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2-41
2. Copier-specific Adjustments

2.8 To Eliminate Moiré

Before adjustment After adjustment

Moiré occurs on the photo image. Moiré is eliminated and a clear copy image is
obtained.

 Explanation
When an original containing photo images or gradational images (halftones) is copied, moiré sometimes occurs
on the copy. Perform adjustment regarding image processing (sharpness intensity), in order to obtain a clear
copy image, while eliminating moiré.

 Procedures
* You can start with any of the procedures. But it is recommended to perform the procedures in order, as listed
below. You can use one procedure in conjunction with another. But if this changes the image quality more than
required or loses the effectiveness of the adjustment, restore the settings made in the previously used procedure
to the original ones. Then use other procedures.
* Both the service technician and the user can use procedures (1) and (2).
* Only the service technician must use procedure (3).

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2-42
 2. Copier-specific Adjustments

(1) Press [BASIC] on the Control Panel and select the original mode option, as follows:
• To copy in the Full color or the Auto color mode: Select the Printed image mode option.
• To copy in the Black mode: Select the Photo mode option.

* To have the above original mode options selected by default, use the following procedures:

To change the default original mode on the Control Panel

Use steps (a) to (d) to change default original mode.
(a) Press [USER FUNCTIONS] on the Control Panel to enter the “User Functions” menu.
(b) Press [USER].
(c) Press [COPY].
(d) In the “ORIGINAL MODE FOR COLOR” or “BLACK” option, press the button corresponding to
the desired original mode option.

To change the default original mode in [08 SETTING MODE]

Select [08 SETTING MODE]. Change the value for code [9970] or [9976] to change the original mode
option, which is selected by default at power-on.
• In the Black mode
Value for 08-9970 Default original mode at power-on
0 Text/Photo (default)
1 Text
2 Photo
3 Image smoothing
4 User custom

• In the Full color mode

Value for 08-9976 Default original mode at power-on
0 Text/Photo (default)
1 Text
2 Printed image
3 Photo
4 Map
5 User custom
6 Read seal color

* Press [BASIC] on the Control Panel. Select “Custom” from among the original mode options in the Black
or the Full color mode.
If [Custom] is not displayed on a menu to select an original mode, enable the User custom mode by
referring to Chapter 2.18.

After changing the default original mode option, copy and check the copy image quality.
If further image quality adjustments are still necessary, use the next procedure.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2-43
2. Copier-specific Adjustments

(2) Press [IMAGE] on the Control Panel. Press [SHARPNESS].

Press [SOFT] to soften the copy image.

After softening the copy image, copy and check the copy image quality.
If further image quality adjustments is necessary, go to the next step.

(3) Select [05 ADJUSTMENT MODE].Change the values for codes [7056] to [7058], [7249], [7794] to [7806],
and [7061] to adjust the default value for the sharpness intensity.
* Decreasing the sharpness intensity will minimize moiré.

Acceptable
Recommended
Color mode Original mode [05] code value Default
value
range
Text/Photo 05-7796
Text 05-7797
Printed Image 05-7798
Full color Photo 05-7799
Map 05-7800
User custom 05-7795
Red seal color 05-7794
Text/Photo 05-7801
Mono color Text 05-7802 Set a value smaller
0 to 255 128
Printed Image 05-7803 than 128.
Text/Photo 05-7804
Twin color Text 05-7805
Printed Image 05-7806
Text/Photo 05-7056
Text 05-7057
Black Photo 05-7058
User custom 05-7249
Image smoothing 05-7061

* The smaller the value is, the weaker the sharpness intensity becomes. The larger the setting value is, the
stronger the sharpness intensity becomes.
Changing the values for these codes will change the sharpness intensity, when the “Sharpness” indicator in
the “IMAGE” menu is set to the center. Remember that 1 step of the indicator will increase or decrease the
sharpness intensity by 25. If the sharpness intensity of the center value is changed, each step of the
indicator will be changed accordingly. (For instance, if the center value is decreased by 25 (softer), the
value of each step of the indicator will also be decreased by 25 (softer).)
However, the range of adjustment values that is valid for sharpness level change is from -100 to +100 of
the total of the setting value of the [05] code and that of the indicator. For instance, if the setting value of
the [05] code is “103” (-25 from the default value), the limit of the steps in the soft side of the indicator is
“-3”. If the step is set at “-4”, the image quality will not be changed.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2-44
 2. Copier-specific Adjustments

-4 -3 -2 -1 0 +1 +2 +3 +4
Soft Sharp

| | | | | | | | |

Default: -100 -75 -50 -25 0 +25 +50 +75 +100 Assigned adjustment
value of sharpness
Setting value "103": -100 -100 -75 -50 -25 0 +25 +50 +75

Since "-25" is assigned to the center, the image quality

remains the same even if the indicator is changed from
"-3" to "-4".

<Note> “Minimizing moiré” and “Sharpening the copy image” are mutually contradictory. When the
adjustment is performed to minimize moiré, the resolution of the copy image may decrease.

 Caution after the adjustment

Nothing in particular.

 Remarks
• Enter a value within the recommended value range mentioned in the procedures. Otherwise, it may cause a loss
in MFP performance, including degradation in the image quality.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2-45
2. Copier-specific Adjustments

2.9 To Copy Sharply (To enhance sharpness)

Before adjustment After adjustment

The image looks light and blurred on the copy. The edges are enhanced and the copy image
becomes sharper.

 Explanation
Perform adjustment regarding image processing (sharpness intensity), in order to obtain a sharper copy image,
when a light or blurred original is copied.

 Procedures
* You can start with any of the procedures. But it is recommended to perform the procedures in order, as listed
below. You can use one procedure in conjunction with another. But if this changes the image quality more than
required or loses the effectiveness of the adjustment, restore the settings made in the previously used procedure
to the original ones. Then use other procedures.
* Both the service technician and the user can use procedures (1) and (2).
* Only the service technician must use procedure (3).

(1) Press [IMAGE] on the Control Panel. Press [ONE TOUCH ADJUSTMENT].
Press [CLEAR] .

After selecting the “Clear” option, copy and check the copy image quality.
When the copy image quality with the “Clear” option selected is insufficient, cancel the “Clear” option and
use the next procedure.
(The one-touch adjustment can be canceled by pressing [ONE TOUCH ADJUSTMENT] again.)

(2) Press [IMAGE] on the Control Panel. Press [SHARPNESS].

Press [SHARP] to increase the sharpness intensity.

After increasing the sharpness intensity, copy and check the copy image quality.
If further image quality adjustment is necessary, go to the next step.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2-46
 2. Copier-specific Adjustments

(3) Select [05 ADJUSTMENT MODE]. Change the values for codes [7056] to [7058], [7249], [7795] to [7800]
and [7806] to [7809] to adjust the default value for the sharpness intensity.
* Increasing the sharpness intensity will enhance the edges of the image.
Acceptable
Recommended
Color mode Original mode [05] code value Default
value
range
Text/Photo 05-7796
Text 05-7797
Printed Image 05-7798
Full color Photo 05-7799
Map 05-7800
User custom 05-7795
Red seal color 05-7794
Text/Photo 05-7801
Mono color Text 05-7802 Set a value larger than
0 to 255 128
Printed Image 05-7803 128.
Text/Photo 05-7804
Twin color Text 05-7805
Printed Image 05-7806
Text/Photo 05-7056
Text 05-7057
Black Photo 05-7058
User custom 05-7249
Image smoothing 05-7061

* The smaller the setting value is, the weaker the sharpness intensity becomes. The larger the setting value is,
the stronger the sharpness intensity becomes.

Changing the values for these codes will change the sharpness intensity, when the “Sharpness” indicator in
the “IMAGE” menu is set to the center. Remember that 1 step of the indicator will increase or decrease the
sharpness intensity by 25. If the sharpness intensity of the center value is changed, each step of the
indicator will be changed accordingly. (For instance, if the center value is increased by 25 (sharper), the

-4 -3 -2 -1 0 +1 +2 +3 +4
Soft Sharp

| | | | | | | | |

Default: -100 -75 -50 -25 0 +25 +50 +75 +100 Assigned adjustment
value of sharpness
Setting value "153": -75 -50 -25 0 +25 +50 +75 +100 +100

Since "+25" is assigned to the center, the image quality

remains the same even if the indicator is changed from
"+3" to "+4".
value of each step of the indicator will also be increased by 25 (sharper).)
However, the range of adjustment values that is valid for sharpness level change is from -100 to +100 of
the total of the setting value of the [05] code and that of the indicator. For instance, if the setting value of
the [05] code is “153” (+25 from the default value), the limit of the steps in the sharp side of the indicator
is “+3”. If the step is set at “+4”, the image quality will not be changed.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2-47
2. Copier-specific Adjustments

<Note> “Sharpening the copy image” and “Minimizing moiré” are mutually contradictory. When an
adjustment is performed to sharpen the copy image, moiré may occur.

 Caution after the adjustment

Nothing in particular.

 Remarks
• Enter a value within the recommended value range mentioned in the procedures. Otherwise, it may cause a loss
in copier performance, including degradation in the image quality.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2-48
 2. Copier-specific Adjustments

2.10 To Make Photo Edges Look Softer

Before adjustment After adjustment

The edges (contours) of the image are highly The edges look soft.
visible.

 Explanation
When a photo image is copied, the contours or edges of the image sometimes become highly visible on the copy.
Perform adjustment regarding image processing (sharpness intensity), in order to soften the edges of the image.

 Procedures
* You can start with any of the procedures. But it is recommended to perform the procedures in order, as listed
below. You can use one procedure in conjunction with another. But if this changes the image quality more than
required or loses the effectiveness of the adjustment, restore the settings made in the previously used procedure
to the original ones. Then use other procedures.
* Both the service technician and the user can use procedures (1) and (2).
* Only the service technician must use procedures (3) to (5).

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2-49
2. Copier-specific Adjustments

(1) Press [BASIC] on the Control Panel and select the original mode option, as follows:
• To copy in the Full color or the Auto color mode: Select the Printed image mode option.
• To copy in the Black mode: Select the Photo mode option.

* When copying a photo image in the Full color mode, select the Photo mode option from among the original
mode options.

* To have the above original mode options selected by default, refer to 2.18 To Program Frequently Used
Copy Settings (To Use Custom Mode).

After changing the default original mode option, copy and check the copy image quality.
If further image quality adjustments are still necessary, use the next procedure.

(2) Press [IMAGE] on the Control Panel. Press [SHARPNESS].

Press [SOFT] to soften the copy image.

After softening the copy image, copy and check the copy image quality.
If further image quality adjustment is necessary, go to the next step.

(3) Select [05 ADJUSTMENT MODE]. Change the values for codes [7056] to [7058], [7061], [7249] and [7794]
to [7800] to adjust the default value for the sharpness intensity.
* Decreasing the sharpness intensity will minimize the edges of the image.

Accepta
Recommended
Color mode Original mode [05] code ble value Default
value
range
Text / Photo 05-7056
Text 05-7057 Set a value smaller
Black Photo 05-7058 than 128. 0 to 255 128
User custom 05-7249 (28 to 127)
Image smoothing 05-7061
Text / Photo 05-7796
Text 05-7797
Printed image 05-7798 Set a value smaller
Full color Photo 05-7799 than 128. 0 to 255 128
Map 05-7800 (28 to 127)
User custom 05-7795
Red seal color 05-7794

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2-50
 2. Copier-specific Adjustments

* The smaller the setting value is, the weaker the sharpness intensity becomes. The larger the setting value is,
the stronger the sharpness intensity becomes.
Changing the values for these codes will change the sharpness intensity, when the “Sharpness” indicator in
the “IMAGE” menu is set to the center. Remember that 1 step of the indicator will increase or decrease the
sharpness intensity by 25. If the sharpness intensity of the center value is changed, each step of the
indicator will be changed accordingly. (For instance, if the center value is decreased by 25 (softer), the
value of each step of the indicator will also be decreased by 25 (softer).)
However, the range of adjustment values that is valid for sharpness level change is from -100 to +100 of
the total of the setting value of the [05] code and that of the indicator. For instance, if the setting value of
the [05] code is “103” (-25 from the default value), the limit of the steps in the soft side of the indicator is
“-3”. If the step is set at “-4”, the image quality will not be changed.

-4 -3 -2 -1 0 +1 +2 +3 +4
Soft Sharp

| | | | | | | | |

Default: -100 -50 -50 -25 0 +25 +50 +75 +100 Assigned adjustment
value of sharpness
Setting value "103": -100 -100 -75 -50 -25 0 +25 +50 +75

Since "-25" is assigned to the center, the image quality

remains the same even if the indicator is changed from
"-3" to "-4".

<Note> “Minimizing the edges of the copy image” and “Sharpening the copy image” are mutually
contradictory. When the adjustment is performed to minimize the edges, the resolution of the
copy image may decrease.

After decreasing the sharpness intensity, copy and check the copy image quality.
If further image quality adjustments are still necessary, use the next procedure.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2-51
2. Copier-specific Adjustments

(4) Select [05 ADJUSTMENT MODE]. Change the values for codes [7889 to 7892] to adjust the maximum
color density of text.
Acceptable
Color to adjust [05] code Recommended value Default
value range
Y
05-7889
(Yellow)
Set a value larger than 5 to
M
05-7890 increase the density.
(Magenta)
0 to 10 5
C
05-7891 Set a value smaller than 5 to
(Cyan)
decrease the density.
K
05-7892
(Black)
* Set the value in increment of 1, while checking the copy image until the optimum value is obtained.

After adjusting the maximum color density of the text, copy and check the copy image quality.
If further image quality adjustments are still necessary, use the next procedure.

(5) Select [05 ADJUSTMENT MODE]. Change the setting values for codes [7840], [7841] and [7842] to adjust
the reproduction level for the Text/photo, User custom and Red seal color original modes.

Accept
Recommended able
Color mode Original mode [05] code Default
value value
range
Text/Photo 05-7840
Set a value smaller than
Full color User custom 05-7841 0 to 9 0
5.
Red seal color 05-7842

* Adjustment for the User custom setting is enabled in the Text/photo mode base only.

* Set the value in increments of 1, while checking the copy image until the optimum value is obtained.
Set the value to “5” and check the copy image quality.
If further image quality adjustment is necessary, set the value to “4”.
If further adjustment is necessary, decrease the value step by step.

* Remember that if a value larger than “5” is set, the edges of the image are enhanced (attaching importance
to the reproducibility of text). The table below shows you the correlation between the value and image
quality.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2-52
 2. Copier-specific Adjustments

Value Advantage of image quality Reproducibility of edges

0 Default Intermediate
Intended to improve the reproducibility of photos more
1 Soft
than the one obtained when “2” is set.
Intended to improve the reproducibility of photos more
2 ↓
than the one obtained when “3” is set.
Intended to improve the reproducibility of photos more
3 ↓
than the one obtained when “4” is set.
Intended to improve the reproducibility of photos more
4 ↓
than the one obtained when “5” is set.
Equivalent to the one obtained when the default value
5 Intermediate
(“0”) is set.
Intended to improve the reproducibility of text more
6 ↓
than the one obtained when “5” is set.
Intended to improve the reproducibility of text more
7 ↓
than the one obtained when “6” is set.
Intended to improve the reproducibility of text more
8 ↓
than the one obtained when “7” is set.
Intended to improve the reproducibility of text more
9 Sharp
than the one obtained when “8” is set.
* For the User custom mode, refer to "2.18 To Program Frequently Used Copy Settings (To Use Custom
Mode)".

 Caution after the adjustment

When an original containing text is copied, the adjustment may possibly cause the text to become blurred on the
copy. Therefore, carefully perform the adjustment, while checking the copy image.

 Remarks
Enter a value within the recommended value range mentioned in the procedures. Otherwise, it may cause a loss
in MFP performance, including degradation in the image quality.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2-53
2. Copier-specific Adjustments

2.11 To Make Solid Filled Bold Text (Logo) Highly Colored

Before adjustment After adjustment

The solid filled graph is not highly colored The solid filled graph becomes highly colored
enough. and sharper.

 Explanation
Solid filled bold text, such as a logo, is sometimes not highly colored on the copy. Change the original mode option,
perform copy density adjustment and level adjustment for black headline text, in order to make the solid filled
image more highly colored.

* This adjustment will have an effect only on copying in the Full color mode.

 Procedures
* The procedure to use varies, depending on whether to adjust the copy image quality of a black or colored logo.
Refer to the procedure corresponding to the user‘s particular request.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2-54
 2. Copier-specific Adjustments

2.11.1 To Adjust the Copy Image Quality of a Black Logo

* You can start with any of the procedures. But it is recommended to perform the procedures in order, as listed
below. You can use one procedure in conjunction with another. But if this changes the image quality more than
required or loses the effectiveness of the adjustment, restore the settings made in the previously used procedure
to the original ones. Then use other procedures.
* Both the service technician and the user can use steps (1) and (2).
* Only the service technician can use steps (3) and (4).

<Important> Before you start this adjustment, make sure that no color misalignment exists on the logos.
If there is any, correct it before adjustment. For how to correct the color misalignment
(deviation), refer to “1.5 To Correct Out-of-Registration Colors” in this manual and also the
Service Manual.

(1) Press [BASIC] on the Control Panel. If you want to emphasize the reproducibility of text more, select
“TEXT” as an original mode. If you want to emphasize that of photos, select “TEXT/PHOTO”.
* If you want the “TEXT” or “TEXT/PHOTO” mode to be the default original mode, refer to "2.18 To
Program Frequently Used Copy Settings (To Use Custom Mode)".

After selecting the Text mode, copy and check the copy image quality.
If further image quality adjustment is necessary, go to the next step.

(2) Perform color balance adjustment to enhance black.

• Use steps (a) through (d) to perform the adjustment.
(a) Press [IMAGE] on the Control Panel.
(b) Press [COLOR BALANCE].
(c) Press [+] to enhance the tint of [BLACK].
* Press [DETAIL]. The tint of the color can be adjusted according to the density area (low-, medium-
or high-density area).
(d) Press [ENTER].

After adjusting the tint of black, copy and check the copy image quality.
If further image quality adjustment is necessary even after the tint of black was set to the maximum, the
service technician must perform the next step.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2-55
2. Copier-specific Adjustments

(3) Select [05 ADJUSTMENT MODE]. Change the setting values for codes [7811], [7812], [7816] and [7817]
to adjust the black header density level.

Accepta
Color Original
[05] code Recommended value ble value Default
mode mode
range
Text/Photo 05-7811
Set a value larger than 4.
Text 05-7812
When the base original
mode is Text/Photo, Text or
Map: Set a value larger than
Full color /
User custom 05-7816 4. 0 to 8 0
Auto color
When the base original
mode is Printed Image or
Photo: Set a value larger
than 3.
Red seal color 05-7817 Set a value larger than 4.

* Set the value in increments of approximately 1, while checking the copy image until the optimum value is
obtained.
* For the User custom mode, refer to "2.18 To Program Frequently Used Copy Settings (To Use Custom
Mode)".

After adjusting the level of black headline text, copy and check the copy image quality.
If further image quality adjustment is necessary, the service technician must perform the next step.

(4) Select [05 ADJUSTMENT MODE]. Change the setting values for codes [7975], [7976], [7983] and [7987]
to adjust the black density.

Color to Recommend Acceptable

Original mode [05] code Subcode Default
adjust ed value value range
Text/Photo 05-7975
Set a value
K Text 05-7976
0/1/2 larger than 0 to 255 128
(Black) User custom 05-7983
128.
Red seal color 05-7987

* Set the value in increments of approximately 10, while checking the copy image until the optimum value is
obtained.
* The subcode varies according to the area where the density is adjusted. Refer to the table below and set the
subcode for the area to be adjusted.
Subcode Area where the density is adjusted
0 Low-density area
1 Medium-density area
2 High-density area

 Caution after the adjustment

The adjustment may possibly cause the highly or deeply colored area, such as in a photo, to become blurred on
the copy. Also, it may also cause offset failure, grained images and degradation in gradation. Therefore,
carefully perform the adjustment, while checking the copy image.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2-56
 2. Copier-specific Adjustments

2.11.2 To Adjust the Copy Image Quality of a Colored Logo

* You can start with any of the procedures. But it is recommended to perform the procedures in order, as listed
below. You can use one procedure in conjunction with another. But if this changes the image quality more than
required or loses the effectiveness of the adjustment, restore the settings made in the previously used procedure
to the original ones. Then use other procedures.
* Both the service technician and the user can use procedures (1) to (3).
* Only the service technician must use procedure (4).

(1) Press [BASIC] on the Control Panel. Press [ ] to increase the copy density.

After increasing the copy density, copy and check the copy image quality.
With the copy density set to the maximum, if further image quality adjustments are still necessary, use the
next procedure.

(2) Perform color balance adjustment or RGB adjustment to adjust the tint of the colors in general.
• Use steps (a) through (d) to perform the adjustment.
(a) Press [IMAGE] on the Control Panel.
(b) Press [COLOR BALANCE] to adjust the color balance by changing the amount of toner
(c) Press [+] to enhance the tint of the color or [-] to decrease it.
* After selecting the color balance by changing the amount of toner (C, M, Y and K), press
[DETAIL]. The tint of the color can be adjusted according to density area (low-, medium- or high-
density area).
(d) Press [ENTER].

After adjusting the tint of the colors, copy and check the copy image quality.
If further image quality adjustments are still necessary, use the next procedure.

(3) Press [BASIC] on the Control Panel. Select “TEXT” from among the original mode options.
* To have “TEXT” selected from among the original mode options by default, refer to "2.18 To Program
Frequently Used Copy Settings (To Use Custom Mode)".

After selecting the Text or Map mode, copy and check the copy image quality.
If further image quality adjustments are still necessary, the service technician must use the next procedure.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2-57
2. Copier-specific Adjustments

(4) Select [05 ADJUSTMENT MODE]. Change the setting values for codes [7960], [7961], [7965], [7966],
[7970], [7971], [7975], [7976] and [7980] to [7983] to adjust the density for each color.

Accep
Color to Recommended table
Original mode [05] code Subcode Default
adjust value value
range
Text/Photo 05-7960 0/1/2
Y Text 05-7961 0/1/2
(Yellow) User custom 05-7980 0/1/2
Red seal color 05-7984 0/1/2
Text/Photo 05-7965 0/1/2
M Text 05-7966 0/1/2
(Magenta) User custom 05-7981 0/1/2
Red seal color 05-7985 0/1/2 Set a value larger than 0 to
128
Text/Photo 05-7970 0/1/2 128. 255
C Text 05-7971 0/1/2
(Cyan) User custom 05-7982 0/1/2
Red seal color 05-7986 0/1/2
Text/Photo 05-7975 0/1/2
K Text 05-7976 0/1/2
(Black) User custom 05-7983 0/1/2
Red seal color 05-7887 0/1/2

* Set the value in increments of approximately 10, while checking the copy image until the optimum value is
obtained.

* The subcode varies according to the area where the density is adjusted. Refer to the table below and set the
subcode for the area to be adjusted.
Subcode Area where the density is adjusted
0 Low-density area
1 Medium-density area
2 High-density area

 Caution after the adjustment

The adjustment may possibly cause a dark-colored area, such as in a photo, to become blurred on the copy. Also,
it may also cause offset failure, grained images and degradation in gradation. Therefore, carefully perform the
adjustment, while checking the copy image.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2-58
 2. Copier-specific Adjustments

2.12 To Sharply Contrast the Hues of Highlighters on the Copy

Before adjustment After adjustment

Copy Copy

The hues of highlighters are not accurately The areas marked with 2 different colored
reproduced. The areas marked with 2 different highlighters are accurately reproduced
colored highlighters are reproduced in the and distinguishable on the copy.
same hue. They are indistinguishable.

 Explanation
When an original containing text or areas marked with highlighters is copied, their hues may sometimes not be
accurately reproduced on the copy. The inks of highlighters are special. Therefore, their hues cannot be accurately
reproduced. To reproduce the hues of similar highlighters, such as yellow and green, while producing sharp
contrasts on the copy, perform color adjustment (color balance adjustment or RGB adjustment).

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2-59
2. Copier-specific Adjustments

 Procedures
* You can start with any of the procedures. But it is recommended to perform the procedures in order, as listed
below. You can use one procedure in conjunction with another. But if this changes the image quality more than
required or loses the effectiveness of the adjustment, restore the settings made in the previously used procedure
to the original ones. Then use other procedures.
* Both the service technician and the user can use procedures (1) and (3).
* Only the service technician must use procedures (2) and (4).

(1) Press [IMAGE] on the Control Panel. Press [ONE TOUCH ADJUSTMENT].
Press [MARKER] .

After selecting the “Marker” option, copy and check the copy image quality.
When the copy image quality with the “Marker” option is insufficient, cancel the “Marker” option and use
the next procedure. (The one-touch adjustment can be canceled by pressing [ONE TOUCH ADJUSTMENT]
again.)

(2) Select [05 ADJUSTMENT MODE]. Change the value for code [1769] to adjust the tint of colors in Marker mode.
[05] code Subcode Acceptable value range Default
05-7850 0 to 5 0 to 6 3
* Set the value in increments of approximately 1, while checking the copy image until the optimum value is
obtained.

* The subcode varies according to the color where the adjustment is performed. Refer to the table below and
set the subcode for the color to be adjusted.
Subcode Color to adjust
0 Y (Yellow)
1 M (Magenta)
2 C (Cyan)
3 R (Red)
4 G (Green)
5 B (Blue)

* Setting a value larger than the default value moves the hue of the color selected to [+] as shown below. On
the other hand, setting a value smaller than the default value moves it to [-].
(For instance, set 6 for R (Red). Then the tint of the red is closely matched with that of Y (Yellow). Set 0
for R (Red). Then the tint of the red will be closely matched with that of M (Magenta).

After adjusting the hue, copy and check the copy image quality.
If further image quality adjustments are still necessary, use the next procedure.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2-60
 2. Copier-specific Adjustments

(3) Perform color balance adjustment or RGB adjustment to adjust the tint of the colors in general.
* For further information regarding the adjustment procedures, refer to procedure (3) in 2.2 To Closely Match
the Color Balance of the Original.

After adjusting the tint of colors, copy and check the copy image quality.
If further image quality adjustments are still necessary, the service technician must use the next procedure.

(4) Select [05 ADJUSTMENT MODE]. Change the values for codes [7960] to [7979] and [7980] to [7983] to
adjust the density level of each color.
Color to Acceptable
Original mode [05] code Subcode Recommended value Default
adjust value range
Text/Photo 05-7960 0/1/2
Text 05-7961 0/1/2
Printed image 05-7962 0/1/2
Y
Photo 05-7963 0/1/2
(Yellow)
Map 05-7964 0/1/2
User custom 05-7980 0/1/2
Red seal color 05-7984 0/1/2
Text/Photo 05-7965 0/1/2
Text 05-7966 0/1/2
Printed image 05-7967 0/1/2
M
Photo 05-7968 0/1/2
(Magenta)
Map 05-7969 0/1/2
Set a value larger than 128
User custom 05-7981 0/1/2 to increase the density.
Red seal color 05-7985 0/1/2
0 to 255 128
Text/Photo 05-7970 0/1/2 Set a value smaller than
Text 05-7971 0/1/2 128 to decrease the
density.
Printed image 05-7972 0/1/2
C
Photo 05-7973 0/1/2
(Cyan)
Map 05-7974 0/1/2
User custom 05-7982 0/1/2
Red seal color 05-7986 0/1/2
Text/Photo 05-7975 0/1/2
Text 05-7976 0/1/2
Printed image 05-7977 0/1/2
K
Photo 05-7978 0/1/2
(Black)
Map 05-7979 0/1/2
User custom 05-7983 0/1/2
Red seal color 05-7987 0/1/2
* Set the value in increments of approximately 10, while checking the copy image until the optimum value is
obtained.

* The value for the code corresponding to the original mode (Text/Photo, Text, or Printed image) will affect
the copy image quality in the Full color mode and the Auto color mode.

* The subcode varies according to the area where the density is adjusted. Refer to the table below and set the
subcode for the area to be adjusted.
Subcode Area where the density is adjusted
0 Low-density area
1 Medium-density area
2 High-density area

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2-61
2. Copier-specific Adjustments

 Caution after the adjustment

The adjustment may possibly vary the hues of areas (including photo images and text) other than those marked
with highlighters. Therefore, carefully perform the adjustment, while checking the copy image.

 Remarks
Enter a value within the recommended value range mentioned in the procedures. Otherwise, it may cause a loss
in MFP performance, including degradation in the image quality.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2-62
 2. Copier-specific Adjustments

2.13 To Obtain a Good Color Balance on Thick Paper

Before adjustment After adjustment

The copy image looks light on thick paper. The copy image looks darker and sharper even
on thick paper.

 Explanation
When image looks light on paper that is different from usual paper, perform automatic calibration for each paper type
to obtain the optimum image quality.

 Procedures
* You can start with any of the procedures. But it is recommended to perform the procedures in order, as listed
below. You can use one procedure in conjunction with another. But if this changes the image quality more than
required or loses the effectiveness of the adjustment, restore the settings made in the previously used procedure
to the original ones. Then use other procedures.
* Only the service technician must use procedures (1), (2) and (4).
* Both the service technician and the user can use procedure (3).

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2-63
2. Copier-specific Adjustments

(1) Perform automatic calibration for each paper type to correct variations in image density.
* A privilege to perform automatic calibration is set to Administrator by default but this can be changed to
the User. For how to change the privilege, refer to the MFP Management Guide.
• Follow steps (a) through (j) to perform the automatic calibration.
(a) Select [08 SETTING MODE]. Change the value of the code [9059] to “1” so that automatic
calibration for each paper type will be enabled.

Value for 08-9059 Display for user calibration

0 Not displayed (default)
1 Displayed
(b) Press [USER FUNCTIONS] on the Control Panel to enter the “User Functions” menu.
(c) IPress [ADMIN].
(d) Enter an administrator password in 6 to 64 digits. Press [ENTER].
(e) Press [GENERAL].
(f) Press [CALIBRATION].
(g) Press [COPY].
(h) Select the paper type for correction.
(i) Press [CALIBRATION] to print a test chart.
(j) Place the printed test chart on the original glass.
(k) Press the [START] button to start the calibration. The message “WAIT” disappears when the
calibration is finished.
* The procedure above covers both the color and black copy calibration.
After the automatic calibration, copy and check the image quality.
If further image quality adjustment is necessary, go to the next step.

(2) Select [05 ADJUSTMENT MODE].. Change the values for codes [7913] to adjust the amount of toner used.
• The code to use varies according to the paper type. Adjust the value for [05] code corresponding to the
paper type for whose image quality you would like to improve and increase the value to obtain the copy
density that the user desires.
• In the [7913] setting, the toner amount of Y, M, C and K single colors is not changed, but that of the
overlaid colors reproduced by two or more colors, such as R, G, B and K, is controlled.
Recommended Acceptable
Paper type [05] code Subcode Default
value value range
Thick 1 3
Thick 2 4
Thick 3 5
Thick 4 6
05-7913 128 0 to 255 128
Special 1 7
Special 2 8
Special 3 9
OHP 12
* Set the value in increments of approximately 4, while checking the copy image until the optimum value is
obtained.
* Although the larger the value, the darker the density becomes, offsetting may occur if the value is too large.
Adjust the value while checking the copy image carefully.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2-64
 2. Copier-specific Adjustments

* The table below shows you the acceptable paper weight for the paper type.
Paper type Acceptable paper weight
Thick 1 106 to 163 g/m² Max. 60 lb. Cover
Thick 2 164 to 209 g/m² Max. 110 lb. Index
Thick 3 210 to 256 g/m² Max. 140 lb. Index
Thick 4 257 to 280 g/m² Max. 100 lb. Cover

* Use the recommended OHP transparencies and special paper.

After adjusting the amount of toner used, copy and check the copy image quality.
If further image quality adjustments are still necessary, the service technician must use the next procedure.

(3) Perform color balance adjustment or RGB adjustment to adjust the tint of the colors in general.
* For further information regarding the adjustment procedures, refer to procedure (3) in 2.2 To Closely
Match the Color Balance of the Original.

After adjusting the tint of colors, copy and check the copy image quality.
If further image quality adjustments are still necessary, use the next procedure.

(4) Select [05 ADJUSTMENT MODE]. Change the values for codes [7960] to [7987] to adjust the density level
of each color.

Color to Acceptable
Original mode [05] code Subcode Recommended value Default
adjust value range
Text/Photo 05-7960 0/1/2
Text 05-7961 0/1/2
Printed image 05-7962 0/1/2
Y
Photo 05-7963 0/1/2
(Yellow)
Map 05-7964 0/1/2
User custom 05-7980 0/1/2
Red seal color 05-7984 0/1/2
Text/Photo 05-7965 0/1/2
Text 05-7966 0/1/2
Printed image 05-7967 0/1/2
M
Photo 05-7968 0/1/2
(Magenta)
Map 05-7969 0/1/2
User custom 05-7981 0/1/2 Set a value larger than 128
Red seal color 05-7985 0/1/2 to increase the density.
0 to 255 128
Text/Photo 05-7970 0/1/2
Set a value smaller than 128
Text 05-7971 0/1/2 to decrease the density.
Printed image 05-7972 0/1/2
C
Photo 05-7973 0/1/2
(Cyan)
Map 05-7974 0/1/2
User custom 05-7982 0/1/2
Red seal color 05-7986 0/1/2
Text/Photo 05-7975 0/1/2
Text 05-7976 0/1/2
Printed image 05-7977 0/1/2
K
Photo 05-7978 0/1/2
(Black)
Map 05-7979 0/1/2
User custom 05-7983 0/1/2
Red seal color 05-7987 0/1/2

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2-65
2. Copier-specific Adjustments

* Set the value in increments of approximately 10, while checking the copy image until the optimum value is
obtained.

* The value for the code corresponding to the original mode (Text/Photo, Text, or Printed image) will affect
the copy image quality in the Full color mode and the Auto color mode.

* The subcode varies according to the area where the density is adjusted. Refer to the table below and set the
subcode for the area to be adjusted.
Subcode Area where the density is adjusted
0 Low-density area
1 Medium-density area
2 High-density area

 Caution after the adjustment

Nothing in particular.

 Remarks
• Enter a value within the recommended value range mentioned in the procedures. Otherwise, it may cause a loss
in MFP performance, including degradation in the image quality and a reduction in the life of the consumables

• If the adjustment causes a toner fixing problem, decrease the values for codes 05-7899 and 7905 to 7911.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2-66
 2. Copier-specific Adjustments

2.14 To Obtain Smooth Gray-Scale Photo Images

Before adjustment After adjustment

Halftones are not accurately reproduced. Halftones are reproduced better.

 Explanation
When a photo image or gradational image is copied in the Black mode with the Text/Photo mode selected,
halftones are not accurately reproduced. Select the Photo mode or the Image smoothing mode from among the
original mode options, in order to reproduce halftones better in the Black mode.

 Procedures
* Both the service technician and the user can perform all adjustments.

(1) Press [BASIC] on the Control Panel. Select “PHOTO” from among the original mode options.
* To have “PHOTO” selected from among the original mode options by default, refer to 2.18 To Program
Frequently Used Copy Settings (To Use Custom Mode).

After selecting the Photo mode, copy and check the copy image quality.
If further image quality adjustments are still necessary, use the next procedure.

(2) Press [BASIC] on the Control Panel. Select “IMAGE SMOOTHING” from among the original mode
options.
* To have “IMAGE SMOOTHING” selected from among the original mode options by default, refer to 2.18
To Program Frequently Used Copy Settings (To Use Custom Mode).

 Caution after the adjustment

Nothing in particular.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2-67
2. Copier-specific Adjustments

2.15 To Change the Threshold in Auto Color Mode

(To change the threshold between the Full Color mode and the Black mode to meet the user‘s
needs)
Original

Copied in the Auto color mode

Before adjustment After adjustment

It is copied in the Full color mode. Changing the threshold value will allow a
colored original to be copied in the Black
mode.

 Explanation
When the Auto color mode is selected, it will be automatically determined whether an original is colored or
black-and-white. Then it will be copied in the Full color mode or the Black mode. But adjust the threshold
value, in order to change the threshold between the Black mode and the Full color mode and suit the preferences
of the user.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2-68
 2. Copier-specific Adjustments

 Procedures
* You can start with any of the procedures. But it is recommended to perform the procedures in order, as listed
below. You can use one procedure in conjunction with another. But if this changes the image quality more than
required or loses the effectiveness of the adjustment, restore the settings made in the previously used procedure
to the original ones. Then use other procedures.
* Both the service technician and the user can use procedure (1).
* Only the service technician must use procedure (2).

(1) Change the threshold for the Auto Color mode.

• Follow steps (a) through (d) to perform the adjustment.
(a) Press [USER FUNCTIONS] on the Control Panel to enter the “User Functions” menu.
(b) Press [USER].
(c) Press [COPY].
(d) Change the threshold with the “ACS ADJUSTMENT” indicator. If you move the indicator to the left,
the original tends to be judged as a black original. If you move it to the right, the original tends to be
judged as a color original.

<Hint> The relation between the position of the “ACS ADJUSTMENT” indicator and the judgment
result is shown below. In the actual adjustment, the threshold varies depending on the shape and
size of the original or the density level of the original image. Therefore use the table below only
as a reference.
Position of Adjustment
No. of stamps No. of red characters
indicator value
0 +230 Approx. 10 judged as color Approx. 100
1 +190 Approx. 5 judged as color Approx. 60
2 +150 Approx. 3 judged as color Approx. 40
3 +90 Approx. 2 judged as color Approx. 20
4 +40 Approx. 1 judged as color Approx. 10
5 0 Approx. 1/2 judged as color Approx. 6
6 -20 Approx. 1/2 judged as black 4 or more
* Position of indicator: “0” in the table above denotes the left end of the indicator (the original is
judged as black most) and “6” denotes the right end of the indicator (the original is judged as
color most).
* Adjustment value: This refers to the judgment threshold for the Auto Color mode. The
adjustment value of the code in step (2) below will be added to this value.
* The diameter of the standard “stamp” is
pprox.. from 8 mm to 12 mm. In this field the
number of the stamps on the chart and its judgment result are described.
* The size of the standard “red character” is
pprox.. 10.5 pt. In this field the number of the red
characters entered and its judgment result are described.

After specifying the original size and copy size, copy and check the copy image quality.
If further image quality adjustments are still necessary, the service technician must use the next procedure.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2-69
2. Copier-specific Adjustments

(2) Select [05 ADJUSTMENT MODE]. Change the values for code [7630] to adjust the threshold value in the
Auto color mode.
* As the set value is increased, the original will be more likely to be recognized as black-and-white. On the
other hand, if the value is decreased, it will be more likely to be recognized as full color.
Acceptable
Threshold to adjust [05] code Default
value range
Threshold when an original is placed on the
05-7630 0 to 255 70
original glass or when the DF is used
* Set the value in increments of approximately 20, while checking the copy image until the optimum value is
obtained.

 Caution after the adjustment

• When a non-standard sized original is copied, an area outside the original (or the original cover) may also be
scanned. This may prevent the original size from being accurately detected. If the original cover is soiled, the
type of original cannot be accurately detected. Therefore, instruct the users to clean the original cover on a
routine basis (once a week).

• After the threshold in the Auto color mode is adjusted, based on a particular type of original, other types of
original may not be correctly detected. Therefore, carefully perform the adjustment, while checking whether
any type of original is correctly detected.

• Note that changing the judgment threshold for originals influences the Auto color in network scanning.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2-70
 2. Copier-specific Adjustments

2.16 To Adjust the Twin-Color Copy Image Quality

Before adjustment After adjustment

When a twin-color copy is made in the red The blend of undesired colors in the black area
and black mode, red may be blended in a is reduced.
part of black area.

 Explanation
When a twin-color copy is made, red may be blended into the black area or colors other than black on the twin-
color copy may look different from what the user desires. Adjust the tint of the colors, the reproducibility of
black in the Red and black mode, or the boundary between black and colors other than black, in order to reduce a
blend of undesired colors into the black area or adjust the tint of colors other than black.

 Procedures
* The procedure to use varies, depending on whether to adjust the tint of colors other than black, the
reproducibility of black in the Red and black mode, or the boundary between black and colors other than black.
Refer to the procedure corresponding to the user‘s particular request.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2-71
2. Copier-specific Adjustments

2.16.1 To Adjust the Tint of Colors other than Black

* Both the service technician and the user can perform all adjustments.

(1) Press [IMAGE] on the Control Panel. Press [TWIN COLOR COPY].
Select the Twin-color copy mode from among the twin color copy mode options.

• To select Red and black mode:

Press [RED & BLACK].

• To select the Twin-color selectable mode:

Use steps (a) through (d) to select the Twin-color selectable mode.
(a) Press [TWIN COLOR SELECTABLE].
(b) Press [CHANGE BLACK TO]. Press the button for the desired color.
(c) Press [SECOND COLOR]. Press the button for the desired color.
(d) Press [ENTER].

Use procedure (2).

(2) Press [ADJUST]. Press [+]or [-] for the color to be adjusted, in order to adjust the tint of colors other than
black.

• In the Red and black mode:

• Press [-] to decrease yellow and [+] to enhance magenta, in order to enhance the tint of red.
• Press [+] to enhance yellow and [-] to decrease magenta, in order to decrease the tint of red.

• In the Twin-color selectable mode:

Press [+] to enhance the tint of the color or [-] to decrease it.

* Note that the adjustment is not possible if the combination of the selected colors in the Twin-color
selectable copy mode is "Black and Black" or "Color other than black and Color other than black".

* Press [DETAIL]. The tint of the color can be adjusted according to the density area (low-, medium- or
high-density area).

 Caution after the adjustment

Nothing in particular.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2-72
 2. Copier-specific Adjustments

2.16.2 To Adjust the Boundary between Black and Colors other than Black

* Both the service technician and the user can use procedures (1) and (2).
* Only the service technician must use procedure (3).
* Note that the adjustment results of steps (1) and (2) will be applied only to the Red and Black mode. The
adjustment result of step (3) will be applied to both of the Red and Black mode and the Twin Color mode
(enabling selection of other colors).

(1) Press [IMAGE] on the Control Panel. Press [TWIN COLOR COPY].
Press [RED&BLACK] to enter the Red and black mode.

Use procedure (2).

(2) Press [ADJUST]. Press [] or [] for Range Adjustment, in order to adjust the boundary between red and
black.
• [] “RED”: The black area decreases and the red area increases.
• [] “BLACK”: The black area increases and the red area decreases.

After adjusting the boundary, copy and check the copy image quality.
If further image quality adjustments are still necessary, the service technician must use the next procedure.

(3) Select [05 ADJUSTMENT MODE]. Change the values for codes [7641/7642] to adjust the boundary between
black and colors other than black.
* In the Twin-color selectable copy mode, the larger the setting value, the wider the area that is to be
reproduced by the color selected as the "black in the original” becomes, while the smaller the setting value,
the wider the area that is to be reproduced by the color selected as the "color other than black" becomes. In
the Red and Black mode, the larger the setting value, the wider the area to be reproduced in black becomes,
while the smaller the setting value, the larger the area to be reproduced in red becomes.
Acceptable
Mode to adjust [05] code Subcode Default
value range
Twin color mode with selected colors 05-7641
0/1/2 0 to 255 128
Twin color – Red and black mode
05-7642
(“RED” selected in Twin color selectable mode)

* The subcode varies according to the area where the density is adjusted. Refer to the table below and set the
subcode for the area to be adjusted.
Subcode Area where the density is adjusted
0 High-density area
1 Medium-density area
2 Low-density area

 Caution after the adjustment

Nothing in particular.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2-73
2. Copier-specific Adjustments

2.16.3 To Adjust the Tint of Specified Colors for Twin-Color or Single-Color

Copying

 Explanation
In twin-color or single-color copying, the tint of the color specified from the control panel can be changed by
adjusting the toner amount of the color (Y, M, C or K).

 Procedures
*The service technician must perform all adjustments.

(1) Select [05 ADJUSTMENT MODE]. Change the values of codes [7644] to [7653] to adjust the value of Y, M,
C or K for the tint of the specified color.
(2) After changing the setting value, reboot the equipment, and check the tint of the image printed in twin-color
or single-color copying.

* Select the subcode (0 to 3) depending on which toner color (Y, M, C and K) you want to change.
* When the subcode for the specified color (Y, M, C or K) is larger, the toner amount for the adjusted color
increases, when the former is smaller, the latter decreases.
* If the value is too large, the density becomes too dark and the reproducibility of gradations in the high-
density area may become blurred and degraded. Therefore, carefully perform the adjustment, while
checking the copy or print image.
* When all the subcodes are set to “0”, the specified color becomes white.
* Adjustments for yellow green, pink, orange and purple are enabled in mono color copying only.

Specified color Color of toner

Acceptable
from the control amount to be [05] code Subcode Default
value range
panel adjusted
Y 0
M 1
Magenta 7644 0 to 255 128
C 2
K 3
Y 0
M 1
Yellow 7645 0 to 255 128
C 2
K 3
Y 0
M 1
Yellow green 7646 0 to 255 128
C 2
K 3
Y 0
M 1
Cyan 7647 0 to 255 128
C 2
K 3
Y 0
Pink 7648 0 to 255 128
M 1
e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2-74
 2. Copier-specific Adjustments

C 2
K 3
Y 0
M 1
Red 7649 0 to 255 128
C 2
K 3
Y 0
M 1
Orange 7650 0 to 255 128
C 2
K 3
Y 0
M 1
Green 7651 0 to 255 128
C 2
K 3
Y 0
M 1
Blue 7652 0 to 255 128
C 2
K 3
Y 0
M 1
Purple 7653 0 to 255 128
C 2
K 3

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2-75
2. Copier-specific Adjustments

2.17 To Adjust the Image Quality Scanned from the DF

Before adjustment After adjustment

To scan an original placed on the original glass To scan an original placed on the original glass

To scan an original fed from the DF To scan an original fed from the DF

The reproducibility of background may vary, The gap in the reproducibility of background
depending on how to scan an original. is reduced.

 Explanation
The reproducibility of the background may vary, depending on the type of original, or whether the scanning is of
an original placed on the original glass or one fed from the DF. Adjust the reproducibility of background, while
scanning an original fed from the DF, in order to minimize the gap in the reproducibility of the background,
using either method of how to scan an original.

*Correctly adjusting the installation heights of the MFP and the DF is a prerequisite to perform this adjustment.
Therefore, perform all the necessary adjustments. Only if further adjustment is still desired for the reproducibility of
background, should this adjustment be performed.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2-76
 2. Copier-specific Adjustments

 Procedures
* The service technician must perform all adjustments.

(1) Select [05 ADJUSTMENT MODE]. Change the value for the code [3009] or [3011] to adjust the
reproducibility of the background when using the DF.
Acceptable
Color mode [05] code Recommended value Default
value range
Common for full
color and black
05-3009 Set a value larger than 3 to increase the
for RADF/front
side for DSDF background density.
0 to 4 0
Common for full Set a value smaller than 2 to decrease the
color and black background density.
05-3011
back side for
DSDF
* The DSDF is available only for e-STUDIO2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC.
* Set the value in increments of approximately 1, while checking the copy image until the optimum value is
obtained. (When changing the value from the default value for the first time, it is recommended to set
“2.”)

* The table below shows you the correlation between the value and image quality.
Reproductivity
Value Advantage of image quality
of background
Default (equivalent to the one obtained when an original placed on the
0 ---
original glass is scanned)
Lighter background is reproduced than the one obtained when “2” is
1 Light
set.
Lighter background is reproduced than the one obtained when the
2 ↓
default value is set.
Darker background is reproduced than the one obtained when the
3 ↓
default value is set.
Darker background is reproduced than the one obtained when “3” is
4 Dark
set.

After setting the value, copy and check the image quality.
If further image quality adjustment is necessary, go to the next step.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2-77
2. Copier-specific Adjustments

(2) Select [05 ADJUSTMENT MODE]. Change the values for codes [7025] or [7026] to adjust the
reproducibility of the background when using the DF.
Acceptable
Color mode Original mode [05] code Recommended value Default
value range
Full color for
RADF/front ALL 05-7026
side for DSDF Set a value larger than 128 to
increase the background
Black for density.
RADF/front ALL 05-7025 0 to 255 128
side for DSDF Set a value smaller than 128
Common for to decrease the background
full color and density.
ALL 05-7024
black back side
for DSDF
* The DSDF is available only for e-STUDIO2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC.
* Set the value in increments of approximately 20, while checking the copy image until the optimum value is
obtained.
* Note that the adjustment results are also reflected to the scanning function.

 Caution after the adjustment

Correctly adjusting the installation heights of the MFP and the DF is a prerequisite to perform this adjustment.
Therefore, perform all the necessary adjustments. Only if further adjustment is still desired for the reproducibility of
background, should this adjustment be performed.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2-78
 2. Copier-specific Adjustments

2.18 To Program Frequently Used Copy Settings

(To Use Custom Mode)

 Explanation
Five original modes (Text/Photo, Text, Printed image, Photo and Map) are available for the color modes and
four original modes (Text/Photo, Text, Photo and Image smoothing) are available for the black mode by default.
However, a new original mode adjusted to be able to satisfy the user’s particular requests about image quality
can be added as a “custom” mode. One custom mode can be added for each of the color and black modes. For
users who frequently use the special type of originals or who are not satisfied with the image quality of the
existing original modes, it is recommended to register a set of copy settings that satisfy the user’s particular
requests as the custom mode. However, “Photo” and “Image smoothing” cannot be selected for the “custom”
mode.

* In the User custom mode, one of the original modes set by default is selected as a base (reference) original
mode. Adjustments required for the intended purpose must be performed based on the selected mode.
. It is also available to use the custom mode as an independent original mode. This means that the change of the
setting values in the custom mode does not affect each default original modes.

 Procedures
The adjustment procedure differs depending on whether in the black mode or the full color mode the settings in
the custom mode are adjusted. Ask the user which mode he or she uses and then refer to the procedure that is
more suitable for his or her request.

2.18.1 To Adjust Custom Mode Settings in Black Mode

* All the steps in the adjustment procedure shall be performed by the service technician.

(1) Select [08 SETTING MODE]. Change the value for the code [7034] to enable the functions of the custom
mode in the black mode.
Value for 08-7034 Custom mode for black mode
0 Unused
1 Used (Text/Photo base)
2 Used (Text base)

After the setting, perform the adjustment accordingly referring to the corresponding chapters.

 Cautions after the adjustment

Nothing in particular

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2-79
2. Copier-specific Adjustments

2.18.2 To Adjust Custom Mode Settings in Full Color Mode

* All the steps in the adjustment procedure shall be performed by the service technician.

(1) Select [08 SETTING MODE]. Change the value for the code [7614] to enable the functions of the custom
mode in the full color mode.

Value for 08-7614 User mode for full color mode

0 Unused
1 Used (Text/Photo base)
2 Used (Text base)
3 Used (Printed Image base)
4 Used (Photo base)
5 Used (Map base)
* The default adjustment value for the custom mode is preset at the one that reproduces the image quality
equivalent to that of Text/Photo in the full color mode at the time of shipment.

After the setting, perform the adjustment accordingly referring to the corresponding chapters.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2-80
 2. Copier-specific Adjustments

2.19 To Copy While Erasing Shadow Outside of Image

Before adjustment After adjustment

When originals such as books are copied, an The shadow is erased.

area outside of the image is copied like a
shadow because the original cover is not fully
closed.

 Explanation
When originals such as books are copied, an area outside of the image is copied like a shadow because the
original cover is not fully closed. Use the Outside Erase function to avoid copying areas outside of the image.

 Procedures
* Both the service technician and the user can use all the steps of this adjustment.

(1) Press [EDIT] on the touch panel and then press [OUTSIDE ERASE].
Change the border between the original and areas not belonging to the original by pressing either [+] or [-]
as required.
* When you adjust it to [+] side, the area to be detected as that not belonging to the original is widened.
When you adjust it to [-] side, the area to be detected as that not belonging to the original is narrowed.

<Notes>
The Outside Erase function may not be operated correctly under the following conditions:
* When making copies in a bright room, leaving the DF or the Platen Cover opened (The density of areas not
belonging to the original is lowered due to outside light.)
* When the original has extremely dark areas (The extremely dark areas are wrongly detected as areas not
belonging to the original and thus erased.)
* In case of special originals (e.g. a three-dimensional object, an original with black edges, the edges of an
opened book)

 Caution after the adjustment

Areas not belonging to the original may not be erased exactly as the user has requested (erased too much or not
erased at all) depending on the type of the original. Also the area to be erased may change depending on the
orientation of the original. Therefore adjust it carefully while checking the copy image.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2-81
2. Copier-specific Adjustments

2.20 To Avoid Copying Blank Page of Original Scanned with DF

Before adjustment After adjustment

1

P1 2

P1
3

P2
4

4 P2

P3
5

5 P4

P4

P5

P5

When the original is scanned with the DF, The blank pages are omitted.
blank pages included in the original are also
copied.

 Explanation
When the original is scanned with the DF, blank pages included in the original are also copied. To copy while
omitting the blank pages automatically, the Blank Omit Pages function must be set and its threshold for judging
if the page is blank or not must be adjusted. However, colored originals with no text or images are not omitted
even this adjustment was performed because they cannot be detected as “blank pages” with this function.
* Target originals
• The back side of an original with dark images on its front side (the dark images can be seen through the
back side) or an original with light color
• An original with only 3 letters in 10.5 pt. (an original that is omitted as a blank page with the default
setting)

 Procedures
* You can start with any of the steps. However, it is recommended to perform the steps in order as listed below.
* Both the service technician and the user can use step (1) and (2).
* Only the service technician can use step (3).

(1) Press [EDIT] on the touch panel and then press [OMIT BLANK PAGE].
Then press [OK] to enable the Omit Blank Page function.

After the setting, copy and check the image.

If there is any page other than colored pages that cannot be omitted, the service technician must perform the
procedure below.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2-82
 2. Copier-specific Adjustments

(2) Press [USER FUNCTIONS] on the Control Panel. Then press [+] or [-] of [OMIT BLANK PAGE
ADJUSTMENT].

(3) Select [05 ADJUSTMENT MODE]. Change the value for the code [7618] to adjust the threshold for
judging the original as blank pages.
• The larger the setting value is, the more the original tends to be judged as a blank page.

[05] code Recommended value Acceptable range value Default

05-7618 Set a value larger than 128. 0~255 128
* Set the value in increments of approximately 15 until the optimum value is obtained, while checking if
proper originals are judged as a blank page.

 Caution after the adjustment

• When the threshold for judging blank pages is changed, the same threshold for in the network scanning
function is also changed.

• Originals with a small portion of small letters may be judged as a blank page. Therefore adjust the value
carefully while checking the copy image.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2-83
2. Copier-specific Adjustments

2.21 To Obtain Image in Even Density Level

Original After adjustment

Feeding
direction

When the density is adjusted automatically, the When the density is adjusted
density on the entire copy image becomes manually, the density of the entire
uneven. copy image is even.
Before adjustment

Feeding
direction

 Explanation
When an original with a background is copied in the automatic density adjustment mode, unevenness may occur
on the copied background. Perform this function to avoid density unevenness.

 Procedures
* Both the service technicians and the users can use steps (1) and (3).
* Only the service technicians can use step (2).

(1) Press [BASIC] on the control panel and press [ ] to lower the copy density manually.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2-84
 2. Copier-specific Adjustments

After the adjustment is complete, make a copy and confirm the image quality. If uneven image density still
persists, have the service technicians perform the following procedure.

(2) Select [05 ADJUSTMENT MODE]. Change the setting values for codes [7237], [7286] and [7287] to set the
range correction to be fixed.
Recommended Acceptable
Color mode Original mode [05]code Default
value value range
Text/Photo 05-7286
Black Text 05-7287 0 0, 1 1
User custom 05-7237

* Description of the setting value

Value Range correction
0 Fixed
1 Flexible

After the adjustment is complete, make a copy and confirm the image quality.

 Caution after the adjustment

Nothing in particular

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2-85
2. Copier-specific Adjustments

2.22 To Improve Reproducibility of Red Seal Color

Before adjustment After adjustment

 Explanation
When an original containing a red seal is copied, users can select the Red Seal Color as the original mode. Use
this mode if the reproducibility of red seal color copied under the default copy settings is insufficient.

 Procedures
(1) Select [08 SETTING MODE]. Change the value for code [7610] to “1”.

(2) Press [BASIC] on the control panel in the normal mode. Select “RED SEAL COLOR” among the
original modes.

After selecting “RED SEAL COLOR”, make a copy and check its image quality.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2-86
 2. Copier-specific Adjustments

2.23 To Reduce Streaks at Scanning with DF

Before adjustment After adjustment

<---- Paper feeding direction <---- Paper feeding direction

 Explanation
If streaks occur in copying with the DF, they can be solved by cleaning the original glass in the DF. Moreover,
they can be made inconspicuous by changing the setting of the following self-diagnostic code.

 Procedures
* The procedure of this adjustment differs between "When adjusting the image quality of the Black mode" and
"When adjusting the image quality of the Full color mode".
Select the adjustment procedure corresponding to the user's requirement.

2.23.1 When adjusting the image quality of the Black mode

* Both the service technician and the user can use step (1).
* Only the service technician can use step (2).

(1) Press [Image] and then [ADF Noise Reduction] on the touch panel.
Change the setting value of the noise reduction level.
Setting value Description
None The noise reduction function is disabled.
Low The noise reduction level is low.
Middle The noise reduction level is medium.
High The noise reduction level is high.

After changing the setting value, perform printing and check its image quality.
If an additional image quality adjustment is necessary, perform the following steps.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2-87
2. Copier-specific Adjustments

(2) Enter [05 ADJUSTMENT MODE] and change the setting values for the codes from [7150] to [7152] to
adjust the noise reduction level.
Original Acceptable
Color mode [05] Code Recommended value Default
mode value range
Text/Photo 7151
Set a value smaller than
Black Text 7152 0 to 200 100
100.
User custom 7150
* The smaller the value is, the larger the noise reduction level becomes. The larger the value is, the smaller
the noise reduction level becomes.
* When "0" is set for the setting value, this function becomes disabled.

After changing the setting value, perform printing and check its image quality.

 Caution after the adjustment

Nothing in particular

2.23.2 When adjusting the image quality of the Full color mode
* Both the service technician and the user can use all steps of this adjustment.
<Notes>
・This adjustment is available when the Text/Photo mode is selected for the original mode for full color copying.
・Normally, the use with the factory default setting (Disabled) is recommended since the adjustment may
decrease the reproducibility of fine characters.

(1) Press [Image] and then [ADF Noise Reduction] on the touch panel.
Change the setting value of the noise reduction level.
Setting value Description
None The noise reduction function is disabled.
Low The noise reduction level is low.
Middle The noise reduction level is medium.
High The noise reduction level is high.

After changing the setting value, perform printing and check its image quality.

 Caution after the adjustment

Nothing in particular

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2-88
 2. Copier-specific Adjustments

2.24 To Change Gray Tone

Before adjustment After adjustment

 Explanation
The gray tone can be changed when an original including gray color is copied.

 Procedures
The service technician must perform the adjustments.

(1)Select [08 SETTING MODE] and change the setting value of the code [7614] to enable the User custom
mode for the full color.
For details, refer to “2.18.2 To Adjust Custom Mode Settings in Full Color Mode”.
Base mode: [Text/Photo] (Setting value: 1)

(2)Select [05 ADJUSTMENT MODE] and change the setting value for the code [7690].
Acceptable
Recommended
[05] Code value Default Remarks
value
range
0: Default (Gray reproduction level is
equivalent to the Text/photo mode.)
1: Gray reproduction level is equivalent to
05-7690 3 0 to 4 0
the Photo mode.
3: The gray tone becomes a more bluish
one.

 Caution after the adjustment

Nothing in particular

 Remarks
The setting content of the values “2” and “4” is the same as that for the default (“0”).

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2-89
2. Copier-specific Adjustments

2.25 The Color Reproduction of the Back Side Differs from that for the
Front Side at DSDF Scanning

 Explanation
When the color reproduction between the front and back sides at the DSDF scanning differs, the color
reproduction of the back side can be nearly matched with that for the front side.

 Procedures
The service technician must perform all adjustments.

(1)Perform automatic calibration. For details, refer to (1) in “3.1 To Maintain a Steady Color Balance”.

(2)Select [05 ADJUSTMENT MODE]. Enter [50] and press [TEST PRINT] to print out an adjustment pattern.

(3)Select [08 SETTING MODE]. Perform the code [7021] and scan the front and back sides of the pattern
printed in step (2), in accordance with the message displayed on the panel.
First, scan the front side. (Place the printed side up. Set the pattern on the DSDF while its side with 2 black
quadrilaterals comes to the leading edge and press [OK].)
Next, scan the back side. (Place the printed side down. Set the pattern on the DSDF while its side with 2
black quadrilaterals comes to the leading edge and press [OK].)

(4)When an error occurs, check the following items.

- Check that the print side is set properly.
- Check that the 2 black quadrilaterals are set to the leading edge.
- Check that the guides in the DSDF match the paper size.

Calibration

 Caution after the adjustment

When colored paper is used, calibration may not be performed properly.
This adjustment is applied in common to copying, scanning and faxing.

 Remarks
If you want to return the color reproduction of the back side at the DSDF scanning to the original one after the
adjustment has been performed with this procedure, carry out the code [7002] in [08 SETTING MODE].

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2-90
 2. Copier-specific Adjustments

2.26 To Improve the Gradation Reproduction of Dark Portions in Photos

Before adjustment After adjustment

 Explanation
To improve the gradation reproduction of images including dark portions, select the Printed image original mode
or use the color balance.
If you want to improve the gradation reproduction of dark portions in photos only, but not to affect the entire
image, perform the adjustment by means of the following steps.

 Procedures
The service technician must perform all adjustments.

(1)Select [05 ADJUSTMENT MODE] and change the setting value for the code corresponding to the original
mode to be used.
Acceptable
Color mode Original mode [05] Code Recommended value Default
value range
Text/Photo 05-7811 Set a value smaller than
Text 05-7812 4.
Base original mode is
Text/Photo, Text: Set a
Full color / value smaller than 4.
User custom 05-7816 Base original mode is 0 to 8 0
Auto color
Printed image, Photo,
Map: Set a value smaller
than 3.
Set a value smaller than
Red seal color 05-7817
4.
* Set the value in increments of 1, while checking the copy image until the optimum value is obtained.
* For the User custom mode, refer to “2.18 To Program Frequently Used Copy Settings (To Use Custom
Mode)”.
* The setting content of the default value “0” is the same as that for the setting value of each original mode
as below.
Original mode Setting value Original mode Setting value
Text/Photo Printed image
Text 4 Photo 3
Red seal color Map
e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2-91
2. Copier-specific Adjustments

 Caution after the adjustment

This adjustment will affect to that for set at (3) in “2.11.1 To Adjust the Copy Image Quality of a Black Logo”.
When performing this adjustment, pay attention to the balance against the reproduction level of the black color
logos, too.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2-92
3. Printer-specific Adjustments

Restrictions on Use of Printer Functions

When this MFP is being used as a printer, printer functions available differ depending on the color or resolution
settings. See the table below for the relation between color or resolution settings and printer functions available.
600dpi 1200dpi (PS3 only)
Printer functions Black Black
Auto / Twin Auto / Twin
and and
Color Color Color Color
White White
Image Quality Type
General  
Photograph 
Presentation 
Line Art  
Advanced  *1 
Image Quality – Basic
Halftone     
Use Black for All text     
Pure Black / Pure Gray  
Black Over Print  *2 
PostScript Over Print  *2  *2
Distinguish Thin Lines     
Image Quality – Color Balance / Image Attribute
Color Balance    *3   *3
Contrast     
Brightness     
Background Adjustment     
Saturation  
Use Sharpness Filter   
Auto Trapping   
Others
Toner Save     
Toner Limit     
Calibration   
*1 Applicable only to PS3 and XPS printer drivers
*2 Applicable only to a PS3 printer driver
*3 Applicable only to black (K)

<Hint> The resolution level 1200 dpi is suitable for cases such as:
• When printing thin lines (e.g. in a graph) clearly
> 3.16 To Clearly Print Thin Lines/Double Lines

• When suppressing jagged diagonal lines

> 3.14 To Clearly Print Light-Colored Thin Lines or Text

* 600 dpi is recommended for images such as photographs or design drawings that require
emphasis on colors or gradations.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-1
3. Printer-specific Adjustments

3.1 To Maintain a Steady Color Balance

Before adjustment After adjustment

The color balance varies according to a change The color balance is constantly maintained.
in the environment or a lapse of time.

 Explanation
The color balance varies according to a change in the environment, replacement of the consumables and so forth.
Periodically adjust the color reproducibility (automatic calibration), in order to constantly maintain a steady color
balance on the printouts.
Automatic calibration is the basic adjustment to accurately reproduce colors on the printouts. When you would
like to accurately reproduce the desired hue or when you have replaced the consumables and changed the
operating conditions, perform automatic calibration to ensure the color reproducibility.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-2
 3. Printer-specific Adjustments

 Procedures
* Perform the adjustment in accordance with the procedures below.
* Both the service technician and the user can use all steps of this adjustment.
PCL6 PS3 XPS Mac
(1) Perform automatic calibration to correct variations in image density.
* [ADMIN] is selected from among the [CALIBRATION DISPLAY LEVEL] options by default. In other
words, an administrator is authorized to operate automatic calibration. But the [USER] option can also be
selected to allow the user to operate it. Refer to the MFP Management Guide for further information
regarding how to select the [CALIBRATION DISPLAY LEVEL] option.

* Perform each adjustment for 600dpi and 1200dpi.

* Use steps (a) through (i) to perform the automatic calibration.

(a) Press [USER FUNCTIONS] on the Control Panel to enter the “User Functions” menu.
(b) Press [ADMIN].
(c) Enter an administrator password of 6 to 64 digits. Press [OK].
(d) Press [GENERAL].
(e) Press [CALIBRATION].
(f) Press [600dpi PRINT] or [1200dpi PRINT].
(g) Press [CALIBRATION] to print out the test chart.
(h) Place the printed test chart on the original glass.
(i) Press the [START] button to perform calibration. When the calibration comes to an end, the message
“Scanning and calibrating” will disappear.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-3
3. Printer-specific Adjustments

3.2 To Maintain a Steady Color Balance on Thick Paper or Special Paper

Before adjustment After adjustment

Plain paper Plain paper

Thick paper Thick paper

The color balance varies according to the The color balance is constantly maintained on
paper type. any type of paper.

 Explanation
The color balance varies according to a change in the environment, replacement of the consumables and so forth.
The amount of the change varies significantly, according to the paper type. Periodically adjust the color
reproducibility (automatic calibration) corresponding to the paper type, in order to constantly maintain a steady
color balance on any type of paper.
Automatic calibration is the basic adjustment to accurately reproduce colors on the printouts. When you would
like to accurately reproduce the desired hue or when you have replaced the consumables and changed the
operating conditions, perform automatic calibration to ensure the color reproducibility.

 Procedures
* Perform the adjustment in accordance with the procedures below.
* Only the service technician must use procedure (1).
* Both the service technician and the user can use procedure (2).

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-4
 3. Printer-specific Adjustments

PCL6 PS3 XPS Mac

(1) Select [08 SETTING MODE]. Set “1” for code [9059].
• During automatic calibration, the paper type can be selected and image quality control will be
automatically performed.

Operation switching at calibration

Value for 08-9059
(displaying of a paper selection menu during automatic calibration)
0 No paper selecting buttons display
1 Paper selecting buttons displayed.(For both Copy and Printer)

After setting the value, use the next procedure.

PCL6 PS3 Mac

(2) Perform automatic calibration to correct variations in image density.
* [ADMIN] is selected from among the [CALIBRATION DISPLAY LEVEL] options by default. In other
words, an administrator is authorized to operate the automatic calibration. But the [USER] option can also
be selected to allow the user to operate it. Refer to the MFP Management Guide for further information
regarding how to select the [CALIBRATION DISPLAY LEVEL] option.

* Perform each adjustment for 600dpi and 1200dpi.

* Use steps (a) through (k) to perform the automatic calibration.

(a) Press [USER FUNCTIONS] on the Control Panel to enter the “User Functions” menu.
(b) Press [ADMIN].
(c) Enter an administrator password of 6 to 64 digits. Press [OK].
(d) Press [GENERAL].
(e) Press [CALIBRATION].
(f) Press [600dpi PRINT] or [1200dpi PRINT].
(g) Press the button for the paper type to be corrected.

(h)Press [DEFAULT] to set the default calibration setting, or [CALIBRATION] to adjust the calibration
setting.
* When you press [DEFAULT], the system maintains the default calibration setting for the selected job
type and returns to the previous screen.
* When you press [CALIBRATION], a chart is printed out and the calibration guide illustration is
displayed on the touch panel. Proceed to the next step.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-5
3. Printer-specific Adjustments

(i) Place the paper type (A4/LT size) selected in (g) on the bypass tray.
(j) Place the printed chart face down on the original glass aligning it with its left rear corner, so that two
black rectangular marks are on the left side.
(k) Press the [START] button on the control panel.
* The calibration begins. Do not operate the equipment until the message “Scanning and calibrating”
disappears.
* If the chart is not properly placed, the message “Set chart correctly” is displayed on the touch panel. In
this case, return to step (j) and realign the chart.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-6
 3. Printer-specific Adjustments

3.3 To Obtain the Desired Color Balance

Before adjustment After adjustment

The natural color balance is obtained. The desired color balance is obtained.
(Ex. Yellowness is enhanced.)

 Explanation
If you would like to change the color balance or darkness of the printouts and reproducibility of halftones in
accordance with a type of original or the user’s requirements, change the “Image Quality Type” option on the
printer driver or adjust the color balance.

 Procedures
* Perform the adjustment in accordance with the procedures below.
* Both the service technician and the user can use procedures (1) and (2).
* Only the service technician must use procedure (3).

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-7
3. Printer-specific Adjustments

(1) Change the “Image Quality Type” option on the printer driver.

For Windows
PCL6 PS3 XPS * This adjustment will have an effect only on Auto or Color mode printing.

Open the property page of the printer driver. Change the “Image Quality Type” option in the “Image
Quality” tab.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-8
 3. Printer-specific Adjustments

For Macintosh
Mac * This adjustment will have an effect only on full-color printing.

Open the print dialog box. Change the "Color Settings 1" - “Image Type” option.

* This adjustment will be effective, only if a file created on a general application, such as Microsoft Office,
is printed in PostScript (PS3, XPS and Macintosh). It may not be effective, if a file created on a graphic
application (e.g. Illustrator) or a DTP application (e.g. QuarkXPress) is printed, or a PDF file created on
these applications is printed using the C, M, Y and K toners. Unmark the “Use PostScript Passthrough”
checkbox in the “PostScript Setting” options in the “Others” tab. The “Image Quality Type” option will be
effective, if printing on Windows (PS3) is performed (but not on Macintosh) or if a file created on the
above applications is printed. However, the color balance may be changed, and also the image quality may
be diminished, depending on the type of file.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-9
3. Printer-specific Adjustments

* The Image Quality Type options feature the following:

• General: “General” is the best-rounded option to offer fine printouts of any type of original,
including text, photographs and graphics. It is suitable for printing using word-
processing and spreadsheet software. If “General” is selected, “Smooth,” which
is intended to improve the reproducibility of gradations, will be applied to
graphics and images, while “Detail,” which is intended to improve the resolving
power, will be applied to text, from among the “Halftone” options (screen).

• Photograph: “Photograph” is intended to improve the reproducibility of halftones, such as

photos and gradational images. This provides the color balance closely matching
the one on the monitor with sRGB selected as a color space. If “Photograph” is
selected, “Smooth,” which is intended to improve the reproducibility of
gradations, will be applied to graphics and images, while “Detail,” which is
intended to improve the resolving power, will be applied to text, from among
the “Halftone” options.

• Presentation: “Presentation” is intended to improve to the reproducibility of vivid colors. It is

suitable for printing presentation materials and graphics, which require sharp-
contrast images. The color balance this option provides does not match the one
on the monitor, because priority is given to printing in highly vivid colors. If
“Presentation” is selected, “Smooth,” which is intended to improve the
reproducibility of gradations, will be applied to graphics and images, while
“Detail,” which is intended to improve the resolving power, will be applied to
text, “ from among the “Halftone” options.

• Line Art: “Line Art” is intended to reproduce thin lines clearly without jaggies visible on
the printout. It is suitable for printing out line drawings. If "Line Art" is
selected, "Detail", which is intended to print halftones in detail (with the high
frequency), will be applied to graphics, images and text, from among the
"Halftone" options. The color reproduction this option provides is the same as
the one the "General" option does. However, since the amount of the black toner
reproduced by 4 colors has been increased, this is also suitable for images
consisting of thin lines such as photographs or barcodes.

After changing the option on the printer driver, print and check the print image quality.
If further image quality adjustments are still necessary, use the next procedure.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-10
 3. Printer-specific Adjustments

(2) Change the “Color Balance” option, the “Brightness” or “Saturation” option on the printer driver.

For Windows
PCL6 PS3 XPS * This adjustment will have an effect only on Auto or Color mode printing.
Open the property page of the printer driver. Press [Image Type Quality] in the “Image Quality” tab.
Change the option in the “Color Balance” or “Image Attribute” tab.

* Initially, change the value by 4 steps, while checking the printouts until the optimum value is obtained.

• “Color Balance” tab: Change the “All Colors” or “Each Color” option

• “Image Attribute” tab: Change the “Brightness” or “Saturation” option.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-11
3. Printer-specific Adjustments

For Macintosh
Mac * This adjustment will have an effect only on full-color printing.

Open the print dialog box. Change the "Color Settings 2" - “Color Balance” option, the “Brightness” or
“Saturation” option.

* Initially, change the value by 4 steps, while checking the printouts until the optimum value is obtained.

After changing the option on the printer driver, print and check the print image quality.
If further image quality adjustments are still necessary, the service technician must use the next procedure.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-12
 3. Printer-specific Adjustments

PCL6 PS3 XPS Mac * This adjustment will have an effect only on Auto or Color mode printing.

(3) Select [05 ADJUSTMENT MODE]. Change the values for codes [8042 to 8065] or [8268 to 8275] to adjust
the color density.
• Adjust the value for [05] code corresponding to the print option to be applied (PDL and Halftone).

Ex.: • When printing on Windows is performed with the following options selected: PCL6, Image Quality
Type = General, Halftone = Auto
> Text area, Graphic and image area
Change the values of “Smooth” for Y: 05-8058, M: 05-8059, C: 05-0860 and K: 05-8061.

• When printing on Macintosh is performed with the following option selected: Image Type =
Photograph, Halftone = Smooth
> Change the values for Y: 05-8050, M: 05-8051, C: 05-8052 and K: 05-8053.
* Printing on Macintosh is performed in PostScript. (See the “PS3” row in the table below.)

Color to Acceptable
PDL Halftone [05] code Subcode Recommended value Default
adjust value range
Smooth 05-8058 0/1/2
PCL5c
Detail 05-8062 0/1/2
PS3 Smooth 05-8050 0/1/2
Y (600dpi) Detail 05-8054 0/1/2
(Yellow) PS3 Smooth 05-8268 0/1/2
(1200dpi) Detail 05-8272 0/1/2
Smooth 05-8042 0/1/2
XPS
Detail 05-8046 0/1/2
Smooth 05-8059 0/1/2
PCL5c
Detail 05-8063 0/1/2
PS3 Smooth 05-8051 0/1/2
M (600dpi) Detail 05-8055 0/1/2
(Magenta) PS3 Smooth 05-8269 0/1/2
(1200dpi) Detail 05-8273 0/1/2
Smooth 05-8043 0/1/2
XPS
Detail 05-8047 0/1/2
Smooth 05-8060 0/1/2 Set a value larger than 128 0 to 255 128
PCL5c
Detail 05-8064 0/1/2
PS3 Smooth 05-8052 0/1/2
C (600dpi) Detail 05-8056 0/1/2
(Cyan) PS3 Smooth 05-8270 0/1/2
(1200dpi) Detail 05-8274 0/1/2
Smooth 05-8044 0/1/2
XPS
Detail 05-8048 0/1/2
Smooth 05-8061 0/1/2
PCL5c
Detail 05-8065 0/1/2
PS3 Smooth 05-8053 0/1/2
K (600dpi) Detail 05-8057 0/1/2
(Black) PS3 Smooth 05-8271 0/1/2
(1200dpi) Detail 05-8275 0/1/2
Smooth 05-8045 0/1/2
XPS
Detail 05-8049 0/1/2
* Set the value in increments of approximately 20, while checking the printouts until the optimum value is
obtained.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-13
3. Printer-specific Adjustments

* “Halftone” refers to how halftones are printed. Two options are available: “Smooth” which is intended to
improve the reproducibility of gradation and “Detail” which is intended to print halftones in details (with
the high frequency).
The halftone option to be applied in printing can be selected from among the “Halftone” options on the
printer driver (Windows) or in the print dialog box (Macintosh).
“Auto” is selected from among the “Apply to” options by default. It is intended to automatically select
“Smooth” or “Detail” in accordance with “Apply to” of the halftone option, the selected “Color” and
“Image Quality Type” options, as described in the table below.

“Color” and “Image Quality Type” options

Apply to Auto/Color Black and Twin
General Photograph Presentation Line Art White Color
Text Detail Detail Detail Detail Detail Detail

Graphic
Smooth Smooth Smooth Detail Smooth Smooth
(Illustration, line, etc.)
Image
Smooth Smooth Smooth Detail Smooth Smooth
(Photograph, etc.)

* The subcode varies according to the area where the density is adjusted. Refer to the table below and set the
subcode for the area to be adjusted.
Subcode Area where the density is adjusted
0 Low-density area
1 Medium-density area
2 High-density area

<Note> • This adjustment changes the values set in the MFP. Therefore, it will affect every user who
uses the printer by connecting it to the MFP. After the adjustment, the values changed will be
applied to all printouts for the “Image Quality Type” and “Halftone” options. (For instance, if
the value for [05] code for PCL6 and Smooth is changed, it will be applied to printing
performed with PCL6 and Halftone = “Smooth” (or “Auto”) selected.) Carefully perform the
adjustment, being aware that the image quality of all future printouts will be changed, when
printing out originals other than the one that is used for the adjustment.

 Precautions after the completion of the adjustment

Nothing in particular.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-14
 3. Printer-specific Adjustments

3.4 To Closely Match the Color Balance on the Monitor

As viewed on the monitor

Before adjustment After adjustment

The color balance as viewed on the monitor The color balance of the printout is closely
looks different from the printout. matched with the one on the monitor

 Explanation
The color balance on the printouts is initially programmed to provide the maximum color saturation within the
range of colors reproducible in printing. In general, colors, which can be reproduced, vary, depending on
whether they are reproduced on the printout or on the monitor (or depending on whether they are reproduced in
“ink” or with the “light”). Consequently, the color balance on the printout cannot be perfectly matched with the
one on the monitor. Change the “Image Quality Type” option, in order to closely match the color balance on the
printout with the one on the monitor, at a user’s request.

* This adjustment will be effective in closely matching the color balance on the printout with the one on the
monitor, if the sRGB is selected as a color space. Therefore, remember that it may not be matched with the
color balance on the monitor, which does not support sRGB or if a color space other than sRGB is selected.
On commercially available monitors, sRGB is not selected as a color space by default.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-15
3. Printer-specific Adjustments

 Procedures
* Both the service technician and the user can perform all adjustments.

(1) Select “Photograph” from among the “Image Quality Type” options.
* This adjustment will be effective, only if a file created on a general application, such as Microsoft Office,
is printed in PostScript (PS3, XPS and Macintosh). It may not be effective, if a file created on a graphic
application (e.g. Illustrator) or a DTP application (e.g. QuarkXPress) is printed, or a PDF file created on
these applications is printed using the C, M, Y and K toners. Unmark the “Use PostScript Passthrough”
checkbox in the “PostScript Setting” options in the “Others” tab. The “Image Quality Type” option will be
effective, if printing on Windows (PS3) is performed (but not on Macintosh) or if a file created on the
above applications is printed. However, the color balance may be changed, and also the image quality may
be diminished, depending on the type of file.

For Windows
PCL6 PS3 XPS * This adjustment will have an effect only on Auto or Color mode printing.

Open the property page of the printer driver. Select “Photograph” from among the “Image Quality Type”
options.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-16
 3. Printer-specific Adjustments

For Macintosh
Mac * This adjustment will have an effect only on full-color printing

Open the print dialog box. Select “Photograph” from among the "Color Settings 1" - “Image Type” options.

 Caution after the adjustment

Nothing in particular.

 Remarks
• Setting a color space to sRGB is a prerequisite to maximize the effectiveness of this adjustment. Therefore, if
the monitor does not support sRGB or if color management cannot be performed, the effectiveness of the
adjustment may be significantly lost.

• In general, it is impossible to reproduce color saturation closely matching the true colors, as viewed on the
monitor, because the range of colors reproducible in toner colors is narrower than the one on the monitor.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-17
3. Printer-specific Adjustments

3.5 To Maintain a Uniform Gray Hue

(To maintain Consistency in Gray among Text, Photos and Graphics)

Before adjustment After adjustment

Photo area Photo area

Text area Text area

How gray is reproduced varies depending on All color toners are used to reproduce gray.
the type of original. As a result, there are As a result, consistency is maintained in the
variations in gray. gray hue.

 Explanation
For printing, only the K toner is usually used to reproduce gray areas of drawing data, lines and text. On the
other hand, all color toners (C, M, Y and K) are used to reproduce gray areas of image data, such as BMP, GIF,
JPEG and TIFF. This provides a deeper gray on the printouts. Change the option on the printer driver, in order
to maintain consistency in the gray hue between the drawing data and the image data.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-18
 3. Printer-specific Adjustments

 Procedures
* Both the service technician and the user can perform all adjustments.

(1) Change the “Pure Gray” option on the printer driver.

(“Pure Gray” allows gray areas to always be reproduced using all color toners (C, M, Y and K) without
changing the hue of color areas.)
* This adjustment will be effective, only if a file created on a general application, such as Microsoft Office,
is printed. It may not be effective, if a file created on a graphic application (e.g. Illustrator) or a DTP
application (e.g. QuarkXPress) is printed, or a PDF file created on these applications is printed.

For Windows
PCL6 PS3 XPS * This adjustment will have an effect only on Auto or Color mode printing.

Open the property page of the printer driver. Press [Setting] in the “Image Quality” tab.
Unmark the “Pure Gray” checkbox in the “Basic” tab.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-19
3. Printer-specific Adjustments

For Macintosh
Mac * This adjustment will have an effect only on full-color printing.

Open the print dialog box. Select "Color Settings 1" - “Black – Auto” from among the “Pure Black and
Gray” options.

 Caution after the adjustment

The adjustment allows gray areas always to be reproduced using all color toners (C, M, Y and K). As a result,
undesired colors may look blended, depending on the print image. Therefore, carefully perform the adjustment,
while checking the printouts.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-20
 3. Printer-specific Adjustments

3.6 To Use Only the Black Toner to Reproduce Gray Areas

(To use only the black toner to reproduce black-and-white photos or
gradational images)

Before adjustment After adjustment

Photo area Photo area

Text area Text area

Using all color toners to reproduce black-and- Using only the black toner to reproduce black-
white photo images (bitmap data) blends and-white photo images can diminish undesired
undesired colors in the image. colors.

 Explanation
For printing, only the K toner is usually used to reproduce gray areas of drawing data, lines and text. On the
other hand, all color toners (C, M, Y and K) are used to reproduce gray areas of image data, such as BMP, GIF,
JPEG and TIFF. This provides a deeper gray on the printouts.
The following are examples when image data are reproduced using C, M, Y and K:
• A gray-scale or black-and-white photo is pasted in photo editing software such as Imaging and Paint Shop
Pro, in Internet Explorer, word-processing or spreadsheet software.
• A semi-transparent gray color or gradient of gray is used in the Format AutoShape dialog box on Microsoft
Office.
(The gray area printed out as raster data in the same manner as a photo image is reproduced using C, M and Y
toners, or C, M, Y and K toners.)
Change the option on the printer driver, in order to use only the black toner to reproduce the gray area where C,
M, Y and K are used as described above.

 Procedures
* Perform the adjustment in accordance with the procedure below.
* Both the service technicians and the users can perform step (1).
* Only the service technicians can perform step (2).

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-21
3. Printer-specific Adjustments

(1) Mark the “Pure Gray” checkbox on the printer driver. Select “Text, Graphic & Image” from among the
“Apply to” options. (“Pure Gray” allows gray areas to always be reproduced using only the K toner without
changing the hue of color areas.)
* This adjustment will be effective, only if a file created on a general application, such as Microsoft Office,
is printed. It may not be effective, if a file created on a graphic application (e.g. Illustrator) or a DTP
application (e.g. QuarkXPress) is printed, or a PDF file created on these applications is printed.

For Windows
PCL6 PS3 * This adjustment will have an effect only on Auto or Color mode printing.
Open the property page of the printer driver. Press [Setting] in the “Image Quality” tab.
Mark the “Pure Gray” checkbox in the “Basic” tab. Select “Text, Graphic & Image” from among the
“Apply to” options.

Apply to
Text, Graphic &
Auto Text Text & Graphic
Image
Text Black (K toner) Black (K toner) Black (K toner) Black (K toner)
Graphic Black (K toner) Color (CMYK toner) Black (K toner) Black (K toner)
Image Color (CMYK toner) Color (CMYK toner) Color (CMYK toner) Black (K toner)

* The above table shows the sample combinations of when the Image Quality Type is “General”. When
“Auto” is selected, the areas to be applied are automatically selected according to the Image Quality Type.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-22
 3. Printer-specific Adjustments

For Macintosh
Mac * This adjustment will have an effect only on full-color printing.

Open the print dialog box. Select "Color Settings 1" - “Black & Gray – Text, Graphic & Image” from
among the “Pure Black and Gray” options.

 Caution after the adjustment

The adjustment allows gray areas to always be reproduced using only the K toner. As a result, color photos may
look more grained. Therefore, carefully perform the adjustment, while checking the printouts.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-23
3. Printer-specific Adjustments

(2) Select [05 ADJUSTMENT MODE]. Change the values for codes [8210] to [8212] and [8249] to [8254]
to adjust the judgmental threshold for the “Pure Black and Gray” setting.

Original Recommended Acceptable

PDL [05] code Subcode Default
mode value value range
Text 8252 0/1/2/3/4 The larger the value, 1 to 255 8/8/8/8/8
PS Graphics 8253 0/1/2/3/4 the wider the area to 1 to 255 1/1/1/8/1
Image 8254 0/1/2/3/4 be replaced with that 1 to 255 1/1/1/8/1
Text 8210 0/1/2/3 for printing with only 1 to 255 8/8/8/8
PCL Graphics 8211 0/1/2/3 black toner becomes. 1 to 255 1/1/1/8
The smaller the value,
Image 8212 0/1/2/3 the smaller the area to 1 to 255 1/1/1/8
Text 8249 0/1/2/3/4 be replaced with that 1 to 255 8/8/8/8/8
XPS Graphics 8250 0/1/2/3/4 for printing with only 1 to 255 1/1/1/8/1
Image 8251 0/1/2/3/4 black toner becomes. 1 to 255 1/1/1/8/1

Subcode Image Quality Type

0 General
1 Photograph
2 Presentation
3 Line Art
4 Advanced

* If the default value is “1”, change the “Pure Black and Gray” setting to “Off” on the Color Settings menu
of printer driver since no value smaller than 1 is provided.
When “Text, Graphic & Image” is selected for the “Apply to” setting on the printer driver setting menu,
photo areas whose colors are close to black may be treated as black because the larger the value is, the
wider the area to be printed only with K toner becomes. Therefore adjust the value carefully while
checking the copied image.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-24
 3. Printer-specific Adjustments

3.7 To Easily Adjust the Overall Brightness

Before adjustment

The image is printed with a natural brightness.

(Default printing)

After adjustment After adjustment

A darker print image is obtained. A brighter print image is obtained.

 Explanation
The brightness of the print image can be easily adjusted by changing the “Brightness” setting on the printer
driver.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-25
3. Printer-specific Adjustments

 Procedures
* Both the service technician and the user can perform all adjustments.

(1) Change the “Brightness” option on the printer driver.

• Select the desired value for brightness on a scale of -4 (Darkest) to 4 (Lightest).

For Windows
PCL6 PS3 XPS

Open the property page of the printer driver. Press [Setting] in the “Image Quality” tab.
Change the “Brightness” option in the “Image Attribute” tab.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-26
 3. Printer-specific Adjustments

For Macintosh
Mac * This adjustment will have an effect only on full-color printing.

Open the print dialog box. Change the "Color Settings 2" - “Brightness” option.

 Caution after the adjustment

Nothing in particular.

 Remarks
The brightness adjustment does not affect black text (CMY = 100%, K = 100% or RGB = 0%).

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-27
3. Printer-specific Adjustments

3.8 To Adjust the Overall Saturation

Before adjustment

The image is printed with a natural saturation.

(Default printing)

After adjustment After adjustment

The saturation is decreased. The saturation is increased.

 Explanation
The saturation of the print image can be easily adjusted by changing the “Saturation” option on the printer driver.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-28
 3. Printer-specific Adjustments

 Procedures
* Both the service technician and the user can use procedure (1).
* Only if the saturation of R (Red) is still insufficient even after procedure (1) has been used, must the service
technician use procedure (2).

(1) Change the “Saturation” option on the printer driver.

For Windows
PCL6 PS3 XPS

Open the property page of the printer driver. Press [Setting] in the “Image Quality” tab.
Change the “Saturation” option in the “Image Attribute” tab.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-29
3. Printer-specific Adjustments

For Macintosh
Mac

Open the print dialog box. Change the "Color Settings 2" - “Saturation” option.

After changing the option on the printer driver, print and check the print image quality.
Only if the saturation of R (Red) is still insufficient even after all the above procedures have been used, must
the service technician use the next procedure.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-30
 3. Printer-specific Adjustments

(2) Select [05 ADJUSTMENT MODE]. Change the value for code [2905] to adjust the transfer (1st transfer)
roller bias output.
(Adjust the offset voltage of the transfer roller bias for C (Cyan) and K (Black) so as to increase the
density of R (Red).)

• The code to use varies depending on the paper type and color to adjust. Adjust the value for the subcode
corresponding to the color for which you would like to improve the image quality. Set the value within a
range of “2” to “5” to obtain the highest density of R (Red).

Color to Recommended Acceptable

Paper type [05] code Subcode Default
adjust value value range
C (Cyan) 2
Plain paper
K (Black) 3
05-2905 2 to 5 0 to 10 5
C (Cyan) 8
Thick
K (Black) 9
* Never change the values for subcodes other than the above. Otherwise, it may cause a loss in MFP
performance, including degradation in the image quality.
* Plain paper: Plain paper, recycled paper, and thin paper
* Thick: Thick 1/2/3/4, special 1/2/3, envelope, and OHP

<Note> • The adjustment may possibly decrease the density of G (Green), B (Blue) and K (Black)
extremely. Therefore, carefully perform the adjustment, while checking the printout.

• Unless this adjustment changes the density of R (Red), return the values to the default (set
value: 5).

• This adjustment may affect not only the printouts but also every type of image quality such as
the copy image. Therefore, perform the adjustment, being aware that the image quality of all
future printouts will be changed, when printing out originals other than the one that is used for
the adjustment.

 Caution after the adjustment

Nothing in particular.

 Remarks
The saturation adjustment does not affect black or gray areas on the printout.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-31
3. Printer-specific Adjustments

3.9 To Easily Adjust the Overall Contrast

Before adjustment

The image is printed with a natural contrast.

(Default printing)

After adjustment After adjustment

The contrast is decreased. The contrast is increased.

 Explanation
The contrast of the print image can be easily adjusted by changing the “Contrast” option on the printer driver.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-32
 3. Printer-specific Adjustments

 Procedures
* Both the service technician and the user can perform all adjustments.

(1) Change the “Contrast” option on the printer driver.

• Select the desired value for contrast on a scale of -4 (Lowest) to 4 (Highest).

For Windows
PCL6 PS3 XPS .

Open the property page of the printer driver. Press [Setting] in the “Image Quality” tab.
Change the “Contrast” option in the “Image Attribute” tab.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-33
3. Printer-specific Adjustments

For Macintosh
Mac * This adjustment will have an effect only on full-color printing.

Open the print dialog box. Change the "Color Settings 2" - “Contrast” option.

 Caution after the adjustment

Nothing in particular.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-34
 3. Printer-specific Adjustments

3.10 To Obtain a Sharper Print Image

Print data

Before adjustment After adjustment

Unadjusted settings. The edge of the print image is so enhanced

that it looks sharper.

 Explanation
Increase the sharpness intensity under the menu on the printer driver, in order to obtain a sharper print image.
* The sharpness adjustment will have an effect on photo images, such as BMP, GIF, JPEG and TIFF.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-35
3. Printer-specific Adjustments

 Procedures
* Perform the adjustment in accordance with the procedure below.
* Both the service technicians and the users can perform step (1).
* Only the service technicians can perform step (2).

(1) Change the “Sharpness” option on the printer driver.

For Windows
PCL6 PS3 XPS

Open the property page of the printer driver. Press [Setting] in the “Image Quality” tab.
Set the value for “Sharpness” within a range of “1” to “4” in the “Image Attribute” tab.
• Setting “4” provides the sharpest print image.

* Sharpness adjustment is not available when 1200 dpi is selected for PS3 printer driver.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-36
 3. Printer-specific Adjustments

For Macintosh
Mac

Open the print dialog box. Set the value for "Color Settings 2" - “Sharpness” within a range of “1” to “4.”
• Setting “4” provides the sharpest print image.

After changing the options on the printer driver, print and check the print image quality.
If further image quality adjustments are still necessary, use the next procedure.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-37
3. Printer-specific Adjustments

(2) Select [05 ADJUSTMENT MODE]. Increase the setting values for codes [8108] to [8113] and [8118] to
adjust the sharpness to be increased.

・Adjust the [05] code for the settings (color mode and original type) to be used for printing.
Acceptable
Color Recommended
Image quality type [05] code Subcode value Default
mode value
range
General 05-8110 0/1/2
Photo 05-8111 0/1/2
Auto/Color
Presentation 05-8112 0/1/2
Set a value larger
Line art 05-8113 0/1/2 0 to 255 128
than 128.
Mono color － 05-8118 0/1/2
Twin color － 05-8108 0/1/2
Auto/Color Red seal color 05-8109 0/1/2

Subcode Original
0 Text
1 Graphic
2 Image

<Note> • When the setting value of this code is larger than "128" (default), the level of the sharpness
intensity is equivalent to the one when the value is set within a range of "0" to "+4" on the printer
driver menu. When the setting value of this code is smaller than "128", the level of the sharpness
intensity is equivalent to the one when the value is set within a range of "-4" to "-1" on the
printer driver menu. Note that when the setting value of this code is "0", the image quality will
not be changed even if the value is changed on the printer driver menu.

 Caution after the adjustment

The adjustment may possibly cause rough edges of the image contained in low-resolution bitmap data. As a
result, outlined edges may look shaded, black bands may appear, and toner may be scattered around the lines.
Therefore, carefully perform the adjustment, while checking the printouts.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-38
 3. Printer-specific Adjustments

3.11 To Obtain a Softer Image

Before adjustment After adjustment

Unadjusted settings. A softer image is obtained.

 Explanation
Decrease the sharpness intensity under the menu on the printer driver, in order to obtain a softer print image.
* The sharpness adjustment will have an effect on photo images, such as BMP, GIF, JPEG and TIFF.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-39
3. Printer-specific Adjustments

 Procedures
* Both the service technicians and the users can perform step (1).
* Only the service technicians can perform step (2).

(1) Change the setting of the sharpness in the printer driver.

For Windows
PCL6 PS3 XPS

Open the property page of the printer driver. Press [Setting] in the “Image Quality” tab.
Uncheck the “Use Sharpness Filter” checkbox in the “Image Attribute” tab. To make a softer image, check
its checkbox and then set the value within a range of “-1” to “-4.”
• Setting “-4” provides the smoothest (softest) image.

The value “OFF” of sharpness intensity adjustment is positioned as shown below.

* Sharpness adjustment is not available when 1200 dpi is selected for PS3 printer driver.
e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
3-40
 3. Printer-specific Adjustments

For Macintosh
Mac

Open the print dialog box. Set the value for "Color Settings 2" - “Sharpness” within a range of “-1” to “-4.”
• Setting “-4” provides the smoothest (softest) print image.

After changing the options on the printer driver, print and check the print image quality.
If further image quality adjustments are still necessary, use the next procedure.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-41
3. Printer-specific Adjustments

(2) Select [05 ADJUSTMENT MODE]. Decrease the setting values for codes [8108] to [8113] and [8118] to
adjust the sharpness to be decreased.

• Adjust the [05] code for the settings (color mode and original type) to be used for printing.
Acceptable
Color Original [05] Recommended
Subcode value Default
mode mode code value
range
General 05-8110 0/1/2
Photo 05-8111 0/1/2
Auto/Color
Presentation 05-8112 0/1/2
Line art 05-8113 0/1/2 Set a value
0 to 255 128
Mono smaller than 128.
- 05-8118 0/1/2
color
Twin color - 05-8108 0/1/2
Auto/Color Red seal color 05-8109 0/1/2

Subcode Original
0 Text
1 Graphics
2 Image

<Note> •When the setting value of this code is larger than "128" (default), the level of the sharpness
intensity is equivalent to the one when the value is set within a range of "0" to "+4" on the printer
driver menu. When the setting value of this code is smaller than "128", the level of the sharpness
intensity is equivalent to the one when the value is set within a range of "-4" to "0" on the printer
driver menu. Note that when the setting value of this code is "0", the image quality will not be
changed even if the value is changed on the printer driver menu.

 Caution after the adjustment

The adjustment provides a soft or blurred image in general. Therefore, carefully perform the adjustment, while
checking the printouts. Especially text and lines on the background of a gradational image, and text in the
Format AutoShape dialog box with transparency selected on Microsoft Office may be blurred.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-42
 3. Printer-specific Adjustments

3.12 To Make Low-resolution Data Look Finer (To soften an image)

Print data

Before adjustment After adjustment

Unadjusted settings. A smoother (softer) image is obtained.

 Explanation
When a low-resolution image is printed, the edges may be jagged. Decrease the sharpness intensity, in order to
eliminate the jaggies from the print image.
* The sharpness adjustment will have an effect particularly on photo images, such as BMP, GIF, JPEG and TIFF.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-43
3. Printer-specific Adjustments

 Procedures
* Both the service technicians and the users can perform step (1).
* Only the service technicians can perform step (2).

(1) Change the setting of the sharpness in the printer driver.

For Windows
PCL6 PS3 XPS

Open the property page of the printer driver. Press [Setting] in the “Image Quality” tab.
Uncheck the “Use Sharpness Filter” checkbox in the “Image Attribute” tab. To make a smoother image,
check its checkbox and then set the value within a range of “-1” to “-4.”
• Setting “-4” provides the smoothest (softest) print image.

The value “OFF” of sharpness intensity adjustment is positioned as shown below.

* Sharpness adjustment is not available when 1200 dpi is selected for PS3 printer driver.
e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
3-44
 3. Printer-specific Adjustments

For Macintosh
Mac

Open the print dialog box. Set the value for "Color Settings 2" - “Sharpness” within a range of “-1” to “-4.”
• Setting “-4” provides the smoothest (softest) print image.

After changing the options on the printer driver, print and check the print image quality.
If further image quality adjustments are still necessary, use the next procedure.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-45
3. Printer-specific Adjustments

(2) Select [05 ADJUSTMENT MODE]. Decrease the setting values for codes [8108] to [8113] and [8118] to
adjust the sharpness to be decreased.

• Adjust the [05] code for the settings (color mode and original type) to be used for printing.

Acceptable
Color Original [05] Recommended
Subcode value Default
mode mode code value
range
General 05-8110 0/1/2
Photo 05-8111 0/1/2
Auto/Color
Presentation 05-8112 0/1/2
Line art 05-8113 0/1/2 Set a value
0 to 255 128
Mono smaller than 128.
- 05-8118 0/1/2
color
Twin color - 05-8108 0/1/2
Auto/Color Red seal color 05-8109 0/1/2

Subcode Original
0 Text
1 Graphics
2 Image

<Note> •When the setting value of this code is larger than "128" (default), the level of the sharpness
intensity is equivalent to the one when the value is set within a range of "0" to "+4" on the printer
driver menu. When the setting value of this code is smaller than "128", the level of the sharpness
intensity is equivalent to the one when the value is set within a range of "-4" to "0" on the printer
driver menu. Note that when the setting value of this code is "0", the image quality will not be
changed even if the value is changed on the printer driver menu.

 Caution after the adjustment

The adjustment provides a soft or blurred image in general. Therefore, carefully perform the adjustment, while
checking the printouts. Especially text and lines on the background of a gradational image, and text in the
Format AutoShape dialog box with transparency selected on Microsoft Office may be blurred.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-46
 3. Printer-specific Adjustments

3.13 To Eliminate Smudges from Highly Colored Text and Lines

(To prevent toner scattering around text and lines where a large amount of
toner is used)

Before adjustment After adjustment

Black text looks smudged due to toner Smudges are eliminated.

scattering around the text.

 Explanation
When highly colored text and lines where a large amount of toner is used, created on raster data (image), such as
BMP, GIF, JPEG and TIFF are printed, the text and lines look smudged due to toner scattering around the text
and lines. Adjust the sharpness intensity or the amount of toner used, in order to obtain a clearer print image.

<Hint> If smudged text and lines appear on the print image in PDF format on Adobe Reader, unmark the
“Print as image” checkbox to print out the image. If the “Print as image” checkbox is marked, text
and lines will be printed as raster data (bitmap image) and may be smudged.

 Procedures
* Perform the adjustment in accordance with the procedures below.
* Both the service technicians and the users can perform step (1).
* Only the service technicians can perform steps (2) and (3).

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-47
3. Printer-specific Adjustments

(1) Change the “Use Sharpness Filter” option on the printer driver.

For Windows
PCL6 PS3 XPS * This adjustment will have an effect only on Auto or Color mode printing.

Open the property page of the printer driver. Press [Setting] in the “Image Quality” tab.
Uncheck the “Use Sharpness Filter” checkbox in the “Image Attribute” tab.
* Always set “Uncheck”. Setting “-2” or a smaller value may provide blurred print images.

* Sharpness adjustment is not available when 1200 dpi is selected for PS3 printer driver.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-48
 3. Printer-specific Adjustments

For Macintosh
Mac
Open the print dialog box and change the "Color Settings 2" - "filter" setting.

After changing the options on the printer driver, print and check the print image quality

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-49
3. Printer-specific Adjustments

PCL6 PS3 XPS Mac

(2) Select [05 ADJUSTMENT MODE]. Set 0 for the setting values for codes [8109] to [8113] to adjust the filter.
Image Acceptable
Color Recommended
quality [05] code Subcode value Default
mode value
type range
General 05-8110 0/1/2
Photo 05-8111 0/1/2
Presentation 05-8112 0/1/2 Change the value
Auto/Color Line art 05-8113 0/1/2 0 to 255 128
to 0.
Red seal
05-8109 0/1/2
color

Subcode Original
0 Text
1 Graphics
2 Image

<Note> •When the setting value of this code is larger than “128” (default), the level of the sharpness
intensity is equivalent to the one when the value is set within a range of “0” to “+4” on the
printer driver menu. When the setting value of this code is smaller than “128”, the level of the
sharpness intensity is equivalent to the one when the value is set within a range of “-4” to “-1”
on the printer driver menu. Note that when the setting value of this code is “0”, the image
quality will not be changed even if the value is changed on the printer driver menu.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-50
 3. Printer-specific Adjustments

PCL6 PS3 XPS Mac

(3) Select [05 ADJUSTMENT MODE] and adjust the toner limit by setting a value smaller than the default for
[8070/8071/8090/8089].
Subcode
Recom Acceptable
[05] e-STUDIO
Resolution Halftone e-STUDIO mended value Default
code 2505/3505/
20000AC value range
4505/5005
0 to Set a
Smooth 05-8071 0 to 12
4/7/8/11/12 value
600dpi smaller 0 to 255 128
0 to
Detail 05-8070 0 to 12 than the
4/7/8/11/12
default.
0 to Set a
Smooth 05-8090 0 to 12
4/7/8/11/12 value
1200dpi smaller 0 to 255 128
0 to than the
Detail 05-8089 0 to 12
4/7/8/11/12 default.
* Set the value in increments of approximately 30, while checking the printouts until the optimum value is
obtained.

Subcode Original
0 Plain paper 1
1 Thick
2 Recycled paper
3 Thick 1
4 Thick 2
5 Thick 3*
6 Thick 4*
7 Special 1
8 Special 2
9 Special 3*
10 Thin*
11 Envelope
12 OHP
* e-STUDIO2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC only

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-51
3. Printer-specific Adjustments

(4) Select [08 SETTING MODE]. Adjust the subcodes “0” to “7” of code [2620] or those of code [2622].
This adjustment is applied in common to all printer drivers.
Acceptable
Color to Paper Recommended
Resolution [08] code Subcode value Default
adjust type value
range
Y 0
M Plain 1
600dpi 08-2620
C paper 2
K 3
Y 4
M 5
Thick 600dpi 08-2620
C 6 Set a value
K 7 smaller than 15
8-36 15
Y 0 to decrease toner
M 1 scattering.
Plain
1200dpi 08-2622
C paper 2
K 3
Y 4
M 5
Thick 1200dpi 08-2622
C 6
K 7
* Plain paper: Plain paper, recycled paper, and thin paper
* Thick: Thick 1/2/3/4, special 1/2/3, envelope, and OHP

 Caution after the adjustment

• The adjustment in procedure (1) may possibly provide insufficient photo contrast images. Therefore, carefully
perform the adjustment, while checking the printouts.

• The adjustment may possibly cause an increase in the amount of toner used, moiré, blurred text (blurring of
small and dark text), faint text (fine outlines of text shredded), diminished photo images or gradational images
(less accurate reproducibility of halftones), or in some consumption conditions, background fogging or a
decrease in the amount of developer material (carrier streaks). Therefore, carefully perform the adjustment,
while checking the printouts.

• In step (4) the adjustment value for K (Black) and the resolution 600 dpi is the same as those for the Photo
mode in the Copier function and the Gray scale mode. Therefore, carefully perform the adjustment, while
checking the printouts.

• In step (4) the adjustment value for the resolution 600 dpi is the same as that for the Full Color Mode in the
Copier function. Therefore, carefully perform the adjustment, while checking the printouts.

• The adjustment may possibly cause dark areas such as making shades on photo images look unnaturally faint.
Therefore, carefully perform the adjustment, while checking the printouts.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-52
 3. Printer-specific Adjustments

 Remarks
• Enter the value mentioned in the procedures or one within the recommended value range for the adjustment.
Otherwise, it may cause a loss in MFP performance, including degradation in the image quality and a reduction
in the life of the consumables.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-53
3. Printer-specific Adjustments

3.14 To Clearly Print Light-Colored Thin Lines or Text

Before adjustment After adjustment

Light-colored thin lines and text are dotted on The light-colored thin lines and text are clearly
the printout. printed out.

 Explanation
When light-colored thin lines and text are printed, they may be dotted on the printout. Change the options on the
printer driver, adjust the color balance or gamma curve balance, in order to print them out clearly.

 Procedures
* The procedure to use varies, depending on whether to adjust the print image quality in the Color mode or in the
Black and White mode. Refer to the procedure corresponding to the user’s particular request.

* The item to set varies depending on the type of data to adjust. Select the effective option according to the data
format to adjust, such as a print image (raster data), text (font), and line drawing (graphic data).

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-54
 3. Printer-specific Adjustments

3.14.1 To Adjust the Print Image Quality in the Color Mode

* Perform the adjustment in accordance with the procedures below.

* Both the service technician and the user can use procedures (1), (2), and (4).
* Only the service technician must use procedures (3), (5) and (6).

(1) Change the "Image Quality Type" and "Halftone" options.

For Windows
PCL6 PS3 XPS * This adjustment will have an effect only on Auto or Color mode printing.
Open the property page of the printer driver. Change the "Image Quality Type" and "Halftone" options in
the Image Quality tab.
• Set either of the following options, in accordance with the type of original to print:
• Image Quality Type: "Presentation" (To make color darker)
Halftone: "Detail" (To make the halftone screen high frequency)

• Image Quality Type: "Line Art" (To make the color darker and enhance thin lines)
Halftone: "Auto" or "Detail" (To make the halftone screen high frequency)

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-55
3. Printer-specific Adjustments

For Macintosh
Mac * This adjustment will have an effect only on full-color printing.

Open the print dialog box. Change the "Color Settings 1" - "Image Type" and "Halftone" options.

• Set either of the following options, in accordance with the type of original to print:
• Image Type: "Presentation" (To make color darker)
Halftone: "Detail" (To make the halftone screen high frequency)

• Image Type: "Line Art" (To make the color darker and enhance thin lines)
Halftone: "Auto" or "Detail" (To make the halftone screen high frequency)

After changing the options on the printer driver, print and check the print image quality.
If further image quality adjustments are still necessary, use the next procedure.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-56
 3. Printer-specific Adjustments

(2) Change the "Sharpness" option on the printer driver.

For Windows
PCL6 PS3 XPS * This adjustment will have an effect only on Auto or Color mode printing.

Open the property page of the printer driver. Press [Setting] in the "Image Quality" tab.
Set the value for "Use Sharpness Filter" within a range of "1" to "4" in the "Image Attribute" tab.
• Setting "4" provides the sharpest print image.
* Initially, set "4" and check the printout. If further image quality adjustments are still necessary, refer to (5)
to do this.

* Sharpness adjustment is not available when 1200 dpi is selected for PS3 printer driver.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-57
3. Printer-specific Adjustments

For Macintosh
Mac * This adjustment will have an effect only on full-color printing.

Open the print dialog box. Set the value for "Color Settings 2" - "Sharpness" within a range of "1" to "4."
• Setting "+4" provides the sharpest print image.

* Initially, set "4" and check the printout. If further image quality adjustments are still necessary, refer to (5)
to do this.

<Hint> In addition to the sharpness adjustment, decreasing "Brightness" (moving to [-] side), changing
"Contrast" or increasing "Saturation" (moving to [+] side) may improve the image quality.

After changing the option on the printer driver, print and check the print image quality.
If further image quality adjustments are still necessary, use the next procedure.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-58
 3. Printer-specific Adjustments

PCL6 PS3 XPS Mac * This adjustment will have an effect only on Auto or Color mode printing.

(3) Select [05 ADJUSTMENT MODE]. Increase the values for codes [8109 to 8113] to perform fine adjustment
and increase the sharpness intensity.
• Adjust the value for [05] code corresponding to the print option to be applied (Color mode and Image
quality type).

Acceptabl
Color Image Recommend
[05] code Subcode e value Default
mode quality type ed value
range
General 05-8110 0/1/2
Photograph 05-8111 0/1/2
Auto / Set a value
Presentation 05-8112 0/1/2 0 to 255 128
Color larger than 128.
Line Art 05-8113 0/1/2
Red seal color 05-8109 0/1/2

Subcode Apply to
0 Text
1 Graphic
2 Image
* Set the value in increments of approximately 5, while checking the printouts until the optimum value is
obtained.

<Note> • This adjustment changes the values set in the MFP. Therefore, it will affect every user who
uses the printer by connecting it to the MFP. After the adjustment, the values changed will be
applied to all printouts for the "Sharpness" option. Carefully perform the adjustment, being
aware that the image quality of all future printouts will be changed, when printing out originals
other than the one that is used for the adjustment.
• When the setting value of this code is larger than "128" (default), the level of the sharpness
intensity is equivalent to the one when the value is set within a range of "0" to "+4" on the
printer driver menu. When the setting value of this code is smaller than "128", the level of the
sharpness intensity is equivalent to the one when the value is set within a range of "-4" to "0"
on the printer driver menu. Note that when the setting value of this code is "0", the image
quality will not be changed even if the value is changed on the printer driver menu.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-59
3. Printer-specific Adjustments

PCL6 PS3 XPS * This adjustment will have an effect only on Auto or Color mode printing.

(4) Open the property page of the printer driver. Press [Setting] in the "Image Quality" tab.
Mark the "Detail" checkbox in the "Color Balance" tab. Press [Edit].
Set the value for the Low/Middle density of the color you would like to adjust, within a range of "1" to "4"
in the "Color Balance Details" option.
* This adjustment will have an effect only on printing on the Windows PCL6, XPS or PS3 emulation printer
driver.
(This adjustment cannot be performed on a Macintosh printer driver.)

* Initially, set "4" and check the printout.

After changing the option on the printer driver, print and check the print image quality.
If further image quality adjustments are still necessary, use the next procedure.

PCL6 PS3 XPS Mac * This adjustment will have an effect only on Auto or Color mode printing.

(5) Select [05 ADJUSTMENT MODE]. Adjust the color balance.

• Use the procedures below to adjust the color balance.

Select [05 ADJUSTMENT MODE]. Change the values for codes [8054 to 8057], [8062 to 8065],
[8046 to 8049] or [8272 to 8275] to adjust the color balance and increase the color density.
• Adjust the value for [05] code corresponding to the print option to be applied (PDL and Halftone).

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-60
 3. Printer-specific Adjustments

Ex.: • When printing on Windows is performed with the following options selected: PCL6, Image
Quality Type = Presentation, Halftone =Detail
> Change the values for Y: 05-8062, M: 05-8063, C: 05-8064 and K: 05-8065.

• When printing on Macintosh is with the following option selected: Image Type = Line Art,
Halftone = Auto
> Change the values for Y: 05-8054, M: 05-8055, C: 05-8056 and K: 05-8057.
* Printing on Macintosh is performed in PostScript. (See the "PS3" row in the table below.)

Color Acceptab
[05] Recommended
to PDL Halftpne Subcode le value Default
code value
adjust range
PCL6 Detail 05-8062 0/1/2
Y PS3 (600dpi) Detail 05-8054 0/1/2
(Yellow) PS3 (1200dpi) Detail 05-8272 0/1/2
XPS Detail 05-8046 0/1/2
PCL6 Detail 05-8063 0/1/2
M PS3 (600dpi) Detail 05-8055 0/1/2
(Magenta) PS3 (1200dpi) Detail 05-8273 0/1/2
XPS Detail 05-8047 0/1/2 Set a value larger
0 to 255 128
PCL6 Detail 05-8064 0/1/2 than 128.
C PS3 (600dpi) Detail 05-8056 0/1/2
(Cyan) PS3 (1200dpi) Detail 05-8274 0/1/2
XPS Detail 05-8048 0/1/2
PCL6 Detail 05-8065 0/1/2
K PS3 (600dpi) Detail 05-8057 0/1/2
(Black) PS3 (1200dpi) Detail 05-8275 0/1/2
XPS Detail 05-8049 0/1/2
* Set the value in increments of approximately 20, while checking the printouts until the optimum
value is obtained.

* The value for [05] code for K (black) will affect black-and-white images (including text, lines and
photos) on the printout.

* The subcode varies according to the area where the density is adjusted. Refer to the table below
and set the subcode for the area to be adjusted.

* Whether to fix or change the maximum density in a high-density area can be selected by the setting
of 05-8066.
Area where the density is
Subcode
adjusted
0 Low-density area
1 Medium-density area
2 High-density area

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-61
3. Printer-specific Adjustments

<Note> This adjustment changes the values set in the MFP. Therefore, it will affect every user who uses
the printer by connecting it to the MFP. After the adjustment, the values changed will be applied
to all printouts for the "Image Quality Type" and "Halftone" options. (For instance, if the value
for [05] code for PCL6 and Detail is changed, it will be applied to printing performed with
PCL6 and Halftone = "Detail" (or "Auto") selected.)
Carefully perform the adjustment, being aware that the image quality of all future printouts will
be changed, when printing out originals other than the one that is used for the adjustment.
If "Smooth" is selected from among the "Halftone" options, this adjustment will have no affect.

After adjusting the color balance, print and check the print image quality.
If further image quality adjustments are still necessary, use the next procedure.

(6) Select [08 SETTING MODE]. Adjust the subcodes “0” to “7” of code [2620] or those of code [2622]. This
adjustment is applied in common to all printer drivers.

Color to Paper Recommended Acceptable

Resolution [08]code Subcode Default
adjust type value value range
Y 0
M Plain 1
600dpi 08-2620
C paper 2
K 3
Y 4
M 5
Thick 600dpi 08-2620
C 6 Set a value larger
K 7 than 15 to make
8 to 36 15
Y 0 the outline of the
M Plain 1 text clearer.
1200dpi 08-2622
C paper 2
K 3
Y 4
M 5
Thick 1200dpi 08-2622
C 6
K 7
* Plain paper: Plain paper, recycled paper, and thin paper
* Thick: Thick 1/2/3/4, special 1/2/3, envelope, and OHP

 Caution after the adjustment

・The adjustment may possibly cause outlined edges, incorrect color of thin lines, jaggies, variations in
gradation and unnatural photo images. Therefore, carefully perform the adjustment, while checking the
printouts.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-62
 3. Printer-specific Adjustments

・The adjustment may possibly cause an increase in the amount of toner used, moiré, blurred text (blurring of
small, dark text), faint text (fine outlines of text shredded), diminished photo images or gradational images
(less accurate reproducibility of halftones), or in some consumption conditions, background fogging or a
decrease in the amount of developer material (carrier streaks). Therefore, carefully perform the adjustment,
while checking the printouts.

• In step (6) the adjustment value for K (Black) and the resolution 600 dpi is the same as those for the Photo
mode in the Copier function and the Gray scale mode. Therefore, carefully perform the adjustment, while
checking the printouts.

・In step (6) the adjustment value for the resolution 600 dpi is the same as that for the Full Color mode in the
Copier function. Therefore, carefully perform the adjustment while checking the printed image.

 Remarks
• Enter the value mentioned in the procedures or one within the recommended value range for the adjustment.
Otherwise, it may cause a loss in MFP performance, including degradation in the image quality and a
reduction in the life of the consumables.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-63
3. Printer-specific Adjustments

3.14.2 To Adjust the Print Image Quality in the Black and White Mode
* Perform the adjustment in accordance with the procedures below.
* Both the service technician and the user can use procedure (1), (2) and (4).
* Only the service technician must use procedures (3) and (5).

(1) Change the "Halftone" option on the printer driver.

For Windows
PCL6 PS3 XPS * This adjustment will have an effect only on Black and white mode printing.

Open the property page of the printer driver. Press [Setting] in the "Image Quality" tab.
Select "Detail" from among the "Halftone" options in the "Basic" tab.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-64
 3. Printer-specific Adjustments

For Macintosh
Mac * This adjustment will have an effect only on Black and white mode printing.

Open the print dialog box. Select "Color Settings 1" - "Detail" from among the "Halftone" options.

After changing the option on the printer driver, print and check the print image quality.
If further image quality adjustments are still necessary, use the next procedure.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-65
3. Printer-specific Adjustments

(2) Change the "Sharpness" option on the printer driver.

For Windows
PCL6 PS3 XPS * This adjustment will have an effect only on Black and white mode printing.

Open the property page of the printer driver. Press [Setting] in the "Image Quality" tab.
Set the value for "Use Sharpness Filter" within a range of "1" to "4" in the "Image Attribute" tab.
• Setting "4" provides the sharpest print image.
* Initially, set "4" and check the printout. If further image quality adjustments are still necessary, refer to (4)
to do this.

* Sharpness adjustment is not available when 1200 dpi is selected for PS3 printer driver.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-66
 3. Printer-specific Adjustments

For Macintosh
Mac * This adjustment will have an effect only on Black and white mode printing.

Open the print dialog box. Set the value for "Color Settings 2" - "Sharpness" within a range of "1" to "4."
• Setting "+4" provides the sharpest print image.

* Initially, set "4" and check the printout. If further image quality adjustments are still necessary, refer to (4)
to do this.

<Hint> In addition to the sharpness adjustment, decreasing "Brightness" (moving to [-] side), changing
"Contrast" or increasing "Saturation" (moving to [+] side) may improve the image quality.

After changing the option on the printer driver, print and check the print image quality.
If further image quality adjustments are still necessary, use the next procedure.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-67
3. Printer-specific Adjustments

PCL6 PS3 XPS Mac * This adjustment will have an effect only on Black and white mode printing.

(3) Select [05 ADJUSTMENT MODE]. Increase the value for code [8118] to perform fine adjustment and
increase the sharpness intensity.
• Adjust the value for [05] code corresponding to the print option to be applied (PDL and Color mode).

Recommended Acceptable
Color mode [05] code Sub code Default
value value range
Black and Set a value lager than
05-8118 0/1/2 0 to 255 128
White 128

Subcode Original
0 Text
1 Graphic
2 Image
* Set the value in increments of approximately 5, while checking the printouts until the optimum value is
obtained.

<Note> This adjustment changes the values set in the MFP. Therefore, it will affect every user who uses
the printer by connecting it to the MFP. After the adjustment, the values changed will be applied
to all printouts for the "Sharpness" option. Carefully perform the adjustment, being aware that
the image quality of all future printouts will be changed, when printing out originals other than
the one that is used for the adjustment.

PCL6 PS3 XPS * This adjustment will have an effect only on Auto or Color mode printing.

(4) Open the property page of the printer driver. Press [Setting] in the "Image Quality" tab.
Mark the "Detail" checkbox in the "Color Balance" tab. Press [Edit].
Set the value for the Low/Middle density of the color you would like to adjust, within a range of "1" to "4"
in the "Color Balance Details" option.
* This adjustment will have an effect only on printing on the Windows PCL6, XPS or PS3 emulation printer
driver.
(This adjustment cannot be performed on a Macintosh printer driver.)

* Initially, set "4" and check the printout.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-68
 3. Printer-specific Adjustments

After changing the option on the printer driver, print and check the print image quality.
If further image quality adjustments are still necessary, use the next procedure.

PCL6 PS3 XPS Mac * This adjustment will have an effect only on Black and white mode printing.

(5) Select [05 ADJUSTMENT MODE]. Increase the values for codes [7315 to 7320] or [7309 to 7310] to adjust
the gamma curve balance and increase the density on Black and White mode printing.
• Adjust the value for [05] code corresponding to the print option to be applied (PDL and Halftone).
* Printing on Macintosh is performed in PostScript. (See the "PS3" row in the table below.)

Recommende Acceptable
PDL Halftone [05] code Subcode Default
d value value range
Smooth 05-7315 0/1/2
Detail 05-7316 0/1/2
PS3
Auto (Text) 05-7360 0/1/2
(600dpi)
Auto (Graphic) 05-7361 0/1/2
Auto (Image) 05-7362 0/1/2
PS3 Smooth 05-7309 0/1/2
(1200dpi) Detail 05-7310 0/1/2
Smooth 05-7317 0/1/2
Set a value larger
Detail 05-7318 0/1/2 0 to 255 128
than 128
PCL6 Auto (Text) 05-7363 0/1/2
Auto (Graphic) 05-7364 0/1/2
Auto (Image) 05-7365 0/1/2
Smooth 05-7319 0/1/2
Detail 05-7320 0/1/2
XPS Auto (Text) 05-7366 0/1/2
Auto (Graphic) 05-7367 0/1/2
Auto (Image) 05-7368 0/1/2
* Set the value in increments of approximately 10, while checking the printouts until the optimum value is
obtained.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-69
3. Printer-specific Adjustments

* When the halftone is set to "Auto", the gamma balance can be adjusted for every print data format (Text,
Graphic and Image).

* The subcode varies according to the area where the density is adjusted. Refer to the table below and set the
subcode for the area to be adjusted.
* Whether to fix or change the maximum density in a high-density area can be selected by the setting of 05-
8066.
Subcode Area where the density is adjusted
0 Low-density area
1 Medium-density area
2 High-density area

<Note> • This adjustment changes the values set in the MFP. Therefore, it will affect every user who
uses the printer by connecting it to the MFP. After the adjustment, the values changed will be
applied to all printouts for the "Halftone" option. (For instance, if the value for [05] code for PCL
and Detail is changed, it will be applied to printing performed with PCL6 and Halftone = "Detail"
(or "Auto") selected.) Carefully perform the adjustment, being aware that the image quality of all
future printouts will be changed, when printing out originals other than the one that is used for the
adjustment.

• When "Mono" is selected from among the "Color" options and "Auto" (default) is selected from
among the "Halftone" options, "Detail" of the "Halftone" options is applied to text, and "Smooth" is
applied to raster data (images) and graphics(illustrations). Therefore, particular attention is required
since the adjustment may have a different impact according to the patterns of the image to be
printed.

After increasing the density, print and check the print image quality.
If further image quality adjustments are still necessary, use the next procedure.

 Caution after the adjustment

The adjustment may possibly cause outlined edges, jaggies and variations in gradation. As a result the photo
image may look unnatural. Therefore, carefully perform the adjustment, while checking the printouts.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-70
 3. Printer-specific Adjustments

3.15 To Make the Light-Colored Area Darker on the Printout

Before adjustment After adjustment

Print Print

The light-colored area becomes darker but the Only the light-colored area becomes darker.
highly colored area becomes blurred.

 Explanation
When the entire image is printed darker to make the light-colored area darker, the highly colored area may
become much darker and blurred. To print only the light area in a higher density and leave the dark area as it is,
change the setting for the printer driver and adjust the background and color balance.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-71
3. Printer-specific Adjustments

 Procedures
* Perform the adjustment in accordance with the procedures below.
* Both the service technician and the user can use procedure (1) and (3).
* Only the service technician must use procedures (2), (4) and (5).
* The item to set varies depending on the type of data to adjust. Select an effective option according to the data
format to adjust, such as a print image (raster data), text (font), and line drawing (graphic data).

For Windows
PCL6 PS3 XPS * This adjustment will have an effect only on Auto or Color mode printing.

(1) Open the property page of the printer driver and press [Setting] in the "Image Quality" tab. Set the
"Background adjustment" option in the "Image Attribute" tab within the range of "1" to "4".

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-72
 3. Printer-specific Adjustments

(2) Select [05 ADJUSTMENT MODE]. Increase the values for codes [8010] to [8019] to make the background
density darker.
Recommende Acceptable
Resolution Halftone Color mode [05]code Default
d value value range
Color 05-8010
Smooth Twin color 05-8011
Mono color 05-8012
600dpi
Color 05-8013
Detail Twin color 05-8014 Set a value larger
0 to 255 128
Mono color 05-8015 than 128.
Color 05-8016
Smooth
Mono color 05-8018
1200dpi
Color 05-8017
Detail
Mono color 05-8019

PCL6 PS3 XPS * This adjustment will have an effect only on Auto or Color mode printing.

(3) Open the property page of the printer driver. Press [Setting] in the "Image Quality" tab.
Mark the "Detail" checkbox in the "Color Balance" tab. Press [Edit].
Set the value for the Low/Middle density of the color you would like to adjust, within a range of "1" to "4"
in the "Color Balance Details" option.
* This adjustment will have an effect only on printing on a Windows PCL6 or PS3 or XPS emulation printer
driver.
(This adjustment cannot be performed on a Macintosh printer driver.)

* Initially, set "4" and check the printout.

After changing the option on the printer driver, print and check the print image quality.
If further image quality adjustments are still necessary, the service technician must use the next procedure
according to the image type.
• To adjust the color image: Go to procedure (4).
• To adjust the black and white image: Go to procedure (5).

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-73
3. Printer-specific Adjustments

PCL6 PS3 Mac * This adjustment will have an effect only on Auto or Color mode printing.

(4) Select [05 ADJUSTMENT MODE]. Increase the values for codes [8042 to 8065] or [8268 to 8275] to
increase the Low/Middle density of the color.
• Adjust the value for [05] code corresponding to the print option to be applied (PDL and Halftone).

Ex.: • When printing on Windows is performed with the following options selected: PCL6, Image Quality
Type = General, Halftone = Auto
> Text area, graphic area and image area
Change the values for Y: 05-8058, M: 05-8059, C: 05-8060 and K: 05-8061.

• When printing on Macintosh is performed with the following option selected: Image Type =
Photograph, Halftone = Smooth
> Change the values for Y: 05-8050, M: 05-8051, C: 05-8052 and K: 05-8053.
* Printing on Macintosh is performed in PostScript. (See the "PS3" row in the table below.)

Color to Acceptable
PDL Halftone [05] code Subcode Recommended value Default
adjust value range
Smooth 05-8058 0/1
PCL5c
Detail 05-8062 0/1
PS3 Smooth 05-8050 0/1
Y (600dpi) Detail 05-8054 0/1
(Yellow) PS3 Smooth 05-8268 0/1
(1200dpi) Detail 05-8272 0/1
Smooth 05-8042 0/1
XPS
Detail 05-8046 0/1
Smooth 05-8059 0/1
PCL5c
Detail 05-8063 0/1
PS3 Smooth 05-8051 0/1
M (600dpi) Detail 05-8055 0/1
(Magenta) PS3 Smooth 05-8269 0/1
(1200dpi) Detail 05-8273 0/1
Smooth 05-8043 0/1
XPS
Detail 05-8047 0/1
Set a value larger than 128. 0 to 255 128
Smooth 05-8060 0/1
PCL5c
Detail 05-8064 0/1
PS3 Smooth 05-8052 0/1
C (600dpi) Detail 05-8056 0/1
(Cyan) PS3 Smooth 05-8270 0/1
(1200dpi) Detail 05-8274 0/1
Smooth 05-8044 0/1
XPS
Detail 05-8048 0/1
Smooth 05-8061 0/1
PCL5c
Detail 05-8065 0/1
PS3 Smooth 05-8053 0/1
K (600dpi) Detail 05-8057 0/1
(Black) PS3 Smooth 05-8271 0/1
(1200dpi) Detail 05-8275 0/1
Smooth 05-8045 0/1
XPS
Detail 05-8049 0/1
* Set the value in increments of approximately 20, while checking the printouts until the optimum value is
obtained.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-74
 3. Printer-specific Adjustments

* "Halftone" refers to how halftones are printed. Two options are available: "Smooth" which is intended to
improve the reproducibility of gradation and "Detail" which is intended to print halftones in details (with
the high frequency).
The halftone option to be applied in printing can be selected from among the "Halftone" options on the
printer driver (Windows) or in the print dialog box (Macintosh).
"Auto" is selected from among the "Apply to" options by default. It is intended to automatically select
"Smooth" or "Detail" in accordance with "Apply to" of the halftone option, the selected "Color" and
"Image Quality Type" options, as described in the table below.
"Color" and "Image Quality Type" options
Apply to Auto/Color Black and Twin
General Photograph Presentation Line Art White Color
Text Detail Detail Detail Detail Detail Detail

Graphic
Smooth Smooth Smooth Detail Smooth Smooth
(Illustration, line, etc.)
Image
Smooth Smooth Smooth Detail Smooth Smooth
(Photograph, etc.)

* The subcode varies according to the area where the density is adjusted. Refer to the table below and set
the subcode for the area to be adjusted.
* Whether to fix or change the maximum density in a high-density area can be selected by the setting of 05-
8066.
Subcode Area where the density is adjusted
0 Low-density area
1 Medium-density area
2 High-density area

<Note> This adjustment changes the values set in the MFP. Therefore, it will affect every user who uses
the printer by connecting it to the MFP. After the adjustment, the values changed will be applied
to all printouts for the "Image Quality Type" and "Halftone" options. (For instance, if the value
for [05] code for PCL6 and Smooth is changed, it will be applied to printing performed with
PCL6 and Halftone = "Smooth" (or "Auto") selected.) Carefully perform the adjustment, being
aware that the image quality of all future printouts will be changed, when printing out originals
other than the one that is used for the adjustment.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-75
3. Printer-specific Adjustments

PCL6 PS3 XPS Mac * This adjustment will have an effect only on Black and white mode printing.

(5) Increase the values for codes [7315 to 7320] or [7309 to 7310] to adjust the gamma curve balance and
increase the Low/Medium density on Black and White mode printing.
• Adjust the value for [05] code corresponding to the print option to be applied (PDL and Halftone).
* Printing on Macintosh is performed in PostScript. (See the "PS3" row in the table below.)

Recommended Acceptable
PDL Halftone [05] code Subcode Default
value value range
PS3 Smooth 05-7315 0/1/2
(600dpi) Detail 05-7316 0/1/2
PS3 Smooth 05-7309 0/1/2
(1200dpi) Detail 05-7310 0/1/2 Set a value larger
0 to 255 128
Smooth 05-7317 0/1/2 than 128
PCL6
Detail 05-7318 0/1/2
Smooth 05-7319 0/1/2
XPS
Detail 05-7320 0/1/2

Recommended Acceptable
PDL Apply to [05] code Subcode Default
value value range
Text 05-7360 0/1/2
PS3 Graphic 05-7361 0/1/2
Image 05-7362 0/1/2
Text 05-7363 0/1/2
Set a value larger
PCL6 Graphic 05-7364 0/1/2 0 to 255 128
than 128
Image 05-7365 0/1/2
Text 05-7366 0/1/2
XPS Graphic 05-7367 0/1/2
Image 05-7368 0/1/2
* Set the value in increments of approximately 10, while checking the printouts until the optimum value is
obtained.

* The subcode varies according to the area where the density is adjusted. Refer to the table below and set the
subcode for the area to be adjusted.
Subcode Area where the density is adjusted
0 Low-density area
1 Medium-density area
2 High-density area

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-76
 3. Printer-specific Adjustments

<Note> • This adjustment changes the values set in the MFP. Therefore, it will affect every user who
uses the printer by connecting it to the MFP. After the adjustment, the values changed will be
applied to all printouts for the "Halftone" option. (For instance, if the value for [05] code for PCL
and Detail is changed, it will be applied to printing performed with PCL6 and Halftone = "Detail"
(or "Auto") selected.) Carefully perform the adjustment, being aware that the image quality of all
future printouts will be changed, when printing out originals other than the one that is used for the
adjustment.

• When "Mono" is selected from among the "Color" options and "Auto" (default) is selected from
among the "Halftone" options, "Detail" of the "Halftone" options is applied to text and graphics
(illustrations), and "Smooth" is applied to raster data (images). Therefore, particular attention is
required since the adjustment may have a different impact according to the patterns of the image to
be printed.

 Caution after the adjustment

Nothing in particular.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-77
3. Printer-specific Adjustments

3.16 To Clearly Print Thin Lines/Double Lines

Before adjustment After adjustment

Thin lines or double lines are dotted on the The thin lines or double lines are clearly
printout. printed out.

 Explanation
When thin lines or double lines, which are laid out on a solid filled area, are printed out, they may be dotted on
the printout. Change the option on the printer driver, setting for emphasizing thin lines, in order to clearly print
them out.

 Procedures
* Follow the procedure below to perform the adjustment. However, the service technician shall judge whether or
not the adjustment is to be performed in conjunction with the printer driver setting in step (1) and the [08] code
setting in step (4) after checking the printed image.
* Both the service technician and the user can use procedure (1).
* Only the service technician must use procedures (2), (3) and (4).

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-78
 3. Printer-specific Adjustments

(1) Enable the "Distinguish Thin Line" option on the printer driver.

For Windows
PCL6 PS3 XPS

Open the property page of the printer driver. Press [Setting] in the "Image Quality" tab.
Mark the "Distinguish Thin Line" checkbox in the "Basic" tab.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-79
3. Printer-specific Adjustments

For Macintosh

Mac
Open the print dialog box. Enable the "Print Mode" - "Distinguish Thin Line" option.

After changing the setting on the printer driver menu, print the image and check its image quality.
If further image quality adjustment is necessary, the service technician shall use the following procedure
because the color of the text of the original file may not be set as black:

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-80
 3. Printer-specific Adjustments

PS3 * Applicable only to 1200dpi

(2) Select [05 ADJUSTMENT MODE]. Increase the setting value of the code [8242] to increase the density
level of thin lines by emphasizing them.

Acceptable
PDL Color [05] code Subcode Recommended value Default
value range
PS3 Black 0 Set value larger than 3 3
05-8242 0 to 5
(1200dpi) Color 1 Set value larger than 1 1

<Note> When the setting value of the color adjustment is increased, thin lines in light colors in printing
at 1200 dpi may turn out darker than at 600 dpi.
For example, when a 3D object such as Word Art is printed at 1200 dpi, the border lines may
become darker.

After setting the value, print the image and check its image quality.
If further image quality adjustment is necessary, use the following procedure:

PS3 * Applicable only to 1200 dpi

(3) Select [05 ADJUSTMENT MODE]. Change the setting value of the code [8243] to adjust a range for
emphasizing thin lines.

Acceptable
PDL Color [05] code Subcode Recommended value Default
value range
Black (Min.) 0 Set value larger than 1 1
PS3 Black (Max.) 1 Set value smaller than 200 200
05-8243 0 to 255
(1200dpi) Color (Min.) 2 Set value larger than 1 1
Color (Max.) 3 Set value smaller than 255 255

After changing the value, perform printing and check the image quality.
If further image quality adjustments are necessary, follow the next step. However, the service technician
shall judge whether or not the adjustment is to be performed in conjunction with the settings in steps (1) to
(3).

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-81
3. Printer-specific Adjustments

PCL6 PS3 XPS Mac

(4) Select [08 SETTING MODE]. Change the value for code [2548] to make the outline of the copied text
thicker and clearer, or thinner and finer.
* This adjustment can be made applicable to all colors by selecting the corresponding subcode. However, it
is recommended to enter the same setting value for all the subcodes unless otherwise required.

Acceptable
Setting item [08] code Subcode Recommended value Default
range value
Y 0 To make the outline of text
thicker and clearer:
Potential on printing M 1 Set a value smaller than 5.
white text / 08-2548 0 to 12 6
Correction setting C 2 To make the outline of text
thinner and finer:
K 3 Set a value larger than 5.

* To check the amount changed with this setting, it is recommended to set the value at "3" or "4" first to
decrease it, and then to set the value at "8" or "9" first to increase it. Then check the copy image and
increase or decrease the value further so that the image will be adjusted finely.

• After changing the value, perform automatic calibration.

* Refer to step (1) in "1.1 To Obtain a Darker Image" to perform automatic calibration.

 Caution after the adjustment

• Performing this adjustment on thin lines may not give satisfactory results. In this case, it is recommended to
perform the adjustment in conjunction with "3.14 To Clearly Print Light-Colored Thin Lines or Text". However,
the service technician shall judge whether or not the adjustment is to be performed in conjunction with "3.14 To
Clearly Print Light-Colored Thin Lines or Text" after checking the printed image.

• In some consumption conditions, background fogging or a decrease in the amount of developer material (carrier
streaks) may occur. Therefore, carefully perform the adjustment while checking the printed image.

 Remarks
If you perform only step (4) above (changing the setting value of the code [08-2548]) as an image quality
adjustment for a certain color, it may cause an extra increase or decrease in the amount of the toner used for this
color compared with that for the other colors, or it may create a difference in the reproducibility of halftones.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-82
 3. Printer-specific Adjustments

3.17 To Decrease the Image Density and Save Toner

(To Print in the Toner Save Mode)

Before adjustment After adjustment

Default printing. Printing is performed, while the toner is

being saved.

 Explanation
This product offers a toner save mode. It is intended to automatically decrease the image density and reduce the
amount of toner used. Change the option on the printer driver and perform printing in the toner save mode, for
instance, if a large number of copies have to be printed, or if the image density is too high.

 Procedures
* Both the service technician and the user can perform all adjustments.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-83
3. Printer-specific Adjustments

(1) Enable the "Toner Save" option on the printer driver.

For Windows
PCL6 PS3 XPS

Open the property page of the printer driver. Mark the "Toner Save" checkbox in the "Others" tab.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-84
 3. Printer-specific Adjustments

For Macintosh

Mac
Open the print dialog box. Enable the "Color Settings 1" - "Toner Save" option.

 Caution after the adjustment

The adjustment may possibly provide the image density lower than the user desires, when printing is performed
in the toner save mode. Therefore, carefully perform the adjustment, while checking the printouts.

 Remarks
The print density in the toner save mode can also be adjusted. For further information regarding the adjustment
procedures, refer to 3.18 To Adjust the Image Density in the Toner Save Mode.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-85
3. Printer-specific Adjustments

3.18 To Adjust the Image Density in the Toner Save Mode

Before adjustment After adjustment

The image density is too dark, even when The image density in the toner save mode
printing is performed in the toner save is adjustable, as desired.
mode.

 Explanation
The product offers a toner save mode. It is intended to automatically decrease the image density and reduce the
amount of toner used. Adjust the upper limit of the image density in the toner save mode, in order to obtain the
desired image density requested by a particular user.

 Procedures
* The service technician must perform all adjustments.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-86
 3. Printer-specific Adjustments

PCL6 PS3 XPS Mac

(1) Select [05 ADJUSTMENT MODE]. Change the value to adjust the image density in the toner save mode.
* The [05] code to use varies, depending on whether to adjust the image quality on Full Color or Twin Color
printing or on Black and White printing. Use either of the procedures below corresponding to the type of
original to print.

To adjust the image quality in Full Color or Twin Color printing

("Auto," "Color" or "Twin Color" is selected from among the "Color" options on the PCL6 or PS3 or XPS
printer driver. "Auto," "Color" or "Twin Color" is selected from among the "Color Type" options on
Macintosh.)

* The "Color" options are available in the "Basic" tab on the PCL6, PS3 and XPS printer drivers. The
"Color Type" options are available in the "Color Settings 1" menu in the print dialog box on Macintosh.

(a) Select [05 ADJUSTMENT MODE]. Change the value for codes [8160] or [8161] to adjust the upper limit
of the image density in the toner save mode.
* Printing on Macintosh is performed in PostScript. (See the "PS3" row in the table below.)

Recommended Acceptable
Resolution PDL [05] code Subcode Default
value value range

Set a value smaller

PS3 05-1055 0 than 176 to decrease
the density.
600dpi PCL6 05-1055 1 0 to 255 176
Set a value larger
XPS 05-1055 2 than 176 to increase
the density.
Set a value smaller
than 176 to decrease
the density.
1200dpi PS3 05-8161 - 0 to 255 176
Set a value larger
than 176 to increase
the density.
* Set the value in increments of approximately 10, while checking the printouts until the optimum value is
obtained.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-87
3. Printer-specific Adjustments

To adjust the image quality on Black and White printing

("Black and White" is selected from among the "Color" options on the PCL6 or PS3 or XPS printer driver.
"Mono" is selected from among the "Color Type" options on Macintosh.)

* The "Color" options are available in the "Basic" tab on the PCL6, PS3 and XPS printer drivers. The
"Color Type" options are available in the "Color Settings 1" menu in the print dialog box on Macintosh.

(a) Select [05 ADJUSTMENT MODE]. Increase the value for codes [7307] or [7302] to adjustment the upper
limit of the image density in the toner save mode.
* Printing on Macintosh is performed in PostScript. (See the "PS3" row in the table below.)

Recommended Acceptable
Resolution PDL [05] code Subcode Default
value value range

Set a value smaller

PS3 05-7307 0 than 176 to decrease
the density.
600dpi PCL6 05-7307 1 0 to 255 176
Set a value larger
XPS 05-7307 2 than 176 to increase
the density.
Set a value smaller
than 176 to decrease
the density.
1200dpi PS3 05-7302 0 0 to 255 176
Set a value larger
than 176 to increase
the density.
* Set the value in increments of approximately 10, while checking the printouts until the optimum value is
obtained.

 Caution after the adjustment

The adjustment may possibly cause an increase of the amount of toner used (if the image density is increased) or provide
faint print images (if the image density is decreased). Therefore, carefully perform the adjustment, while checking the
printouts.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-88
 3. Printer-specific Adjustments

3.19 To Print Illegible Gray or Colored Text in Black

Before adjustment After adjustment

Gray, yellow and cyan text is illegible on the The gray, yellow or cyan text is printed in
printouts. black. This makes it more legible on the
printouts.

 Explanation
Text may look illegible on the printout, depending on the hues of the background and the text contained in the
original, particularly, when printing an original containing yellow, light blue or gray text on a light-colored
background. In addition, when a full-color original is printed in the Black and White mode, the colored text may
turn gray on the printout and eventually become illegible. In this case, change the option on the printer driver, in
order to reproduce the colored text (except the white text) in black and make it more legible on the printout.

* This adjustment will have an effect only on printing on a Windows PCL6 or PS3 or XPS emulation printer
driver.
(This adjustment cannot be performed on a Macintosh printer driver.)

 Procedures
* Both the service technician and the user can perform all adjustments.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-89
3. Printer-specific Adjustments

PCL6 PS3 XPS

(1) Open the property page of the printer driver. Press [Setting] in the "Image Quality" tab.
Mark the "Use Black for All Text" checkbox in the "Basic" tab.

* This adjustment will be effective, only if a file created on a general application, such as Microsoft Office,
is printed in PostScript (PS3). It may not be effective, if a file created on a graphic application (e.g.
Illustrator) or a DTP application (e.g. QuarkXPress) is printed, or a PDF file created on these applications
is printed.

 Caution after the adjustment

Nothing in particular.

 Remarks
Not all colored text may be printed in black, depending on the type of text (e.g. text larger than 72 points).

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-90
 3. Printer-specific Adjustments

3.20 To Ignore Blank Pages for Printing

Before adjustment After adjustment

A blank page is also delivered. A blank page is ignored for printing.

 Explanation
Some applications may be designed to automatically insert blank pages for laying out the pages of a document.
Change the option on the printer driver, in order to ignore all blank pages for printing.

 Procedures
* Both the service technician and the user can perform all adjustments.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-91
3. Printer-specific Adjustments

(1)Enable the "Do not Print Blank Pages" option on the printer driver.

For Windows
PCL6 PS3 XPS

Open the property page of the printer driver. Mark the "Do not Print Blank Pages" checkbox in the "Others"
tab.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-92
 3. Printer-specific Adjustments

For Macintosh
Mac

Open the print dialog box. Enable the "Print Mode" - "Do not Print Blank Pages" option.

 Caution after the adjustment

The adjustment may not possibly operate the following options as programmed. Therefore, pay special attention
to the combination of options.
• Booklet printing • N-up printing • Use Front Cover
• Use Back Cover • Interleave Pages

 Remarks
If any data are inserted in the header or footer of a particular page on Excel or Word, even though no data are
present in the body, the page will not be recognized as a blank page. The header or footer will be printed out.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-93
3. Printer-specific Adjustments

3.21 To Sharply Print Black Text

Before adjustment After adjustment

Text looks black on the monitor. But the hue The hue of the text is nearly matched with the
will vary, if it is printed out in the Full color black hue on the monitor.
mode.

 Explanation
Text looks black on the monitor. But if it is printed in the Full color mode (with "Auto" selected from among the
"Color" options), all color toners (C, M, Y and K) will be used to print it, depending on the application in use.
As a result, the black hue on the printout looks different from what the user desires. This problem is caused by
the application specifications, not by the printer.
Particularly, the following factors may print black text using all color toners (C, M, Y and K) when a PDF file is
printed out:
• The file of black text (CMY = 0%, K = 100%) is printed on the PCL6 printer driver.
• Black text is treated as image data instead of text data on the file.
• Black text is not defined as 100% black (RGB = 0% or CMY = 0%, K = 100%) on the file.
Change the option on the printer driver or adjust the color balance, in order to nearly match the hue of the black
text on the file, in which these factors may be included, with the black hue.
As a point to remember, determine whether the text to adjust is entered as an actual text (font) or as a graphic or
image data.

 Procedures
* Perform the adjustment in accordance with the procedures below.
* Both the service technician and the user can use procedures (1), (2), (4) and (5).
* Only the service technician must use procedures (3) and (6).

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-94
 3. Printer-specific Adjustments

(1) If printing is performed on a PCL6 printer driver, select a PS3 printer driver.

<Hint> If printing is performed on a PCL6 printer driver, or if a file or a graphic application created on a
DTP application, such as Illustrator, QuarkXPress, FreeHand, or CorelDraw, is printed using the
CMYK toners, or a high-definition PDF file created on these applications is printed, black text
may not be converted into 100% black. But if printing is performed on a PS3 printer driver,
black text can be printed in black, as shown on the file.

After printing on the PS3 driver, print and check the print image quality.
If further image quality adjustments are still necessary, use the next procedure.

(2) Mark the "Pure Black" checkbox on the printer driver. Select "Text, Graphic & Image" from among the
"Apply to" options.

<Hint> Text on the Web page may be raster data (image) created in GIF or JPEG format. Black-and-white
data created in PDF format by scanning the original are also raster data. If the "Pure Black"
checkbox is marked on the printer driver, "Auto" is selected from among the "Apply to" options by
default. Raster data are handled as an image, which is intended to improve the texture, and the 4
color toners (C, M, Y and K) will be used to print black. If "Text, Graphic & Image" is selected
from among the "Apply to" options, only the K toner will be used to print black on raster data.

For Windows
PCL6 PS3 XPS * This adjustment will have an effect only on Black and white mode printing.
Open the property page of the printer driver. Press [Setting] in the "Image Quality" tab.
Mark the "Pure Black" checkbox in the "Basic" tab. Select "Text, Graphic & Image" from among the
"Apply to" options.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-95
3. Printer-specific Adjustments

For Macintosh
Mac * This adjustment will have an effect only on full-color printing.

Open the print dialog box. Select "Color Settings 1" - "Black – Text, Graphic and Image" from among the
"Pure Black and Gray" options.

After changing the option on the printer driver, print and check the print image quality.
If further image quality adjustments are still necessary, use the next procedure.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-96
 3. Printer-specific Adjustments

PCL6 PS3 XPS Mac * This adjustment will have an effect only on Black and white mode printing.

(3) Select [05 ADJUSTMENT MODE]. Change the values for codes [8210 to 8212] or [8249 to 8254] to adjust
the threshold values for "Pure Gray" and "Pure Black" (to adjust the area to print only using the K toner).
• Adjust the value for [05] code corresponding to the print option to be applied (Apply to, PDL, Item,
Subcode (Image quality type)).

* Printing on Macintosh is performed in PostScript. (See the "PS3" row in the table below.)

Acceptable
Apply to PDL [05] code Subcode Recommended value value Default
range
PCL6 05-8210 0/1/2/3 8/8/8/8
Text PS3 05-8252 0/1/2/3/4 Set a value smaller than 8/8/8/8/8
XPS 05-8249 0/1/2/3/4 the default to decrease 8/8/8/8/8
the area to print only
PCL6 05-8211 0/1/2/3 using the K toner. 1/1/1/8
Graphics PS3 05-8253 0/1/2/3/4 1 to 255 1/1/1/8/1
XPS 05-8250 0/1/2/3/4 Set a value larger than 1/1/1/8/1
the default to increase the
PCL6 05-8212 0/1/2/3 area to print only using 1/1/1/8
Image PS3 05-8254 0/1/2/3/4 the K toner. 1/1/1/8/1
XPS 05-8251 0/1/2/3/4 1/1/1/8/1

* The subcode varies according to the Image quality type where the adjustment is performed. Refer to the
table below and set the subcode for the Image quality type to adjust.

Subcode Image Quality Type

0 General
1 Photograph
2 Presentation
3 Line Art
4 Color Profile

<Note> If the graphic and image options are changed, the adjustment may possibly cause the
unnatural hue of gradational and photo images, and the inadequate reproducibility of
gradations. Therefore, carefully perform the adjustment, while checking the printouts.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-97
3. Printer-specific Adjustments

PCL6 PS3 XPS

(4) Open the property page of the printer driver. Press [Setting] in the "Image Quality" tab.
Mark the "Use Black for All Text" checkbox in the "Image Quality" tab.
* This adjustment will have an effect only on printing on a Windows PCL6 or PS3 or XPS emulation printer
driver.
(This adjustment cannot be performed on a Macintosh printer driver.)

* This adjustment will be effective, only if a file created on a general application, such as Microsoft Office,
is printed in PostScript (PS3). It may not be effective, if a file created on a graphic application (e.g.
Illustrator) or a DTP application (e.g. QuarkXPress) is printed, or a PDF file created on these applications
is printed.

<Note> The adjustment may provide all colored text in black.

After changing the option on the printer driver, print and check the print image quality.
If further image quality adjustments are still necessary, the service technician must use the next procedure,
because text may not be defined as 100% black on the file.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-98
 3. Printer-specific Adjustments

PCL6 PS3 XPS * This adjustment will have an effect only on Auto or Color mode printing.
(5) Open the property page of the printer driver and press [Setting] in the "Image Quality" tab. Mark the
"Detail" checkbox in the "Color Balance" tab and then press [Edit].
• Set the value for the Low/Medium density of the color you would like to adjust within a range of "1" to "4"
in the "Color Balance Details" option.

* This adjustment will have an effect only on printing on the Windows PCL6, PS3 or XPS emulation printer
driver. (This adjustment cannot be performed on a Macintosh printer driver.)

* Initially, set "4" and check the printout.

After changing the option on the printer driver, print and check the print image quality.
If further image quality adjustments are still necessary, use the next procedure.

PCL6 PS3 XPS Mac * This adjustment will have an effect only on Black and white mode printing.
(6) Select [05 ADJUSTMENT MODE]. Change the values for codes [8042 to 8065] or [8268 to 8275] to adjust the color
density (Color balance).
• Adjust the value for [05] code corresponding to the print option to be applied (PDL and Halftone).

Ex.: • When printing on Windows is performed with the following options selected: PCL6, Image Quality
Type = General, Halftone = Auto
> Text area, graphic area and image area
Change the values for Y: 05-8058, M: 05-8059, C: 05-8060 and K: 05-8061.

• When printing on Macintosh is performed with the following option selected: Image Type =
Photograph, Halftone = Smooth
> Change the values for Y: 05-8050, M: 05-8051, C: 05-8052 and K: 05-8053.
* Printing on Macintosh is performed in PostScript. (See the "PS3" row in the table below.)

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-99
3. Printer-specific Adjustments

* The hue of the black text printed using all color toners (C, M, Y and K) will look much clearer, if the amount
of the C (cyan) toner used is larger than the M (magenta) or Y (yellow) toner. Remember that adjusting the
density of K (black) does not affect the hue of the black text, if all color toners are used to print the text.

Color to Recommended Acceptable

PDL Halftone [05] code Subcode Default
adjust value value range
Smooth 05-8058 0/1/2
PCL6
Detail 05-8062 0/1/2
PS3 Smooth 05-8050 0/1/2
Y (600dpi) Detail 05-8054 0/1/2
(Yellow) PS3 Smooth 05-8268 0/1/2
(1200dpi) Detail 05-8272 0/1/2
Smooth 05-8042 0/1/2
XPS
Detail 05-8046 0/1/2
Smooth 05-8059 0/1/2
PCL6
Detail 05-8063 0/1/2
PS3 Smooth 05-8051 0/1/2
M (600dpi) Detail 05-8055 0/1/2
(Magenta
) PS3 Smooth 05-8269 0/1/2
(1200dpi) Detail 05-8273 0/1/2
Smooth 05-8043 0/1/2
XPS
Detail 05-8047 0/1/2 Set a value larger
0 to 255 128
Smooth 05-8060 0/1/2 than 128.
PCL6
Detail 05-8064 0/1/2
PS3 Smooth 05-8052 0/1/2
C (600dpi) Detail 05-8056 0/1/2
(Cyan) PS3 Smooth 05-8270 0/1/2
(1200dpi) Detail 05-8274 0/1/2
Smooth 05-8044 0/1/2
XPS
Detail 05-8048 0/1/2
Smooth 05-8061 0/1/2
PCL6
Detail 05-8065 0/1/2
PS3 Smooth 05-8053 0/1/2
K (600dpi) Detail 05-8057 0/1/2
(Black) PS3 Smooth 05-8271 0/1/2
(1200dpi) Detail 05-8275 0/1/2
Smooth 05-8045 0/1/2
XPS
Detail 05-8049 0/1/2
* Set the value in increments of approximately 20, while checking the printouts until the optimum value is
obtained.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-100
 3. Printer-specific Adjustments

* "Halftone" refers to how halftones are printed. Two options are available: "Smooth" which is intended to
improve the reproducibility of gradation and "Detail" which is intended to print halftones in details (with
the high frequency).
The halftone option to be applied in printing can be selected from among the "Halftone" options on the
printer driver (Windows) or in the print dialog box (Macintosh).
"Auto" is selected from among the "Apply to" options by default. It is intended to automatically select
"Smooth" or "Detail" in accordance with "Apply to" of the halftone option, the selected "Color" and
"Image Quality Type" options, as described by the table below.
"Color" and "Image Quality Type" options
Apply to Auto/Color Black and Twin
General Photograph Presentation Line Art White Color
Text Detail Detail Detail Detail Detail Detail

Graphic
Smooth Smooth Smooth Detail Smooth Smooth
(Illustration, line, etc.)
Image
Smooth Smooth Smooth Detail Smooth Smooth
(Photograph, etc.)

* The subcode varies according to the area where the density is adjusted. Refer to the table below and set the
subcode for the area to be adjusted.
Subcode Area where the density is adjusted
0 Low-density area
1 Medium-density area
2 High-density area

<Note> • This adjustment changes the values set in the MFP. Therefore, it will affect every user who
uses the printer by connecting it to the MFP. After the adjustment, the values changed will be
applied to all printouts for the "Image Quality Type" and "Halftone" options. (For instance, if
the value for [05] code for PCL6 and Smooth is changed, it will be applied to printing
performed with PCL6 and Halftone = "Smooth" (or "Auto") selected.) Carefully perform the
adjustment, being aware that the image quality of all future printouts will be changed, when
printing out originals other than the one that is used for the adjustment.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-101
3. Printer-specific Adjustments

 Caution after the adjustment

The adjustment may possibly change the hue of the text and the image, such as a photo image, on the printout.
Therefore, carefully perform the adjustment, while checking the printouts.

 Remarks

To check the definition of black text

When creating a PDF file, 100% black may not be defined as follows, depending on the application settings:

"100% black" indicates the following values:

• RGB data: RGB = 0%
• CMYK data: CMY = 0%, K = 100%

As a result, text, which should be defined as 100% black on the application, is not defined as 100% black on
the saved PDF file. (A small percent of color data is defined.) Eventually, all color toners (C, M, Y and K)
will be used to print it.
If printing is performed on a PCL6 printer driver, print data are captured as RGB data. If black text is
defined as 100% black (CMY=0%, K = 100%) for CMYK data on a PDF file, it will not be converted into
100% black (RGB = 0%) for RGB data on Acrobat, and it will be printed in colors. (It is recommended to
print CMYK data on a PS3 printer driver instead of a PCL6 printer driver.)
Use "Output Preview" on Acrobat Professional to examine the color definition on the PDF file.

* For further information regarding the Output Preview, refer to an appropriate manual or the Help menu of
Acrobat Professional.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-102
 3. Printer-specific Adjustments

(1) Open a PDF file on Acrobat Professional.

(2) Select "Output Preview" in the "Advanced" menu.
(3) Select a profile from among the "Simulation Profile" options.
* Select the profile to use for the Monitor Simulation, in order to print RGB data, and the one to use for the
Ink Simulation, in order to print CMYK data from among the "Simulation Profile" options.
(4) Move the cursor over the data to check the color definition. Then the color calibration will be displayed
in percentage on "Separations."

(3)

(4)

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-103
3. Printer-specific Adjustments

3.22 To Prevent Dark Toner from Coming Off

Before adjustment After adjustment

The dark toner comes off. The dark toner is securely fixed.

 Explanation
When highly colored lines, where a large accumulated amount of C, M, Y and K toners are used, are created on
raster data (image), such as BMP, GIF, JPEG and TIFF, and printed on the rough surface of paper or thick paper,
the toner may come off the paper. This is because the C, M, Y and K toners may be overlaid, the paper may be
extremely thick or the surface may be rough, and the amount of toner used may be insufficient. Adjust the limit
value of the maximum amount of toner used, in order to avoid a toner fixing problem.
This adjustment does not affect a single color of C, M, Y and K, or bright colors such as red and green.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-104
 3. Printer-specific Adjustments

 Procedures
* The service technician must perform all adjustments.

PCL6 PS3 XPS Mac * This adjustment will have an effect only on Auto or Color mode printing.

(1) Select [05 ADJUSTMENT MODE]. Decrease the values for codes [8070/8071] or [8089/8090] to reduce
the limit value of the maximum amount of toner used.
• Adjust the value for [05] code corresponding to the print option to be applied (Paper type and Halftone).

* Printing on Macintosh is performed in PostScript. (See the "PS3" row in the table below.)

Subcode
Recom Acceptable
[05] e-STUDIO
Resolution Halftone e-STUDIO mended value Default
Code 2505/3505/
2000AC value range
4505/5005
0 to Set a
Smooth 05-8071 0 to 12
4/7/8/11/12 value
600dpi smaller 0 to 255 128
0 to
Detail 05-8070 0 to 12 than the
4/7/8/11/12
default.
0 to Set a
Smooth 05-8090 0 to 12
4/7/8/11/12 value
1200dpi smaller 0 to 255 128
0 to
Detail 05-8089 0 to 12 than the
4/7/8/11/12
default.
* Set the value in increments of approximately 30, while checking the printouts until the optimum value is
obtained.

Subcode Paper type

0 Plain paper
1 Thick
2 Recycled paper
3 Thick 1
4 Thick 2
5 Thick 3*
6 Thick 4*
7 Special 1
8 Special 2
9 Special 3*
10 Thin*
11 Envelope
12 OHP
* e-STUDIO2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC only

 Caution after the adjustment

The adjustment may possibly cause dark areas such as shades on photo images to look unnaturally faint.
Therefore, carefully perform the adjustment, while checking the printouts.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-105
3. Printer-specific Adjustments

3.23 To Register the Image Quality Adjusted Corresponding to a Preference

(To use the Custom Color Settings)

 Explanation
The option to obtain the desired print image quality can be registered as Custom Color Settings.

* This adjustment will have an effect only on printing on a Windows PCL6 or PS3 or XPS emulation printer
driver.
(This adjustment cannot be performed on a Macintosh printer driver.)

 Procedures
* Both the service technician and the user can perform all adjustments.

* As an example of using Customer Color Settings, if "Presentation" is selected as the base type from among the
"Image Quality Type" options, the procedure below is to set a larger value for the Middle density of the color in
the "Color Balance Details" option, and register the name of "Draft agenda."

PCL6 PS3 XPS

(1) Open the property page of the printer driver in the "Printers and Faxes" folder. Press [Setting] in the
"General" tab and open [Printing Preferences].

Ex: Mark the "Detail" checkbox in the "Color Balance" tab. Press [Edit].
Set the value for the Middle density of the color in the "Color Balance Details" option.

After setting the values, use the procedure.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-106
 3. Printer-specific Adjustments

PCL6 PS3 XPS

(2) Register the name for what has been specified in procedure (1), in the "Basic" tab in the "Setting" option.
• Use steps (a) to (c) to register the name.
(a) Mark the "Save Current setting as" checkbox in the "Custom Color Settings" option.
(b) Enter an optional name in the "Name" option.
(c) Select the type you would like to use as the base one from among the "Image Quality Type" options
in "Original Image Quality Type."

(a)
(b)

(c)

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-107
3. Printer-specific Adjustments

After registering the name, open the property page of the printer driver. Make sure that the name created for
the "Image Quality Type" option in the "Image Quality" tab has been registered.

* The icon of the base "Image Quality Type" will be displayed in the background of the icons for the
registered Custom Color Settings.
(The icon of "Presentation" is displayed in the background as illustrated below.)

 Caution after the adjustment

The Custom Color Settings indicate a condition where the default setting has been changed.
Adjusting the values in detail in the "Setting" option allows the user to register the desired print image quality.

 Remarks
The checkbox in the "Custom Color Settings" option will be effective, only if you login using a user name
belonging to Administrator or Power Users (only on Windows NT4.0 / 2000 / XP / Vista / Server 2003), and
open the property page of the printer driver in the "Printers and Faxes" folder.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-108
 3. Printer-specific Adjustments

3.24 To Print a Full-Color Original in Two Colors

Before adjustment After Adjustment

The original is printed in the Full color mode. The areas other than black is printed in the
same color (Red).

 Explanation
Select the twin color print mode option, in order to change colored text and lines on full-color original and print
out the original.

* The gradation reproduction for twin-color print can be switched by means of the following self-diagnostic code.

Enter [05 ADJUSTMENT MODE] and change the setting value for the code [8002].
[05] Code Setting value Contents Default
0 Gradation reproduction priority (The gradation ability of
8002 an original such as a photo becomes more emphasized.) 0
Text reproduction priority (Text or lines can be printed
1
more clearly.)

* The Twin Color mode is not available when 1200 dpi is selected for the PS3 printer driver.

 Procedures
* The procedure to use varies depending on whether "To Adjust Colors", "To Adjust the Sharpness" or "To Print a
Full-Color Original in Two Colors". Refer to the procedure corresponding to the particular user’s request.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-109
3. Printer-specific Adjustments

3.24.1 To Adjust Colors

(1) Select "Twin Color" from among the "Color" options on the printer driver.

For Windows
PCL6 PS3 XPS

Open the property page of the printer driver. Select "Twin Color" from among the "Color" options in the
"Basic" tab. Press [Details]. Select the color to be used for the area other than black, from among the
"Color" options.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-110
 3. Printer-specific Adjustments

For Macintosh
Mac

Open the print dialog box. Select "Twin color (Black & ***)" from among the "Color Type" options.

After selecting these options, print and check the print image quality.
If further image quality adjustments are still necessary, the service technician must use the next procedure
according to the image quality problem the user has.
• To obtain a shaper or softer print image: Go to procedure (2).
• To make only the light-colored area darker: Go to procedure (3).

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-111
3. Printer-specific Adjustments

(2) Change the "Color balance" option on the printer driver.

For Windows
PCL6 PS3 XPS * This adjustment will have an effect only on Auto or Color mode printing.

Open the property page of the printer driver. Press [Setting] in the "Image Quality" tab. Change the option
in the "Color Balance" tab.
* Set the value, while checking the printouts until the optimum value is obtained.
- "Color Balance" tab: Change the "All Colors" or "Each Color" option.
- To make detailed setting, you can set it by marking "Detail" checkbox. (Same as Auto color or Full color
mode)

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-112
 3. Printer-specific Adjustments

(3) Select [05 ADJUSTMENT MODE]. Change the values for codes [8023 to 8041] to adjust the color density.
- Adjust the value for the [05] code corresponding to the print option to be applied (color selected in the
“Twin Color” option).

Ex.: When printing is performed with the following options selected: “Color” option = “Twin Color”,
“Details” option = “Red”
Adjust the values for the following [05] codes: [8033] for Y (Yellow), [8034] for M (Magenta) and
[8023] for K (Black)

Acceptable
Selected [05] Sub Recommended
Halftone value Default
color code code value
range
Y(Yellow) 05-8033 0/1/2
Red M(Magenta) 05-8034 0/1/2
C(Cyan) 05-8035 0/1/2
Y(Yellow) 05-8036 0/1/2
Green M(Magenta) 05-8037 0/1/2
C(Cyan) 05-8038 0/1/2
Y(Yellow) 05-8039 0/1/2
Set a value larger
Blue M(Magenta) 05-8040 0/1/2
than 128 to
C(Cyan) 05-8041 0/1/2 increase the
Y(Yellow) 05-8024 0/1/2 density.
Cyan M(Magenta) 05-8025 0/1/2 0 to 256 128
Set a value
C(Cyan) 05-8026 0/1/2 smaller than 128
Y(Yellow) 05-8027 0/1/2 to decrease the
Magenta M(Magenta) 05-8028 0/1/2 density.
C(Cyan) 05-8029 0/1/2
Y(Yellow) 05-8030 0/1/2
Yellow M(Magenta) 05-8031 0/1/2
C(Cyan) 05-8032 0/1/2
Red/Green/
Blue/Cyan/
K(Black) 05-8023 0/1/2
Magenta/
Yellow
* Set the value in increments of approximately 20, while checking the printouts until the optimum value is
obtained.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-113
3. Printer-specific Adjustments

* The color to be adjusted varies according to the color (color to be used for the area other than black)
selected in the Twin-color mode. Refer to the table below and select the color to be adjusted.
Color to be adjusted
Selected color
Y (Yellow) M (Magenta) C (Cyan)
Red  
Green  
Blue  
Cyan 
Magenta 
Yellow 

* "Halftone" refers to how halftones are printed. Two options are available: "Smooth" which is intended to
improve the reproducibility of gradation and "Detail" which is intended to print halftones in detail (with the
high frequency).
The halftone option to be applied in printing can be selected from among the "Halftone" options on the
printer driver (Windows) or in the print dialog box (Macintosh).
"Auto" is selected from among the "Apply to" options by default. It is intended to automatically select
"Smooth" or "Detail" in accordance with "Apply to" of the halftone option, the selected "Color" and
"Image Quality Type" options, as described by the table below.
"Color" and "Image Quality Type" options
Apply to Auto/Color Black and Twin
General Photograph Presentation Line Art White Color
Text Detail Detail Detail Detail Detail Detail
Graphic
(Illustration, Smooth Smooth Smooth Detail Smooth Smooth
line, etc.)
Image
(Photograph, Smooth Smooth Smooth Detail Smooth Smooth
etc.)

* The subcode varies depending on the area where the density is adjusted. Refer to the table below and set
the subcode for the area to be adjusted.
Subcode Area where the density is adjusted
0 Low-density area
1 Medium-density area
05-8066-0: The maximum color density
in a high-density area is fixed.
2 High-density area
05-8066-1: The maximum color density
in a high-density area is changed.
<Note> This adjustment changes the values set in the MFP. Therefore, it will affect every user who uses
the printer by connecting it to the MFP. After the adjustment, the values changed will be applied
to all printouts for the "Image Quality Type" and "Halftone" options. (For instance, if the value
for [05] code for Smooth is changed, it will be applied to printing performed with Halftone =
"Smooth" (or "Auto") selected.) Carefully perform the adjustment, being aware that the image
quality of all future printouts will be changed, when printing out originals other than the one that
is used for the adjustment.

 Caution after the adjustment

If "White" is selected in the Twin-color mode, all areas other than black will not be printed. White toner will not
be used to print these areas.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-114
 3. Printer-specific Adjustments

3.24.2 To Adjust the Sharpness

(1) Select "Twin Color" from among the "Color" options on the printer driver.

For Windows

PCL6 PS3 XPS

Open the property page of the printer driver. Select "Twin Color" from among the "Color" options in the
"Basic" tab. Press [Details]. Select the color to use for the area other than black, from among the "Color"
options.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-115
3. Printer-specific Adjustments

(2) Change the "Sharpness" option on the printer driver.

For Windows

PCL6 PS3 XPS

Open the property page of the printer driver. Press [Setting] in the "Image Quality" tab.
Set the value for "Sharpness" within a range of "-4" to "4" or to "OFF" in the "Image Attribute" tab.

The value "OFF" of sharpness intensity adjustment is positioned as shown below.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-116
 3. Printer-specific Adjustments

* It is enabled only in the Twin color copy mode.

Select [05 ADJUSTMENT MODE]. Change the setting value of code [8108].

Acceptable
Color mode [05]code Subcode Recommended value Default
value range
The larger the value is, the
Twin color 05-8108 0/1/2 sharper the image 0～255 128
becomes.
* Set the value in increments of approximately 30, while checking the printouts until the optimum value is
obtained.

Subcode Original mode

0 Text
1 Graphic
2 Image

<Note> • When the setting value of this code is changed to “0”, the sharpness adjustment on the
Windows menu is also changed to OFF automatically.
• When the setting value of this code is larger than "128" (default), the level of the sharpness
intensity is equivalent to the one when the value is set within a range of "0" to "+4" on the printer
driver menu. When the setting value of this code is smaller than "128", the level of the sharpness
intensity is equivalent to the one when the value is set within a range of "-4" to "-1" on the
printer driver menu. Note that when the setting value of this code is "0", the image quality will
not be changed even if the value is changed on the printer driver menu.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-117
3. Printer-specific Adjustments

3.24.3 To Print a Full-Color Original in Two Colors

To adjust the boundary between black and colors other than black
(1) Select [05 ADJUSTMENT MODE]. Change the values for codes [8213 to 8215] to adjust the boundary
between black and colors other than black.
* As the set value is increased, the area of "CHANGE BLACK TO" will become larger. On the other hand, if
the value is decreased, the area of "SECOND COLOR" will become larger.

Acceptable
Apply to [05] code Recommended value Default
value range
Text 8213 8
Increase the set value to
Graphic 8214 1 to 255 1
enlarge the black area.
Image 8215 1

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-118
 3. Printer-specific Adjustments

3.25 To Use ICC Profile

 Explanation
To interchange color images among several devices and reproduce precise color balance of the obtained images
on each device, ICC profiles are generally used. This section introduces setting items that become available with
the use of ICC profiles.
This function is available only for PS3 and XPS printer drivers of Windows and a PS3 printer driver of
Macintosh.

 Procedures
* The setting procedure differs depending on how the user wants to use ICC profiles. Follow the most suitable
procedure referring to the subsections " To Create ICC Profiles for Printing on the Paper to be Used ", "To Print
Precise Colors Using Existing RGB Source ICC Profiles", "To Perform Simulated Printing with CMYK Inks of
Each Ink Manufacturer", "To Print Using Custom RGB Profiles", "To Convert Colors with Specified Source
ICC Profiles (Not Using Embedded ICC Profiles)" or "To Perform Further Adjustment After Using ICC
Profiles", according to the request from the user.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-119
3. Printer-specific Adjustments

3.25.1 To Create ICC Profiles for Printing on the Paper to be Used

 Explanation
To create a new printer profile to be used when "Advanced" is selected in the "Image Quality Type" option, patch
printing for the printer must be performed but some users have difficulty to select the correct setting items on the
printer driver menu. To create a proper ICC profile with the correct print image, the suitable setting items must
be selected.

 Procedures
* Both the service technician and the user can perform all settings.

PS3 XPS

(1) Open the Properties page of the printer driver and then select the paper type on the "Paper Type" option on the
"Basic" tab menu.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-120
 3. Printer-specific Adjustments

PS3 XPS
(2) Select "Advanced" in the "Image Quality Type" option on the "Image Quality" tab menu and then click [Setting]. "

PS3 XPS
(3) Select the desired type of halftone on the "Halftone" option on the "Basic" tab menu.
* It is not recommended to select "Auto" on this option because several types of halftone may be used on the
same page.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-121
3. Printer-specific Adjustments

PS3 XPS
(4) Select the desired resolution level on the "Resolution" option.
* "1200 dpi" is selectable only for PS3 printer driver.

PS3 XPS
(5) Uncheck "Use Sharpness Filter" on the "Image Attribute" tab menu.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-122
 3. Printer-specific Adjustments

PS3 XPS
(6) Select "None" on the "CMYK Source Profile" option on the "Advanced" tab menu.
* At this step you can set any printer profile.

PS3 XPS
(7) Uncheck "Apply to Device Color Only".

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-123
3. Printer-specific Adjustments

PS3 XPS
(8) Print a color measurement patch to be used on the ICC profile creation software.

PS3 XPS
(9) Create the ICC profile following the operational procedure provided by the ICC profile creation software.

 Caution after the adjustment

Nothing in particular.

 Remarks
• Read the precautions provided by the ICC profile creation software carefully before starting printing.
• The correct image may not be printed on some paper types that are out of the MFP’s specifications.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-124
 3. Printer-specific Adjustments

3.25.2 To Print Precise Colors Using Existing RGB Source ICC Profiles

 Explanation
Some users use standard RGB color space ICC profiles that are disclosed and distributed by some websites when
they print RGB images in their computers with RGB color space which matches with one of the ICC profiles
they obtained from the website. This method is used, for example, when photo images must be printed with
Adobe RGB color space. Namely, when the user has a standard ICC profile that is most suitable for particular
images, he or she can apply this profile to the color conversion at the printing so that ideal print images whose
colors are precisely converted can be obtained.

 Procedures
* Both the service technician and the user can perform all settings.

PS3 XPS
(1) Create the desired printer profile using the ICC profile creation software.

PS3 XPS

(2) Access TopAccess and open the "Administration" tab menu. Then upload the desired RGB source profile and printer
profile.
• Follow (a) to (g) below to upload the profiles.
(a) Access TopAccess and open the "Administration" tab menu.
(b) Open the "Setup" menu and the "ICC Profile" submenu.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-125
3. Printer-specific Adjustments

(c) Click [Maintenance] for the desired profile.

* The Maintenance Destination Profiles page for the selected profile is displayed.

(d) Click [Browse] of "Import new Profile" to select a file for the profile. Then click [Import].

(e) Click [Previous].

* The display returns to the "ICC Profile" submenu.
(f) Click [Save].
* A confirmation dialog box is displayed.
(g) Click [OK].

* For the details of TopAccess, see the TopAccess Guide.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-126
 3. Printer-specific Adjustments

PS3 XPS
(3) Open the Properties page of the printer driver and then select "Advanced" on the "Image Quality Type" option on the
Image Quality" tab menu. Then click [Setting].

PS3 XPS
(4) Select the uploaded RGB profile on "RGB Source Profile" on the "Advanced " tab menu.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-127
3. Printer-specific Adjustments

PS3 XPS

(5) Select the profile of the printer uploaded in "Printer Profile" in the "Color profile" tab.

 Caution after the adjustment

Nothing in particular.

 Remarks
• Not all colors may be printed precisely because the color gamut reproducible with MFPs differs depending on
the models.
• The accuracy of color reproduction differs depending on printer profiles used.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-128
 3. Printer-specific Adjustments

3.25.3 To Perform Simulated Printing with CMYK Inks of Each Ink Manufacturer

 Explanation
ICC profiles for CMYK ink series provided by each ink manufacturer are disclosed and distributed by some
websites and some users want to make a simulated printing using one of these profiles. This simulation is
possible by using ICC profiles for CMYK ink of particular ink manufacturer as a CMYK source profile.

 Procedures
* Both the service technician and the user can perform all settings.

PS3 XPS

(1) Create the desired printer profile using the ICC profile creation software.

PS3 XPS
(2) Access TopAccess and open the "Administration" tab menu. Then upload the desired CMYK source profile and
printer profile.
• Follow (a) to (g) below to upload the profiles.
(a) Access TopAccess and open the "Administration" tab menu.
(b) Open the "Setup" menu and the "ICC Profile" submenu.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-129
3. Printer-specific Adjustments

(c) Click [Maintenance] for the desired profile.

* The Maintenance Destination Profiles page for the selected profile is displayed.

(d) Click [Browse] of "Import new Profile" to select a file for the profile. Then click [Import].

(e) Click [Previous].

* The display returns to the "ICC Profile" submenu.
(f) Click [Save].
* A confirmation dialog box is displayed.
(g) Click [OK].

* For the details of TopAccess, see the TopAccess Guide.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-130
 3. Printer-specific Adjustments

PS3 XPS
(3) Open the Properties page of the printer driver and then select "Advanced" on the "Image Quality Type" option on the
Image Quality" tab menu. Then click [Setting].

PS3 XPS
(4) Select the uploaded CMYK profile on "CMYK Source Profile" on the "Advanced" tab menu.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-131
3. Printer-specific Adjustments

PS3 XPS
(5) Select the profile of the printer uploaded in "Printer Profile" in the "Color profile" tab.

 Caution after the adjustment

Nothing in particular.

 Remarks
• Not all colors may be printed precisely because the color gamut reproducible with MFPs differs depending on
the models.
• The accuracy of color reproduction differs depending on printer profiles used.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-132
 3. Printer-specific Adjustments

3.25.4 To Print Using Custom RGB Profiles

 Explanation
In the service tool (e-BRIDGE Color Profile Tool V3.0), RGB source ICC profiles which meet the specific color
reproduction can be created.
By using this created profile, printing with a specific color reproduction is possible.

 Procedures
* Only the service technician must use step (1).
* Both the service technician and the user can use steps (2) or later.

PS3 XPS
(1) Create the RGB source ICC profile for the desired color reproduction using e-BRIDGE Color Profile Tool V3.0.

PS3 XPS
(2) Access TopAccess and open the "Administration" tab menu. Then upload the desired RGB source profile.
• Follow (a) to (g) below to upload the profile.
(a) Access TopAccess and open the "Administration" tab menu.
(b) Open the "Setup" menu and the "ICC Profile" sub menu.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-133
3. Printer-specific Adjustments

(c) Click [Maintenance] for the custom RGB profile.

* The Maintenance Destination Profiles page for the selected profile is displayed.

(d) Click [Browse] of "Import new Profile" to select a file for the profile. Then click [Import].

(e) Click [Previous].

* The display returns to the "ICC Profile" sub menu.
(f) Click [Save].
* A confirmation dialog box is displayed.
(g) Click [OK].

* For the details of TopAccess, see the TopAccess Guide.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-134
 3. Printer-specific Adjustments

PS3 XPS
(3) Open the Properties page of the printer driver and then select "Advanced" on the "Image Quality Type"
option on the "Image Quality" tab menu. Then click [Setting].

PS3 XPS

(4) Select the uploaded ICC profile on "Custom RGB profile" on the "Advanced" tab menu.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-135
3. Printer-specific Adjustments

 Caution after the adjustment

Nothing in particular

 Remarks
Not all colors may be printed precisely because the color gamut reproducible with MFPs differs depending on
the models.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-136
 3. Printer-specific Adjustments

3.25.5 To Convert Colors with Specified Source ICC Profiles (Not Using Embedded ICC Profiles)

 Explanation
When a user’s RGB images or CMYK images have embedded ICC profiles, the user can ignore the embedded
ICC profiles and apply a different ICC profile previously specified by the user, so that he or she can obtain print
images whose quality is equivalent to that of Fiery images.

 Procedures
* Both the service technician and the user can perform all settings.

PS3 XPS

(1) Create the desired printer profile using the ICC profile creation software.

PS3 XPS

(2) Access TopAccess and open the "Administration" tab menu. Then upload the desired RGB source profile, CMYK
source profile and printer profile.
• Follow (a) to (g) below to upload the profiles.
(a) Access TopAccess and open the "Administration" tab menu.
(b) Open the "Setup" menu and the "ICC Profile" submenu.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-137
3. Printer-specific Adjustments

(c) Click [Maintenance] for the desired profile.

* The Maintenance Destination Profiles page for the selected profile is displayed.

(d) Click [Browse] of "Import new Profile" to select a file for the profile. Then click [Import].

(e) Click [Previous].

* The display returns to the "ICC Profile" submenu.
(f) Click [Save].
* A confirmation dialog box is displayed.
(g) Click [OK].

* For the details of TopAccess, see the TopAccess Guide.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-138
 3. Printer-specific Adjustments

PS3 XPS
(3) Open the Properties page of the printer driver and then select "Advanced" on the "Image Quality Type" option on the
Image Quality" tab menu. Then click [Setting].

PS3 XPS

(4) Select the uploaded profile on "RGB Source Profile" or "CMYK Source Profile" on the "Advanced" tab
menu.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-139
3. Printer-specific Adjustments

PS3 XPS

(5) Uncheck "Apply to Device Color Only".

PS3 XPS
(6) Select the uploaded printer profile on "Profile" of the "Destination Profile" option.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-140
 3. Printer-specific Adjustments

 Caution after the adjustment

Nothing in particular.

 Remarks
Colors printed in this procedure may not be completely the same as those of Fiery images because the color
measurement method of this procedure is not completely equal to the one for Fiery.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-141
3. Printer-specific Adjustments

3.25.6 To Perform Further Adjustment After Using ICC Profiles

 Explanation
After printer profiles were applied by selecting "Advanced" on the "Image Quality Type" option on the printer
driver menu, a user can perform further image adjustments.

 Procedures
* Both the service technician and the user can perform all settings.

PS3 XPS

(1) Open the Properties page of the printer driver and then select "Advanced" on the "Image Quality Type" option on the
"Image Quality" tab menu. Then click [Setting].

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-142
 3. Printer-specific Adjustments

PS3 XPS
(2) Select the desired profiles on "RGB Source Profile", "CMYK Source Profile" or "Profile" of the "Destination
Profile" option.

PS3 XPS
(3) Open the "Color Balance" tab menu and then change each setting items to obtain the desired color balance.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-143
3. Printer-specific Adjustments

PS3 XPS
(4) Open the "Image Attribute" tab menu and then change each setting items to obtain the desired image quality.

 Caution after the adjustment

Nothing in particular.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-144
 3. Printer-specific Adjustments

3.26 To Improve the Reproducibility of Red Seal Color

Before After

 Explanation
When an original containing a red seal is printed, users can select the Red Seal Color Mode as the original mode.
Use this mode if the reproducibility of red seal color printed under the default settings is insufficient.

 Procedures
(1) Select [08 SETTING MODE]. Change the value for code [8005] to “1”.

(2) Select the “Red Seal Color Mode” check box on the printer driver.

For Windows
PCL6 PS3 XPS * This adjustment will only have an effect on Auto or Color mode printing.

Open the property page of the printer driver. Select “General” in the “Original Image Quality Type” box in
the “Image Quality” tab, and then press [Setting].
Mark the “Red Seal Color Mode” checkbox in the “Basic” tab.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-145
3. Printer-specific Adjustments

For Macintosh

Mac * This adjustment will only have an effect on Color mode printing.

Open the print dialog box. Select the "Color Settings 1" - “Red Seal Color Mode” check box.

After changing the setting on the printer driver, print the image and check its image quality.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-146
 3. Printer-specific Adjustments

3.27 To Suppress the Unevenness on Images

 Explanation
When the density of a halftone section looks uneven, this unevenness can be suppressed by changing the number
of screen lines.
With this adjustment, image quality in continuous copying can be more stable.

 Procedures
* Perform the adjustment in accordance with the procedures below.
* Both the service technician and the user can use procedure (1).
* Only the service technician must use procedure (2).

(1) Change the roughness of images in 600 dpi printing.

Use steps (a) through (f) to change the setting value.
(a) Press [USER FUNCTIONS] on the Control Panel to enter the "User Functions" menu.
(b) Press [ADMIN].
(c) Enter the 6 to 64 digit administrator password. Press [ENTER].
(d) Press [GENERAL].
(e) Press [ROUGHNESS OF PRINT].
(f) Press [LOW].

<Note>
This setting applies to print jobs with 600 dpi. Set this to color and black printing, respectively.

Changing the setting displays the CONFIRMATION screen that asks whether you want to perform calibration or
not. Be sure to select [OK] and carry it out.

(2) Select [08 SETTING MODE] and change the value.

* This procedure makes the same setting as step (1) in [08 SETTING MODE].

Color mode code Explanation

The number of screen lines can be set when “Smooth” is selected on
Full color 08-8110
“Halftone” of “Setting” in the “Image Quality” tab of the printer driver

Black 08-7310 0: High screen ruling value (smoother image)

1: Low screen ruling value (rougher image)

Make sure to perform automatic gamma adjustment after changing the value.

 Caution after the adjustment

When the low screen ruling is set, jaggedness may appear on diagonal or curved lines. In this case, check the
printed image and then switch the setting if necessary

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-147
3. Printer-specific Adjustments

3.28 To Suppress Color Misalignment

Before adjustment After adjustment

 Explanation
White voids in the background caused by off-registration of the text or graphics can be reduced and color
misalignment can be suppressed by the Auto Trapping adjustment. Use this mode if the effectiveness of the color
misalignment correction is to be enhanced.

 Procedures
* The service technician must perform all adjustments.

Enter [05 ADJUSTMENT MODE] and change the setting value for the code [8244]. First, change the setting
value of the subcode “0”. Only when the effect is insufficient even if the setting value of the subcode “0” is
changed to “3”, alter the one for the subcode “1”.

[05] Recommended Acceptable

Color mode Adjustment Subcode Default
Code value value range
Set the value to 3
Trap width (dot) 8244 0 1 to 3 2
(*1)
Auto/Color Set the value
Trap density 8244 1 smaller than 128 0 to 255 128
(*2)
*1 When a larger value is set, it will get stronger against a wider gap (off-registration); however, overlapped
areas will become more conspicuous.
*2 The smaller the value is, the darker the color becomes. In this case, the gaps will not become conspicuous;
however, overlapped areas will become more conspicuous.

 Caution after the adjustment

Perform the adjustment while checking the images, since the outline form of the boundary of the text or graphics
will be accentuated if the effectiveness of the trapping is enhanced.

 Remarks
Nothing
e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
3-148
 3. Printer-specific Adjustments

3.29 To Adjust Smudged Black Text and Black Thin Lines

Before adjustment After adjustment

 Explanation
Black text or black thin lines sometimes become thicker and thus are smudged. Use this mode to perform
printing while adjusting the thickness of black text or black thin lines.

 Procedures
* The service technician must perform all adjustments.

Change the setting values in [05 ADJUSTMENT MODE] to adjust smudged black text and black thin lines.
* The setting codes to be changed differ between the adjustment of the image quality in full color or twin color
printing and that for black-and-white printing. Select the adjustment procedure corresponding to the original
type to be printed.

To adjust the image quality in full color or twin color printing

("Auto", "Color" or "Twin Color" is selected from among the "Color" options on the PCL6 or PS3 or XPS
printer driver. Or "Auto", "Color" or "Twin Color" is selected from among the "Color Type" options on
Macintosh.)

* The "Color" options are available in the "Basic" tab on the PCL6, PS3 and XPS printer drivers. The "Color
Type" options are available in the "Color Settings 1" menu in the print dialog box on Macintosh.

<Notes>
This adjustment is available only when the resolution is 600dpi.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-149
 3.Printer-specific Adjustments

3.30 To Make Line Thickness Evenly. To Print Lines Clearly

Explanation
Perform this adjustment in the following cases.
- When printing the line thickness evenly
- When lines are not properly printed just as print data
- When printing colored thin lines or light-colored lines
- When making lines thicker or reducing jaggies

Before adjustment After adjustment

Before adjustment After adjustment

Adjustment type
Type Function to be affected
a Halftone adjustment (when changing per user) Print
b Resolution Print
c Graphic line width adjustment Print
d Image quality type Print
e Halftone applicable range adjustment Print

© 2018 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2010AC/2510AC/2515AC/3015AC/3515AC/4515AC/5015AC

3-149a
 3.Printer-specific Adjustments

a. Halftone adjustment (when changing per user)

Select [Detail] in the Halftone option in order to reproduce thin lines with a finer halftone.
You can reduce jaggies by selecting [Detail] in the Halftone options.

Printer driver
For Windows

Open the Properties page of the printer driver and then select [Advanced] in the [Image Quality] tab.
Select [Detail] in the Halftone option in the [Basic] tab.

© 2018 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2010AC/2510AC/2515AC/3015AC/3515AC/4515AC/5015AC

3-149b
 3.Printer-specific Adjustments

For Mac

Open the print dialog box and select [Color Settings 1]. Select [Detail] in the Halftone option.

© 2018 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2010AC/2510AC/2515AC/3015AC/3515AC/4515AC/5015AC

3-149c
3.Printer-specific Adjustments

b. Resolution

To reproduce thin lines by making the resolution level higher, press [Settings]. Select [1200dpi] in the
Resolution option in the [Basic] tab.
- [1200dpi] is selectable only for a PS printer driver.

e-STUDIO2010AC/2510AC/2515AC/3015AC/3515AC/4515AC/5015AC © 2018 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-149d
 3.Printer-specific Adjustments

c. Graphic line width adjustment

If the line thickness is too thin, its reproducibility can be improved by making it thicker. This adjustment will
have an effect when lines have been dotted because they are too thin.
Select the [Distinguish Thin Line] check box in the printer driver.

Printer driver
Select the [Distinguish Thin Line] check box in the printer driver.
For Windows

Open the Properties page of the printer driver and then select [Advanced] in the [Image Quality] tab.
Select the [Distinguish Thin Lines] check box in the [Basic] tab.

© 2018 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2010AC/2510AC/2515AC/3015AC/3515AC/4515AC/5015AC

3-149e
 3.Printer-specific Adjustments

For Mac

Open the print dialog box and select [Print Mode]. Select the [Distinguish thin lines] check box.

After the value is changed, perform printing and check the image quality.

Self-diagnosis code
You can make thin lines thicker with the following codes when the [Distinguish Thin Line] check box is
selected.
Resolution Color mode Code Recommended Acceptable Default value
value value range
600 dpi Common for Color 05-8240 Set a value larger 1 to 9 2
and Black than 2.
1200 dpi Common for Color 05-8241 Set a value larger 1 to 9 2
and Black than 2.
- The unit of the value is the number of dots (line thickness). Lines thinner than the value will become
thicker as specified.
- Set the value while checking the image until the optimum value is obtained.

Caution after the adjustment

- You cannot make lines thinner.
- Sometimes you cannot make lines thicker.
© 2018 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2010AC/2510AC/2515AC/3015AC/3515AC/4515AC/5015AC
3-149f
 3.Printer-specific Adjustments

d. Image Quality Type

Select [Line Art] which is suitable for printing images containing lots of lines.
- Since the halftone level of [Line Art] is a finer setting and can make printing darker, thin lines tend to
be reproduced.
- Color tones may be changed accordingly.

<Tip>
- This adjustment will only have an effect on printing files created by a general application, such as
Microsoft Office.
- This will have no effect on printing files created by graphics applications (e.g. Illustrator) or DTP
applications (e.g. QuarkXPress), or on printing PDF files with CMYK colors created on these
applications. In a Windows PS driver, this will have an effect by deselecting the [Use PostScript
Passthrough] check box in the PostScript Setting option in the [Others] tab. (This is not available in a
Mac printer driver.) In this case, the color tone may be changed and the image quality may be
diminished depending on the type of file. (when changing per user)
For Windows

* This adjustment will have an effect only on Auto or Color mode printing.

Open the Properties page of the printer driver and then change the setting in the Image Quality Type option
in the [Image Quality] tab.

© 2018 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2010AC/2510AC/2515AC/3015AC/3515AC/4515AC/5015AC

3-149g
 3.Printer-specific Adjustments

For Mac

* This adjustment will have an effect only on Color mode printing.

Open the print dialog box and select [Color Settings 1]. Change the setting of the Image Type option.

© 2018 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2010AC/2510AC/2515AC/3015AC/3515AC/4515AC/5015AC

3-149h
 3.Printer-specific Adjustments

e. Halftone applicable range adjustment

When [Auto] is set in the Halftone option in the printer driver, a rough halftone will be applied to graphics.
Since the settings of the screen can be changed from the MFP, it is not necessary to alter the settings of
printer drivers separately. If you want to apply the fine halftone setting to graphics in the above condition,
change the value of 05-7383-2 to “1” (Detail).

Halftone applicable range

Color Resolution Code Contents Subcode Recommended Acceptable Default
mode value value range value
Full 1200 dpi 05- Halftone 0 (Text) 1 0 to 1 1
Color/ 7383 change 1 (Graphic) 1 0: Smooth 0
Black when [Auto] 2 (Image) 0 1: Detail 0
is being set
- After the halftone setting has been changed, perform automatic calibration.
For details, refer to “Imaging Manual 1.1 (1)”.
- When the halftone setting for Graphic is changed, stepped gaps or discoloration tend to occur in areas
where colors have gradated smoothly.

© 2018 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO2010AC/2510AC/2515AC/3015AC/3515AC/4515AC/5015AC

3-149i
3. Printer-specific Adjustments

Enter [05 ADJUSTMENT MODE] and change the setting values for the codes from [8121] to [8126] to adjust
smudged black text and black thin lines.

Default
Acceptable e-
[05] Recommend e-
Resolution Color PDL value STUDIO2505
Code ed value STUDIO2
range AC/3005AC/3
000AC/25
505AC/4505A
00AC
C/5005AC
PS 8121 When a larger 2
Color PCL 8122 value than the 5
XPS 8123 default one is 5
600dpi set, black text 0 to 9 2
PS 8124 or black thin 2
Twin
PCL 8125 lines are thinly 5
Color
XPS 8126 printed. 5

To adjust the image quality in black-and-white printing

("Black and White" is selected from among the "Color" options on the PCL6 or PS3 or XPS printer driver.
Or "Mono" is selected from among the "Color Type" options on Macintosh.)

* The "Color" options are available in the "Basic" tab on the PCL6, PS3 and XPS printer drivers. The "Color
Type" options are available in the "Color Settings 1" menu in the print dialog box on Macintosh.

<Notes>
For e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC, this adjustment is available only when the resolution is 600dpi.

Enter [05 ADJUSTMENT MODE] and change the setting values for the codes from [7325] to [7327] or
[7305] to adjust smudged black text and black thin lines.

Default
Acceptab e-
[05] Recommende e-
Resolution Color PDL le value STUDIO2505
Code d value STUDIO2
range AC/3005AC/3
000AC/25
505AC/4505A
00AC
C/5005AC
PS 7325 2 2
When a larger
value than the
600dpi Black PCL 7326 default one is 2 5
set, black text or 0 to 9
XPS 7327 black thin lines 2 5
are thinly
printed.
1200dpi Black PS 7305 - 5

 Caution after the adjustment

Perform the adjustment while checking the printed images since faint black text or black thin lines may occur.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-150
4. e-Filing-specific Adjustments

4.1 To Clearly Store a B/W Image in the Auto Color Mode

After adjustment
After the threshold value was adjusted

Before adjustment

Stored in the Gray scale mode

The light image becomes blurred and text

becomes illegible.

Even the light image is not blurred. Text is

clear and legible.

 Explanation
When a black-and-white original containing black-and-white photo images is scanned in the Auto color mode
and stored in the e-Filing box (Scan to Box), it is stored with binary data, with reference to a threshold value.
This may make a dark area blurred and a light area eliminated. Adjust the threshold value, in order to clearly
store the black-and-white original in the Auto color mode.

* This adjustment will have an effect on the image stored using Scan to File and Scan to E-mail.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

4-1
4. e-Filing-specific Adjustments

 Procedures
* Both the service technician and the user can perform all adjustments.

Scan to Box * This adjustment will have an effect only on images stored in the Auto color mode.
(1) This adjustment is effective when you scan an original judged as a black image at the most appropriate
density level in the color modes.
• Use steps (a) to (d) to adjust the density.
(a) Press [USER FUNCTIONS] on the Control Panel to enter the "User Functions" menu.
(b) Press [USER].
(c) Press [SCAN].
(d) Press [ ] or [ ] of the "B/W ADJUSTMENT FOR STANDARD" option to adjust the density
level for scanning the original judged as a black image in the Auto color mode.
• If the density level is set to " ," the original will be stored with the low density.
• If the density level is set to " ," the original will be stored with the high density.

After adjusting the density, scan and store the original in the e-Filing box. Then check the image quality.
Only if the user’s desired image quality is still not obtained after the density has been adjusted, use the next
procedure.

Scan to Box * This adjustment will have an effect only on images stored in the Auto color mode.
(2) Select "HIGH QUALITY" from among the "IMAGE QUALITY FOR BLACK IN ACS" options, to store
the black-and-white original in the Gray scale mode.
• Use steps (a) to (d) to select the "IMAGE QUALITY FOR BLACK IN ACS" option.
(a) Press [USER FUNCTIONS] on the Control Panel to enter the "User Functions" menu.
(b) Press [USER].
(c) Press [SCAN].
(d) Press [HIGH QUALITY] in the "IMAGE QUALITY FOR BLACK IN ACS" option.

 Caution after the adjustment

All scanning functions are implemented with reference to the density and the "IMAGE QUALITY FOR BLACK
IN ACS" option. They will affect the image quality of black-and-white originals stored in the Auto color mode.
Therefore, carefully perform the adjustment, being aware that the image quality of all future images will be
changed, when storing originals other than the one that is used for the adjustment.

 Remarks
• If "HIGH QUALITY" is selected from among the "IMAGE QUALITY FOR BLACK" options and black-and-
white originals are scanned in the Auto color mode and stored in the e-Filing box (Scan to Box), this allows
them to be stored in the Gray scale mode rather than in the binary mode, and eventually provides better
halftones. The data will increase in size, compared to those in the binary mode.

• The adjustment of density will be effective, only if "STANDARD" is selected from among the "IMAGE
QUALITY FOR BLACK IN ACS" options.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

4-2
 4. e-Filing-specific Adjustments

4.2 To Store an Original while Reducing the File Size

Before adjustment After adjustment

Ex.: A4, 200 dpi, LOW = Approx. 1000 KB Ex.: A4, 200 dpi, HIGH = Approx. 400 KB

When "LOW" is from among the When "HIGH" is from among the
compression rate options, the file size will compression rate options, the file size will
become larger than required. be reduced.

 Explanation
When an original is scanned in the Full color or the Gray scale mode and stored in the e-Filing box (Scan to Box),
it will be compressed into JPEG format. The data compression rate can be selected on a job-by-job basis. The
file size significantly varies depending on the selected data compression rate. (When "LOW" is selected from
among the compression rate options, the file size will be 2 to 3 times larger than the one when "HIGH" is
selected.) When storing the original, if a higher priority is given to file size reduction than the image quality,
change the compression rate.

* This adjustment will have an effect on images stored using Scan to File and Scan to E-mail.

 Procedures
* Both the service technician and the user can perform all adjustments.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

4-3
4. e-Filing-specific Adjustments

Scan to Box * This adjustment will have an effect only on images (JPEG format) stored in the Full color mode (including the Auto
color mode) or the Gray scale mode.
(1) Select "HIGH" from among the compression rate options.
* "MID" is selected from among the compression rate options by default.

* The procedure to use varies, depending on whether to select the compression rate on a job-by-job basis
(without utilizing the template), utilize the template, or change the default compression rate. Refer to "To
select the compression rate on a job-by-job basis" in order to store an image at a high compression rate for
a particular job. Refer to "To utilize the template" in order to select an appropriate compression rate,
corresponding to the type of original to store and the purpose of the image stored. Refer to "To change the
default compression rate" in order to have "HIGH" selected from among the compression rate options by
default.

To select the compression rate on a job-by-job basis (without utilizing the template)
When scanning the original, press [SCAN SETTING] on the Control Panel. Select "HIGH" from among the
COMPRESS options.

To utilize the template

Recall the template where "HIGH" is selected from among the compression rate options and scan the
original.
* The user may want to select a compression rate, depending on the type of original or purpose of the image
stored. In this case, it is recommended to utilize the template. Initially, select the desired compression rate
in the template and recall it as necessary. This facilitates changing the compression rate on a job-by-job
basis. For further information regarding the template and its use, refer to the Operator’s Manual for
Scanning Guide and TopAccess Guide.

To change the default compression rate

Use steps (a) to (d) to change the default compression rate.
(a) Press [USER FUNCTIONS] on the Control Panel to enter the "User Functions" menu.
(b) Press [USER].
(c) Press [SCAN].
(d) Press [HIGH] in the "COMPRESS" option.

 Caution after the adjustment

Changing the default compression rate of the scanning functions will affect the quality of originals, which will be
stored in the Full color (including the Auto color) or the Gray scale mode. Carefully perform the adjustment,
being aware that the image quality of all future images will be changed, when storing originals other than the one
that is used for the adjustment.

 Remarks
If the full-color or gray-scale image is copied or printed and stored in the e-Filing box (Copy to Box or Print to Box), the
user can select a desired compression rate, when downloading the image using File Downloader on a client PC.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

4-4
 4. e-Filing-specific Adjustments

4.3 To Match the Color Balance on the Original

(To adjust the color balance in Print to Box)

Before adjustment After adjustment

Original image: Photograph Original image: Photograph

Print to Box Print to Box

e-Filing box (Image Quality Type: e-Filing box (Image Quality Type:
Photograph) General)

Stored Stored

Downloaded Downloaded

Client PC Client PC

Displayed on the Displayed on the

computer monitor computer monitor

The image stored in the e-Filing box looks The color balance of the image stored is closely
different in the color balance from the original. matched with that of the original.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

4-5
4. e-Filing-specific Adjustments

 Explanation
If a full-color image is printed on a client PC and stored in the e-Filing box (Print to Box), it will be optimized
for printing on paper. This is the reason why the image stored in the e-Filing box looks slightly different in the
color balance from the original displayed on the computer monitor. Change the "Image Quality Type" setting on
the printer driver, in order to minimize the difference in the color balance and closely match the color balance of
the image stored with that of the original.

 Procedures
* Both the service technician and the user can perform all adjustments.

Print to Box PCL5c PS3 * This adjustment will have an effect only on the image stored in the Auto mode or
XPS
the Color mode.
(1) Open the property page of the printer driver. Select "General" from among the "Image Quality Type"
options in the Image Quality tab.
* "General" allows the image to be stored in colors, which are closely matched with the original, compared
to the other Image Quality Type options.

 Caution after the adjustment

Nothing in particular.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

4-6
 4. e-Filing-specific Adjustments

4.4 To Scan and Print, while Minimizing Moiré

Before adjustment After adjustment

When the image stored in the e-Filing box is The image stored in the e-Filing box can be
printed, moiré is likely to occur. printed, while moiré is minimized.

 Explanation
An original is scanned and stored in the e-Filing box (Scan to Box). When the image stored is printed directly
from the e-Filing box, moiré may occur, depending on the type of original. Also, it is likely to occur, particularly
when the original is scanned in the Full color mode or the Auto color mode in a high resolution (600 dpi) or even
in the Gray scale mode. Select an appropriate scan resolution or adjust the sharpness intensity in the scanning
functions, in order to store the original and print it from the e-Filing box, while minimizing moiré.

 Procedures
* You can start with any of the procedures. But it is recommended to perform the procedures in order, as listed
below. You can use one procedure in conjunction with another. But if this changes the image quality more than
required or loses the effectiveness of the adjustment, restore the settings made in the previously used procedure
to the original ones. Then use other procedures.
* Both the service technician and the user can use procedures (1) to (3).
* Only the service technician must use procedure (4).

Scan to Box
(1) When scanning the original, press [SCAN SETTING] on the Control Panel. Select "PHOTO" from among
the original mode options.
* This adjustment will be effective, only if "TEXT" or "TEXT/PHOTO" is initially selected from among the
original mode options.

* This adjustment will have an effect only on the image stored in the Full color mode (including the Auto color
mode).

After changing the original mode, scan and store the original. Then print and check the print image quality.
If further image quality adjustments are still necessary, use other procedures.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

4-7
4. e-Filing-specific Adjustments

Scan to Box

(2) When scanning the original, press [SCAN SETTING] on the Control Panel. Select a lower resolution in the
resolution option.
* "200 (dpi)" is selected from among the resolution options by default. If moiré occurs in a resolution of 200
dpi, select a lower resolution (150 dpi is recommended.).

After changing the resolution, scan and store the original. Then print and check the print image quality.
If you do not prefer to decrease a resolution, or if moiré still occurs even in a lower resolution, use other
procedures.

Scan to Box

(3) When scanning, press [SCAN SETTING] on the Control Panel. Adjust the sharpness intensity.
• Press [+] on the indicator to increase the sharpness intensity or [-] to decrease it.

* The sharpness intensity is set to the center (±) by default. If moiré occurs by default, press [-] to decrease
the sharpness intensity.

After adjusting the sharpness intensity, scan and store the original. Then print and check the print image
quality.
With the sharpness intensity set to the minimum, if moiré still occurs, use other procedures.

Scan to Box

(4) Select [05 ADJUSTMENT MODE]. Change the values for codes [7430 to 7433], [7470], [8335], [8336],
[8354] and [8375] to adjust the sharpness intensity in the scanning functions.
* This adjustment will have an effect only on an image stored in the Full color mode or the Gray scale mode.

Acceptable
Color mode Original mode [05] code Recommended value Default
value range
Text/Photo 05-8354
Text 05-8335
Full color
Photo 05-8336
User custom 05-8375
Gray scale --- 05-7433 Set a value smaller than 128. 0 to 255 128
Text/Photo 05-7430
Text 05-7431
Black
Photo 05-7432
User custom 05-7470
* Setting "0" provides the softest image, while setting "255" provides the sharpest image.

 Caution after the adjustment

When the original containing text and lines is scanned and printed, the adjustment may possibly cause the
blurred text and lines or a blend of undesired colors. Therefore, carefully perform the adjustment, while
checking the scanned-in image or printout.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

4-8
 4. e-Filing-specific Adjustments

4.5 To Finely Print the Image Stored in the e-Filing box

(To print images stored through Copy to Box or Print to Box)

Before adjustment After adjustment

Copy to Box,
Print to Box
e-Filing box (Print data) Copy to Box,
Print to Box
(Print data)
Stored
e-Filing box

Downloaded
(Converted into RGB) Stored
Client PC

Stored
Print
(Print data)
Print
(Converted into
print data again)

If the image stored in the e-Filing box is If the image is printed out directly from the e-
downloaded to a PC and then printed out, the Filing box, the image quality will be
image data conversion may diminish the image maintained.
quality.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

4-9
4. e-Filing-specific Adjustments

 Explanation
If the original is copied or printed and stored in the e-Filing box (Copy to Box or Print to Box), and is printed out
by being downloaded to a client PC using File Downloader or the TWAIN driver, the image quality may be
diminished.
The image data stored in the e-Filing box (Copy to Box or Print to Box) are optimized for printing on paper.
However, they are converted for the computer monitor display after being downloaded to the PC. The quality of
the image may be diminished when it is printed out since the data optimized for display on the computer monitor
are not suitable for printing.
Therefore, images should be printed out directly from the e-Filing box, rather than being downloaded to the PC.

 Procedures
* Both the service technician and the user can perform all adjustments.

Copy to Box Print to Box

(1) Print out the image stored in the e-Filing box on the Control Panel or using the e-Filing Web utility.
* For further information regarding how to print it out, refer to the Operator’s Manual for e-Filing Guide.

<Note> Scan to Box Fax to Box

If the image is scanned or faxed and stored in the e-Filing box (Scan to Box or Fax to Box),
download it to the client PC once, select the desired Image Quality Type option on the printer
driver, and print it out, rather than printing it out directly from the e-Filing box. Then, the image
may be finely printed.
For further information regarding how to print full-color images scanned and stored, refer to 4.7
To Finely Print Color Images Scanned and Stored (To print images stored through Scan to Box).

 Caution after the adjustment

Nothing in particular.

 Remarks
When "Archive Document" of the e-Filing Web utility or "Backup" of the e-Filing Backup/Restore Utility is used,
image data stored in the e-Filing box can be converted to a file maintaining the image quality optimized for
printing. For example, you may want to temporarily move stored data to make some space in the box and save
them again in the box. When data are converted to a PDF or TIFF file and then moved using the File
Downloader, the image quality may be diminished. However, you can use Archive Document or Backup to
move the data while maintaining the image quality. The Backup feature can also collectively backs up all the
data in the e-Filing box. Note that files created through the Archive Document or Backup feature cannot be
directly opened on the PC or printed out. For further information regarding Archive Document and Backup,
refer to the e-Filing Guide.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

4-10
 4. e-Filing-specific Adjustments

4.6 To Store an Image Suitable for Displaying on the Monitor or

Image Editing
Before adjustment After adjustment

Copy to Box Scan to Box

(Print data) (RGB data)
e-Filing box e-Filing box

Stored Stored

Downloaded Downloaded
(Converted into RGB) (RGB data)
Client PC Client PC

Stored and Stored and

edited edited

Displayed on the Displayed on the

computer monitor computer monitor
(RGB data) (RGB data)

When the original is stored by Copy to Box, it The original is stored as RGB data by Scan to
is not suitable for monitor display since it is Box. This can avoid unnecessary data
optimized for printing on paper. This may conversion. As a result, the image quality can
diminish the image quality. be maintained.
e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
4-11
4. e-Filing-specific Adjustments

 Explanation
If a full-color original is copied or printed and stored in the e-Filing box (Copy to Box), and it is displayed on the
monitor by being downloaded to a client PC using File Downloader or the TWAIN driver, the image quality may
be diminished.
The image data stored in the e-Filing box (Copy to Box) are optimized for printing on paper. However, they are
converted for the computer monitor display after being downloaded to the PC. This may cause the colors to be
misaligned or grainy on the printout, so if the image is edited on the PC, its quality may be diminished.
To store a full-color original and display it on the computer monitor, while minimizing image degradation, scan
and store it in the e-Filing box (Scan to Box). This allows it to be stored as data optimized for display on the
computer monitor.

 Procedures
* Both the service technician and the user can perform all adjustments.

Scan to Box * This adjustment will have an effect only on the image stored in the Full color mode (including the Auto color mode).

(1) Scan the full-color image and store it in the e-Filing box.
* For further information regarding how to scan and store images, refer to the Operator’s Manual for e-Filing
Guide and Scanning Guide.

 Caution after the adjustment

Nothing in particular.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

4-12
 4. e-Filing-specific Adjustments

4.7 To Finely Print Color Images Scanned and Stored

(To print images stored through Scan to Box)

Before adjustment After adjustment

Scan to Box Scan to Box

(RGB data) (RGB data)

e-Filing box e-Filing box

Stored Stored

Ex: Printing image mode = Presentation Ex: Printing image mode = Photo

Print Print
(Converted into (Converted into
print data) print data)

Unless the printing image mode is selected, When the printing image mode suitable for the
printing may be performed with image stored data is selected, the data can be printed
processing not suitable for the stored data. finely with optimal image processing.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

4-13
4. e-Filing-specific Adjustments

 Explanation
When an image is scanned stored in the e-Filing box (Scan to Box) in the Full color or the Auto color mode, and
printed as it is (without the printing image mode set), printing may be performed with image processing not
suitable for the image, and the user may not obtain the desired image quality. To finely print a full-color image
scanned and stored, select the printing image mode (General/Photograph/Presentation/Line Art) suitable for the
image. Then, printing can be performed with image processing optimal for the image, in the same manner as
printing on the printer driver.

 Procedures
* Perform the adjustment in accordance with the procedures below.
* Both the service technician and the user can perform all adjustments.

Scan to Box * This adjustment will have an effect only on the image stored in the Full color mode (including the Auto color mode).

(1) Scan the full-color image and store it in the e-Filing box.
* For further information regarding how to scan and store images, refer to the Operator’s Manual for e-
Filing Guide and Scanning Guide.

Scan to Box

(2) Select a printing image mode suitable for the stored image.
• Use steps (a) to (d) to change the printing image mode.
(a) Press [USER FUNCTIONS] on the Control Panel to enter the "User Functions" menu.
(b) Press [USER].
(c) Press [E-FILING].
(d) Press the button for the mode suitable for the image in the [PRINTING IMAGE MODE] option.

* For further information regarding the features of each printing image mode, refer to the explanation of the
"Image Quality Type" options in Procedure (1) of 3.3 To Obtain the Desired Color Balance.

<Note> A change to the printing image quality mode will apply to all future printouts using the e-Filing
box. Carefully perform the adjustment while printing out images other than the one that is used
for the adjustment.

Scan to Box

(3) Print out the image stored in the e-Filing box on the Control Panel or using the e-Filing Web utility.
* For further information regarding how to print it out, refer to the Operator’s Manual for e-Filing Guide.

 Caution after the adjustment

Nothing in particular.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

4-14
 4. e-Filing-specific Adjustments

4.8 Appendix
* Perform the e-Filing setting according to the input and output methods of the data.

Chapter Purpose Input method Output method

To scan black images more clearly in the Auto color Displaying on a
4.1 Scan to Box
mode. computer monitor
Displaying on a
4.2 To scan an original while reducing its file size. Scan to Box
computer monitor
To match the color balance of the scanned image to Displaying on a
4.3 Print to Box
that of the original. computer monitor
4.4 To scan and print originals while avoiding Moiré. Scan to Box Printing on paper
To print images stored in e-Filing boxes more Copy to Box
4.5 Printing on paper
clearly. Print to Box
To scan images optimal for image processing or to Displaying on a
4.6 Scan to Box
be displayed on a computer monitor. computer monitor
To print color images stored with the scanning
4.7 Scan to Box Printing on paper
function more clearly.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

4-15
5. Scanning-specific Adjustments

5.1 To Clearly Scan Text (To reduce noise around text)

Before adjustment After adjustment

If the original is scanned in the Full color The image quality is maintained, while noise
mode or the Gray scale mode, noise may occur is being reduced.
in text or edges of a solid filled area.

 Explanation
When an original is scanned in the Full color or the Gray scale mode, the data compression may cause noise
(toner scattering) around text or the edges of a solid filled area. Adjust the compression rate or change the scan
resolution, in order to obtain a better scanned-in image, while reducing noise.

* This adjustment will have an effect on the image scanned in the Full color mode (including the Auto color
mode) or the Gray scale mode.

 Procedures
* You can start with any of the procedures. But it is recommended to perform the procedures in order, as listed
below. You can use one procedure in conjunction with another. But if this changes the image quality more than
required or loses the effectiveness of the adjustment, restore the settings made in the previously used procedure
to the original ones. Then use other procedures.
* Both the service technician and the user can use this procedure. However, step (3) in the procedure must be
performed only by the service technician.

(1) When scanning the original, press [SCAN SETTING] on the Control Panel. Select "LOW" from among the
compression rate options.
* [MID] is selected from among the compression rate options by default.

After changing the compression rate, scan the original and check the scanned-in image quality.
If further image quality adjustments are still necessary, use procedure (2).

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

5-1
5. Scanning-specific Adjustments

(2) When scanning the original, press [SCAN SETTING] on the Control Panel. Select a higher resolution in the
resolution option.
* "200 (dpi)" is selected from among the resolution options by default. If noise occurs in a resolution of 200
dpi, select a higher resolution (300 dpi, 400 dpi or 600 dpi).

After changing the resolution, scan the original and check the scanned-in image quality.
If further image quality adjustments are still necessary, use procedure (1).

(3) Select [05 ADJUSTMENT MODE]. Change the value for the code [8304] to change the JPEG compression ratio.
Compression Recommended Acceptable
[05] code Subcode Default
ratio value range value
Set a value smaller
High quality 0
than 128 for higher
compression ratio.
Standard 05-8304 1 0 to 255 128
Set a value larger
than 128 for lower
Low quality 2
compression ratio.

 Caution after the adjustment

• The adjustment of the compression rate or resolution may possibly increase the size of the file to be stored.
Therefore, carefully perform the adjustment, while checking the scanned-in image quality. The table below
shows you the correlation between a resolution and file size. (The ratio of the file size may vary depending on
the type of original. Therefore, use the table below just for your reference.)
* The file size in a resolution of 200 dpi is 1.
Resolution File size ratio
200 dpi 1
300 dpi Approx. × 2
400 dpi Approx. × 3
600 dpi Approx. × 8

• If the resolution selected in procedure (2) is too high, moiré may possibly occur in the scanned-in image.
Therefore, carefully adjust the resolution, while checking the scanned-in image.

 Remarks
Use the following steps to change the default compression rate and resolution options:
(a) Press [USER FUNCTIONS] on the Control Panel to enter the "User Functions" menu.
(b) Press [USER].
(c) Press [SCAN].
(d) In the " COMPRESS" or "RESOLUTION" option, press the button corresponding to the desired
compression rate or resolution option.

* The default resolution can be selected on a color mode basis: Full color mode (including the Auto color
mode), Gray scale mode and Black mode.
• The following resolution options are available as the default:
• Full color mode (including the Auto color mode): 600 / 400 / 300 / 200 / 150 / 100 (dpi)
• Gray scale mode: 600 / 400 / 300 / 200 / 150 / 100 (dpi)
• Black mode: 600 / 400 / 300 / 200 / 150 / 100 (dpi)

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

5-2
 5. Scanning-specific Adjustments

5.2 To Scan an Original, while Eliminating the Background Color

(To eliminate the background density)

Before adjustment After adjustment

The background color of the original is also The background color is eliminated, allowing
scanned. Therefore, no clear contrast is made clear contrast between the background and
between the background and image. image.

 Explanation
When an original with a background is scanned, such as a newspaper and colored paper, the background color is
also scanned. Therefore, no clear contrast is made between the background and image. Perform background
adjustment, in order to clearly scan such originals.

* This adjustment will have an effect on the image scanned in all color modes.

 Procedures
* You can start with any of the procedures. But it is recommended to perform the procedures in order, as listed
below. You can use one procedure in conjunction with another. But if this changes the image quality more than
required or loses the effectiveness of the adjustment, restore the settings made in the previously used procedure
to the original ones. Then use other procedures.
* Both the service technician and the user can use procedure (1) and (2).
* Only the service technician must use procedure (3).

(1) Set the density adjustment method to the automatic adjustment by pressing [AUTO] of the "EXPOSURE"
option.

(2) When scanning the original, press [SCAN SETTING] on the Control Panel. Press [BACKGROUND
ADJUSTMENT]. Press [ ] to decrease the background density.

After decreasing the background density, scan the original and check the scanned-in image quality.
With the background density set to the minimum, if further image quality adjustments are still necessary, the
service technician must use the next procedure.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

5-3
5. Scanning-specific Adjustments

(3) Select [05 ADJUSTMENT MODE]. Change the values for codes [7436 to 7439], [7441], [8309 to 8311] and
[8370] to decrease the background density.
• The code to use varies depending on original mode. Adjust the value for [05] code corresponding to the
color mode for which you would like to improve the image quality.
Acceptable
Color mode Original mode [05] code Recommended value Default
value range
Text/Photo 05-8309
Text 05-8310
Full color
Photo 05-8311
User custom 05-8370
Gray scale --- 05-7439 Set a value smaller than 128. 0 to 255 128
Text/Photo 05-7436
Text 05-7437
Black
Photo 05-7438
User custom 05-7441
* The setting value "25" corresponds to one step in the background adjustment on the control panel.

*The background density will become the lowest, if "0" is set. On the other hand, it will become the highest,
if "255" is set. Changing the value will also change the background density, when the "Background
Adjustment" indicator is set to the center. Then, if the background density of the center value is changed,
each step of the indicator will be changed accordingly. (For instance, if the center value is decreased by 5
(lighter), the value of each step of the indicator will also be decreased by 5 (lighter)).

 Caution after the adjustment

The adjustment may possibly diminish the quality of the light-colored image. Therefore, carefully perform the
adjustment, while checking the scanned-in image.

 Remarks
When scanning the original, use the following steps to change the default indicator position in the background
adjustment option, which is displayed on the Control Panel:
(a) Press [USER FUNCTIONS] on the Control Panel to enter the "User Functions" menu.
(b) Press [USER].
(c) Press [SCAN].
(d) Press [Next] twice to display the menu to change the initial values for the Full color and Auto color modes.
(e) Select the default background density in the "BACKGROUND ADJUSTMENT" option.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

5-4
 5. Scanning-specific Adjustments

5.3 To Clearly Scan and Print an Original in Black and White

(To improve gradation and reduce graininess)

Before adjustment After adjustment

If the original is scanned in the Black mode, The halftones of the scanned-in image are
the halftones may become blurred in black. clearly printed out.

 Explanation
If an original is scanned in the Black mode, a difference in the density level of the halftones cannot be accurately
scanned. As a result, it may become blurred in black or grained. Scan a black-and-white original in the Gray
scale mode, in order to scan and print it out in black and white more clearly.

 Procedures
* Both the service technician and the user can perform all adjustments.

(1) When scanning the original, press [SCAN SETTING] on the Control Panel. Select "GRAY SCALE" from
among the color mode options.

 Caution after the adjustment

The adjustment may possibly increase the size of the file to be stored. Therefore, carefully perform the
adjustment, while checking the scanned-in image quality. The correlation between color mode and file size is as
described below. (The ratio of the file size may vary depending on the type of original. Therefore, use the
description below just for your reference.)

* Ratio of the file size in the Black mode to the Gray scale mode
• If the file size in the Black mode with the Text mode selected is 1, it will be increased to approximately 7 times
in the Gray scale mode.
• If the file size in the Black mode with the Photo mode selected is 1, it will be approximately doubled in the
Gray scale mode.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

5-5
5. Scanning-specific Adjustments

5.4 To Scan the Original, while Reducing the File Size

Before adjustment After adjustment

Approx. 600 KB Approx. 100 KB

Approx. 200 KB Approx. 30 KB

Approx. 900 KB Approx. 150 KB

Approx. Approx.
550 KB 90 KB

* The above file sizes are just for your reference. * The above file sizes are just for your reference.

If the original is constantly scanned at the If the original is scanned at a reasonable

default compression rate, the file size may compression rate, depending on the purpose of
become larger than required. the scanned-in image, the file size will be
successfully reduced.

 Explanation
If an original is scanned in the default resolution and at the default compression rate, a proper image will be
obtained for general purposes. But the file size may become larger than required. The file size of the scanned-in
image significantly varies, depending on the selected resolution or compression rate. If an appropriate resolution
and a compression rate are selected in accordance with the purpose of the original, the image quality will be
maintained, while the file size is being reduced. Change the resolution, original mode, or compression rate or
perform the background adjustment, in order to minimize the file size of the scanned-in image.
The product offers the "Slim PDF" function. This will diminish the image quality but reduce the file size to
approximately 1/8 to 1/10, compared to the scanned-in image (300dpi, compression rate: MID) in JPEG format.

 Procedures
* The procedure to use varies, depending on whether to reduce the file size by changing the options when
scanning the original or in Slim PDF. Refer to "To Reduce the File Size by Changing the Options when
Scanning the Original" in order to reduce the file size without changing the file format. Refer to "To Reduce
the File Size in Slim PDF" in order to give a higher priority to the file size reduction than the image quality.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

5-6
 5. Scanning-specific Adjustments

5.4.1 To Reduce the File Size by Changing the Options when Scanning the Original

* You can start with any of the procedures. But it is recommended to perform the procedures in order, as listed
below. You can use one procedure in conjunction with another. But if this changes the image quality more than
required or loses the effectiveness of the adjustment, restore the settings made in the previously used procedure
to the original ones. Then use other procedures.
* Both the service technician and the user can use this procedure. However, step (5) in the procedure must be
performed only by the service technician.

(1) When scanning the original, press [SCAN SETTING] on the Control Panel. Select a lower resolution in the
resolution option.
* "200 (dpi)" is selected from among the resolution options by default. Select a lower resolution option (100
dpi or 150 dpi) to reduce the file size.

* This adjustment will have an effect on an image scanned in all color modes (Full color, Gray scale, Black
and Auto color).

After changing the resolution, scan the original and check the scanned-in image quality.
If further image quality adjustments are still necessary, use other procedures.

(2) When scanning the original, press [SCAN SETTING] on the Control Panel. Select "TEXT" from among the
original mode options.
* Perform this adjustment, only if a black-and-white original containing no photo images is scanned or if
degradation in the photo image quality is acceptable.

* This adjustment will be effective, only if [TEXT/PHOTO] or [PHOTO] is initially selected from among
the original mode options.

* This adjustment will have an effect only on an image scanned in the Black mode.

After changing original mode, scan the original and check the scanned-in image quality.
If further image quality adjustments are still necessary, use other procedures.

(3) When scanning the original, press [SCAN SETTING] on the Control Panel. Select "HIGH" from among the
compression rate options.
* [MID] is selected from among the compression rate options by default.

* This adjustment will have an effect only on an image scanned in the Full color mode (including the Auto
color mode) or the Gray scale mode.

After changing the compression rate, scan the original and check the scanned-in image quality.
If further image quality adjustments are still necessary, use other procedures.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

5-7
5. Scanning-specific Adjustments

(4) When scanning the original, press [SCAN SETTING] on the Control Panel. Press [BACKGROUND
ADJUSTMENT]. Press [ ] to decrease the background density. Then select "HIGH" from among the
compression rate options.
* This adjustment will be effective, only if the original with a color background, such as a newspaper and
color paper, is scanned.

* This adjustment will have an effect only on the image scanned in the Full color mode (including the Auto
color mode) or the Gray scale mode.

After decreasing the background density and changing the compression rate, scan the original and check the
scanned-in image quality.
With the background density set to the minimum, if further image quality adjustments are still necessary, use
other procedures.

(5) Select [05 ADJUSTMENT MODE]. Change the value for the code [8304] to change the JPEG compression ratio.

Compression Recommended Acceptable

[05] code Subcode Default
ratio value range value
Set a value smaller
High quality 0
than 128 for higher
compression ratio.
Standard 05-8304 1 0 to 255 128
Set a value larger
than 128 for lower
Low quality 2
compression ratio.

 Caution after the adjustment

• The table below shows you the correlation between the adjustment and file size. (The ratio of the file size may
vary, depending on the type of original. Therefore, use the table below just for your reference.)

• Correlation between the resolution and the file size (procedure (1))
* The file size in a resolution of 200 dpi is 100%.
Resolution File size ratio
200 dpi 100%
150 dpi Approx. 60%
100 dpi Approx. 30%

• Correlation between the original mode and the file size (procedure (2))
* The file size in the Photo mode is 100%.
Original mode File size ratio
Photo 100%
Text Approx. 20%

• Correlation between the compression rate and the file size (procedure (3))
* The file size is 100%, with [MID] selected.
Compression rate File size ratio
MID 100%
HIGH Approx. 80%

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

5-8
 5. Scanning-specific Adjustments

• The adjustment may possibly diminish the image quality, as shown by the table below. Therefore, carefully
perform the adjustment, while checking the scanned-in image.
Procedures used Possible image degradation
Any of procedures from (1) to (4) The photo image area may be blurred.
(1) or (3) Noise may be increase around text.
(1) or (3) Small-sized text may become illegible.
(4) Light-colored images may not be clearly scanned.

 Remarks
• Use the following steps to change the default resolution, original mode, compression rate and/or background
adjustment options:
(a) Press [USER FUNCTIONS] on the Control Panel to enter the "User Functions" menu.
(b) Press [USER].
(c) Press [SCAN].
(d) Press the Next button several times to display the screen to change the default value in the desired Color
mode.
(e) In the "RESOLUTION," "ORIGINAL MODE," " COMPRESS" and/or "BACKGROUND
ADJUSTMENT" option, press the desired button to change the default.

* The default resolution can be selected on a color mode basis: Full color mode (including the Auto color
mode), Gray scale mode and Black mode
• The following resolution options are available as the default:
• Full color mode (including Auto color mode): 600 / 400 / 300 / 200 / 150 / 100 (dpi)
• Gray scale mode: 600 / 400 / 300 / 200 / 150 / 100 (dpi)
• Black mode: 600 / 400 / 300 / 200 / 150 / 100 (dpi)

• Remember that when scanning the original in the Full color mode, if the original mode option is switched from
the Text/Photo mode or the Photo to the Text mode, the file size may become larger.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

5-9
5. Scanning-specific Adjustments

5.4.2 To Reduce the File Size in Slim PDF

* Both the service technician and the user can use procedure (1).
* The service technician must use only procedure (2) in [05 ADJUSTMENT MODE] (step (b) "To reduce the
blurred area of text and photos"). Both the service technician and the user can use other procedures.

<Note> • Slim PDF will be available only if "FILE", "USB", or "SCAN TO E-MAIL" is selected in scan
mode to scan the original in the Full color mode or the Gray scale mode.

• The image quality or file size in Slim PDF may be more affected than in JPEG or PDF,
depending on the environment (original placing direction) when the original is scanned. In
addition, the scanning will be slowed down.

• Slim PDF is not suitable for the following originals. It is recommended to scan them in JPEG
or PDF.
• Originals blurred when scanned in JPEG or PDF
(If the original is scanned in Slim PDF, the image quality may be further diminished)
• Complicated originals such as tables or maps containing lines or small-sized text
• Originals where stable image quality is required, such as critical documents

(1) When scanning the original, press [SLIM PDF] on the Control Panel.

After adjusting the original in Slim PDF, scan the original and check the scanned-in image quality.
If the image quality adjustment in Slim PDF is necessary, use the next procedure.

(2) Adjust the image quality in Slim PDF at a user’s request.

To reduce the blurred area of text and photos

Use steps (a) to (b) to perform the adjustment.

(a) Turn the original and place it. Or when scanning the original, press [SCAN SETTING] on the
Control Panel. Change the "ROTATION" option to turn the original.

After changing the "ROTATION" option, scan the original and check the scanned-in image quality.
If further image quality adjustments are still necessary, the service technician must use the next procedure.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

5-10
 5. Scanning-specific Adjustments

(b) Select [05 ADJUSTMENT MODE]. Change the values for code [9104] and [9107] to adjust the
image quality and resolution of a background.
Recommended
[05] code Acceptable value range Default
value
05-9104 5 0 to 10 5
05-9107 1 or 2 0 to 3 1
* Changing the value provides the effects below. Enter the value within the recommended value range.
Otherwise, it may cause a loss in MFP performance, including degradation in the image quality.
Set a smaller value: High compression (small file size), low image quality, and high scanning speed
Set a later value: Low compression (large file size), high image quality, and low scanning speed

To leave the color of text as it is

Use steps (a) to (b) to perform the adjustment.

(a) Turn the original and place it. Or when scanning the original, press [SCAN SETTING] on the
Control Panel. Change the "ROTATION" option to turn the original.

After changing the "ROTATION" option, scan the original and check the scanned-in image quality.
If further image quality adjustments are still necessary, use the next procedure.

(b) When scanning the original, press [SCAN SETTING] on the Control Panel. Press [-] to decrease the
sharpness intensity.
* Decrease the sharpness intensity by 1 step from the current value.

To eliminate the background density

Use steps (a) to (b) to perform the adjustment.

(a) When scanning the original, press [SCAN SETTING] on the Control Panel. Press [ ] to decrease
the background density.

After decreasing the background density, scan the original and check the scanned-in image quality.
Only if the user’s desired image quality is still not obtained after the above procedure has been performed,
scan the original in JPEG or PDF.

 Caution after the adjustment

The adjustment may possibly cause blurred text, noise or vary the hues of areas. Therefore, carefully perform
the adjustment, while checking the scanned-in image quality.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

5-11
5. Scanning-specific Adjustments

5.5 To Sharply Scan the Original (To increase the sharpness intensity)

Before adjustment After adjustment

The image looks too soft and blurred. The edges are enhanced. The image looks sharp.

 Explanation
Adjust the sharpness intensity, in order to sharply scan the soft and blurred original.

* This adjustment will have an effect on the image scanned in all color modes (Full color, Gray scale, Black and Auto
color).

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

5-12
 5. Scanning-specific Adjustments

 Procedures
* You can start with any of the procedures. But it is recommended to perform the procedures in order, as listed
below. You can use one procedure in conjunction with another. But if this changes the image quality more than
required or loses the effectiveness of the adjustment, restore the settings made in the previously used procedure
to the original ones. Then use other procedures.
* Both the service technician and the user can use procedure (1).
* Only the service technician must use procedure (2).

(1) When scanning the original, press [SCAN SETTING] on the Control Panel. Press [+] to increase the
sharpness intensity.

After increasing the sharpness intensity, scan the original and check the scanned-in image quality.
With the sharpness intensity set to the maximum, if further image quality adjustments are still necessary, the
service technician must use the next procedure.

(2) Select [05 ADJUSTMENT MODE]. Change the values for codes [7430 to 7433],[7470], [8335], [8337],
[8354] and [8375] to adjust the sharpness intensity.
Acceptable
Color mode Original mode [05] code Recommended value Default
value range
Text/Photo 05-7430
Text 05-7431
Black
Photo 05-7432
User custom 05-7470
Text/Photo 05-8354 Set a value larger than 128. 0 to 255 128
Text 05-8335
Full color
Photo 05-8336
User custom 05-8375
Gray scale --- 05-7433
* Setting "0" provides the softest image, while setting "255" provides the sharpest image.

 Caution after the adjustment

The adjustment may possibly cause moiré. In addition, when text and thin lines in a light-colored background
are scanned, the background around the text or line may be eliminated. Therefore, carefully perform the
adjustment, while checking the scanned-in image.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

5-13
5. Scanning-specific Adjustments

5.6 To Scan an Original, while Enhancing Black

Before adjustment After adjustment

Scan Scan

Black is not dark enough, compared to the Black is enhanced and closely matched with
original. the original hue.

 Explanation
When a full-color original is scanned, black is not dark enough, compared to the original. (In general, the
scanned-in image is likely to become less dark.) Finely adjust the black density of the scanned-in image, in order
to darken black and closely match it with the original hue.

* This adjustment will have an effect only on the image scanned in the Full color mode (including the Auto color
mode).

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

5-14
 5. Scanning-specific Adjustments

 Procedures
* The service technician must perform all adjustments.

(1) Select [05 ADJUSTMENT MODE]. Change the values for codes [8314 to 8316] and [8371] to adjust the
black density of a scanned-in image.
Acceptable
Color mode Original mode [05] code Recommended value Default
value range
Text/Photo 05-8314 Set a value larger than 1. 0 to 4 1
Text 05-8315
Full color
Photo 05-8316 Set a value larger than 0. 0 to 4 0
User custom 05-8371
* Setting "0" provides the lightest black, while setting "4" the darkest.

 Caution after the adjustment

The adjustment may possibly provide the extremely dark background. Therefore, carefully perform the
adjustment, while checking the scanned-in image.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

5-15
5. Scanning-specific Adjustments

5.7 To Scan an Original with the Desired Gradation

Before adjustment

The image is scanned with natural gradation.

(Default scanning)

After adjustment After adjustment

Gradation is decreased. Gradation is increased.

 Explanation
When an original is scanned in the Black mode or the Gray scale mode, changing the scan density according to
density area (low-, medium- or high-density area) allows a user to adjust the reproducibility of halftones
(gradation). Adjust the gamma curve balance, in order to change the gradation, depending on the type of original
or at a user’s request.

* This adjustment will have an effect only on the image scanned in the Black mode or the Gray scale mode.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

5-16
 5. Scanning-specific Adjustments

 Procedures
* The service technician must perform all adjustments.

(1) Select [05 ADJUSTMENT MODE]. Change the values for codes [7480] and [7485 to 7488] to adjust the
gamma curve balance of the low-, medium- and high-density areas.
Acceptable
Color mode Original mode [05] code Subcode Recommended value Default
value range
Text/Photo 05-7485 0/1/2

Text 05-7486 0/1/2 Set a value smaller than 128

Black to decrease the density.
Photo 05-7487 0/1/2 0 to 255 128
Set a value larger than 128
User custom 05-7480 0/1/2 to increase the density.
Gray scale --- 05-7488 0/1/2

* Set the value in increments of approximately 20, while checking the scanned-in image until the optimum
value is obtained.

* The subcode varies according to the area where the density is adjusted. Refer to the table below and set the
subcode for the area to be adjusted.
Subcode Area where the density is adjusted
0 Low-density area
1 Medium-density area
2 High-density area

* Gradation in the Black mode will vary, if the medium-density area is mainly adjusted. But remember that
adjusting the low- or high-density area will rarely affect the gradation in the Black mode.

 Caution after the adjustment

Nothing in particular.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

5-17
5. Scanning-specific Adjustments

5.8 To Register the Original Mode Optimal for a Particular Type of Original
(To have "Custom" selected)

 Explanation
If the value for [05] code is adjusted in existing original mode (Text /Photo, Text, Photo or Gray scale), in order
to clearly scan a particular type of original, other types of original may not be clearly scanned. In this case, add
the original mode option adjusted for a particular type of original as "Custom (User custom)" mode. To have
"Custom" selected, add the value adjusted for [05] code in "Custom" mode to the one in reference original mode.
Select reference original mode for "Custom" from among the original mode options.
To have "Custom" in the Black mode, select the existing original mode option as reference original mode.
To have "Custom" in the Full color mode (including the Auto color mode) selected, select the existing original
mode or "e-document" mode option where the value has been adjusted to identify whiteout areas, as reference
original mode.

* e-document: This is the mode that corresponds to the law in Japan.

* This adjustment will have an effect only on the image scanned in the Black mode or the Full color mode
(including the Auto color mode).

 Procedures
* Perform the adjustment in accordance with the procedures below.
* Only the service technician must use procedures (1) and (2).
* Both the service technician and the user can use procedure (3).

(1) Select [08 SETTING MODE]. Change the value for code [7401] or [8303] to select reference original mode
for "Custom" mode from among the original mode options.
• Select the original mode option, which is most likely to be matched with the image quality the user desires.

For the Black mode

Value for 08-7401 Reference original mode
0 Reserved (Default)
1 Text/Photo
2 Text
3 Photo

For the Full color mode

Value for 08-8303 Reference original mode
0 Reserved (Default)
1 Text/Photo
2 Text
3 Photo
4 e-document

After selecting the reference original mode option, use the next procedure.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

5-18
 5. Scanning-specific Adjustments

(2) Select [05 ADJUSTMENT MODE] to adjust the values in the Custom mode, in order to obtain the image
quality the user desires.
• Select the necessary value for [05] code in the table below.
Acceptable
Color mode [05] code Adjustment Default
value range
Range correction (Automatic density
05-7425 1
adjustment)
0 to 1
Range correction (Manual density
05-7426 0
adjustment)
05-7441 Background adjustment 128
05-7470 Sharpness adjustment 128
Black 05-7475 Manual density adjustment center value 0 to 255 128
05-7478 Automatic density adjustment 128
05-7480 Gamma curve balance adjustment 128
Background processing offset adjustment
05-8404 128
(Automatic density adjustment)
0 to 255
Background processing offset adjustment
05-8409 128
(Manual density adjustment)
Range correction adjustment (Automatic
05-8334 1
density adjustment)
0 to 1
Range correction adjustment (Manual
05-8365 0
density adjustment)
05-8370 Background adjustment 0 to 255 128
05-8371 Fine adjustment of black density 0 to 4 0
05-8372 RGB conversion method selection 0 to 3 0
05-8373 Saturation adjustment 128
Full color
05-8375 Sharpness adjustment 128
05-8380 Manual density adjustment center value 128
05-8381 Manual density adjustment light step value 0 to 255 20
05-8382 Manual density adjustment dark step value 20
Background processing offset adjustment
05-8389 128
(Automatic density adjustment)
Background processing offset adjustment
05-8394 128
(Manual density adjustment)
* For further information regarding the codes, refer to the Service Manual.

<Note> Select the code for the Custom mode option, in order to adjust the value for [05] code in the
Custom mode. Never adjust any values for [05] code in existing original mode.

After adjusting the value in the Custom mode, use the next procedure.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

5-19
5. Scanning-specific Adjustments

(3) When scanning the original, press [SCAN SETTING] on the Control Panel. Select "Custom" from among
the original mode options.

 Caution after the adjustment

Nothing in particular.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

5-20
 5. Scanning-specific Adjustments

5.9 To Eliminate Shading around Scanned Images

 Explanation
The white void amount around the scanned image is adjusted. Since the void amount is very small in the stored
image in scanning, shading may appear around the scanned image due to a slight difference of the original size.
This can be eliminated by adjusting the setting value.

* The setting value is applied to all resolutions and color modes.

 Procedures
* All the steps in the adjustment procedure shall be performed by the service technician.

(1) Select [05 ADJUSTMENT MODE]. Change the value for the code [7489] to adjust the white void amount
around the scanned image.

Acceptable
[05] code Setting value (Target) Default
value range
The setting value "1" corresponds to 1 dot with 600
05-7489 0 to 255 0
dpi, that is "24" to 1 mm.

* When the value increases, the white void around the scanned image becomes wider, and the data on the image
decrease.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

5-21
5. Scanning-specific Adjustments

5.10 To Scan Yellow Clearly

Before adjustment After adjustment

 Explanation
When a color original is scanned, adjustment can be made for clear reproduction of a vivid yellow as shown
above.

 Procedures
* Perform the adjustment in accordance with the procedures below.
* Both the service technician and the user can use all steps of this adjustment.

(1) To use the Text/Photo mode

After adjusting, perform scanning and check its image quality.
If the color does not become fine in the Text/Photo mode, perform the following steps.

(2) Press [SCAN] on the control panel, and then [+] in [SATURATION] to increase the saturation of the copy
image.
<Note>
• This increases the saturation not only for yellow but also for other colors.

After adjusting the saturation, copy and check the copy image quality.
If the yellow does not become vivid even though the saturation is increased, try the next procedure.

(3) Press [SCAN] on the control panel, and perform color balance adjustment.

To scan reddish yellow clearly

Use steps (a) through (c) to perform the adjustment.
(a) Set G (green) to [+] side in Color Balance.
(b) Set R (red) to [-] side in Color Balance.
(c) Set the color balance with a combination of both (a) and (b).

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

5-22
 5. Scanning-specific Adjustments

To scan greenish yellow clearly

Use steps (a) through (c) to perform the adjustment.
(a) Set R (red) to [+] side in Color Balance.
(b) Set G (green) to [-] side in Color Balance.
(c) Set the color balance with a combination of both (a) and (b).

To scan yellow more vividly

Use steps (a) through (c) to perform the adjustment.
(a) Set B (blue) to [-] side in Color Balance.
(b) Set R (red) and G (green) to [+] side in Color Balance.
(c) Set the color balance with a combination of both (a) and (b).

<Note>
• This adjustment influences not only yellow but also other colors.

After adjusting the color balance, copy and check the copy image quality.

 Caution after the adjustment

Nothing in particular.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

5-23
5. Scanning-specific Adjustments

5.11 To Reduce Streaks in Scanning with DF

Before adjustment After adjustment

<---- Paper feeding direction <---- Paper feeding direction

 Explanation
If streaks occur in scanning with the DF, this problem can be solved by cleaning the original glass in the DF.
Moreover, they can be made inconspicuous by changing the setting of the following self-diagnostic code.

 Procedures
* Perform the steps in order as listed below.
* Both the service technician and the user can use step (1).
* Only the service technician can use step (2).

<Notes>
Normally, the use with the factory default setting (Disabled) is recommended since the adjustment may decrease
the reproducibility of fine characters and lines.

(1) Press [Scan Setting] on the touch panel and select [ADF Scan Noise Reduction].
By pressing [Low], [Middle] or [High], adjust the noise reduction level to reduce streaks in scanning with
the DF.
After adjusting, perform scanning and check its image quality.

* Explanation of setting value

Setting value Description
None The noise reduction function is disabled. (Default)
Low The noise reduction level is low.
Middle The noise reduction level is medium.
High The noise reduction level is high.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

5-24
 5. Scanning-specific Adjustments

When the noise reduction level for each [Low], [Middle] or [High] is changed, the service technician must
perform the following step.

(2) Enter [05 ADJUSTMENT MODE] and change the setting values for the codes from [7400] to [7404] and
from [8412] to [8415] to adjust the noise reduction level.

Acceptable
[05] Recommended
Color mode Original mode value Default
Code value
range
Text/Photo 05-7401
White and Text 05-7402
Black Photo 05-7403
User custom 05-7400
Text/Photo 05-8413 90 to 120 0 to 200 100
Text 05-8414
Full color
Photo 05-8415
User custom 05-8412
Gray scale --- 05-7404

* Setting "200" provides the weakest noise reduction level, while setting "1" provides the strongest one.
Moreover, when "0" is set for the setting value, this function becomes disabled.
* The noise reduction level for each [Low], [Middle] or [High] of [ADF Scan Noise Reduction] set from the
touch panel is changed. Setting the recommended value provides the most effective result.

After changing the setting value, perform scanning and check its image quality.

 Caution after the adjustment

Perform the adjustment while checking the scanned images since the adjustment may decrease the
reproducibility of fine characters and lines.

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

5-25
5. Scanning-specific Adjustments

e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC/2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC (Ver00) © 2016 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

5-26